PLADS- First Edition

FIRST EDITION

Philippine Association of Landscape Architects

this page is intentionally left blank

Philippine Association of Landscape Architects

this page is intentionally left blank

Published by Philippine Association of Landscape Architects

ABOUT THE COVER

Plaza San Lorenzo Ruiz is a major public open space in the heart of Binondo, Manila. It compliments the adjacent Minor Basilica of San Lorenzo Ruiz or Binondo Church. Originally called Plaza de Binondo and then renamed Plaza Carlos IV of Spain, it was again renamed Plaza Calderon (de la Barca) after the famous Spanish playwright. In September 12, 1981 the plaza then with a large fountain built at its center was renamed after San Lorenzo Ruiz- a protomartyr of the Philippines.

The fountain plaza serves as an open space for outdoor seating and public events being centrally located and surrounded by residential and office buildings and shops. More than providing an oasis, the Plaza San Lorenzo Ruiz gives meaning in what could be ordinary street settings and spaces where people live and work.

The pen and ink rendering is from the sketchbook of Horacio Dimanlig, a landscape architect who often goes on outdoor sketching sessions with fellow visual artists from the Pasig Art Club.

Editorial Committee

Editorial Board

Efren Aurelio

Elizabeth Espino

Cathe Desiree Nadal

Jojo Navarro

Paulo Alcazaren

Horacio Dimanlig

Vic Dul-loog

Ricardo Hilario II

Susan Aquino-Ong

Nappy Navarro

Cecilia Herras-Tence

Jaclyn Alexandra Marie J. Brillantes

Pamela Pagana

Imelda P. Guevara

John Jay Amar Kathleen Lacsina

Managing Editor Associate Editors

PALA PPC HEAD Copy Editor

Technical Group Graphic Team

Chapter 1 - Practicece

Angelo Paulo A. Mogul

Cris Justine G. Ugalino

Mary Trisha G. Iglesia Mariae R. Montero

Chapter 2 - Design

Christine E. Talidong

Angelo Paulo A. Mogul

Ferdinand E. Gutierrez, Jr. Michael John V. Espiritu

Chapter 3 - Process

Mariae R. Montero

Louis Balbino U. Santos

Joey Francis O. Balgos

Glenn Jon T. Bontigao

Dawne P. Favila

Pamela C. Paningbatan

Justine T. Dela Paz

Mary Trisha G. Iglesia

Rachelle Anne M. Abad

Chapter 4 - Materials

Herbert V. Jose

Joey Francis O. Balgos

Glenn Jon T. Bontigao Chapter 5 - Planting

Sherwin O. Ramosa

Herbert V. Jose Christine E. Talidong Chapter 6 - Details

Joey Francis O. Balgos

Cris Justine G. Ugalino

Jose Luis V. Salazar

Ferdinand E. Gutierrez, Jr. Glenn Jon T. Bontigao Michael John V. Espiritu

John Jay Amar Clarisse Mae Barrera

Amabelle Marquez Gabriel Rustaquio Red Castillo

Vignettes

Ian Reimon Buyco Efren Aurelio

PALA BOARD 2021

Pamela Sarunya Pagana President

Marie Christine Endencia Vice President For Internal Affairs

Holtzjosip Abbu Vice President For External Affairs

Loriejoy Rapi Assistant Vice President For Internal Affairs

Joyce Muriel Aguirre Assistant Vice President For External Affairs

Rodyn Flores Secretary

Danilane Lumibao Treasurer

Board Directors

Ruen Balmores Charisse Apalis Adrian Ilog

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Pamela Pagana, PALA President 2021

This book has been long planned by our PALA founders and mentors and we would like to thank the following people in making this book possible:

Our editorial team, Mama Kat and Alexa, who willingly gave their weekends even their weekdays to coordinate, review and organize the book. Jay, our graphics team leader, who gave his best to provide a great layout and book cover.

Ma’am Ces and Sir Paulo who never gets tired in pushing and reminding us to keep moving and finish the book.

Our PALA past presidents, Nappy and Sir Bikoy, who are very supportive and gives advises on how to handle difficulties on finishing the book.

Sir Ace, Sir Epoy, Sir Paulo, Sir Jojo for sharing their expertise

Editorial Board for sharing their knowledge and expertise in making the content of this book.

Technical Team, your effort, patience and time are greatly appreciated in doing the research and content pf our book

Graphics Team, for creating good sketches, layout and

Most especially PALA Board 2021, Dyn, Dane, Christine, Lj, Holtz, Joyce, Yari, Adrian and Ruen for the support and assistance you have given to our LA Standards Team.

Also, this book wouldn’t be possible with all the help and support from our PALA Members.

Thank you.

1.0 PRACTICE

1.1. Introduction

1.2. Definition of Terms

1.3. History of Landscape Architecture in the Philippines

1.4. The Scope of the Landscape Architecture Practice

1.5. Landscape Architecture as a Regulated Practice

1.6. Professional Practice: Landscape Planning

1.7. Professional Practice: Landscape Design Consultancy

1.8. Professional Practice: Landscape Construction Supervision

1.9. Professional Practice: Academe

1.10. Professional Practice: Policymaking and Policy Regulation

1.11. Professional Practice: Project Management

1.12. Professional Practice: Design Management

1.13. Professional Practice: Construction Management in Landscape Architecture

1.14. Digital Technology in the Landscape Architecture Practice

2.0 DESIGN

2.1. Introduction

2.2. Definition of Terms

2.3. Elements of Landscape Design

2.4. Landscape Design Principles

2.5. The Landscape Design Context

2.6. The Landscape Design and Planning Process

2.7. Landscape Design Typologies

2.7.2. Typologies

A . Urban Design B. Transportation Infrastructure C. Public Open Spaces

D. Schools and Campuses

E. Commercial Developments: Malls and Mall Complexes

F. Hospitality Developments: High-end Resorts and Hotels

G. Parks and Recreation: H. Ecological and Environmental Landscapes

I. Productive Landscapes

J. Heritage Conservation K. Hospital and Healthcare Facilities L. Memorial Parks or Cemeteries

M. Interiorscapes

3.0 PROCESS

3.1. Introduction

3.2. Definition of Terms

3.3. Types of Landscape Architectural Projects

3.4. Landscape Architectural Project Stages

3.5. Project Documentation

3.6. Understanding Landscape Cost Factors

4.0 MATERIALS

5.0 PLANTING

6.0 DETAILS

6.1. Introduction

6.2. Definition of Terms

6.3. Hardscape

6.4. Site Elements

6.5. Public Realm Elements

6.6. Swimming Pools

6.7. Water Features

6.8. Landscape Lighting

6.9. Signage and Wayfinding for Parks and Open Spaces

6.10. Softscape Structure Details

6.11. Landscape Engineering

ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T

TOPIC HIGHLIGHTS

Structure of the Document Purpose Revision and Companion Volume

CONTENTS

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

I. Introduction

II. Structure of this Document III. Purpose IV. Limitations of this Document

V. Stakeholders VI. Interpretation

VII. Applicability

VIII. Revisions and Companion Volumes

IX. Related Legacy Documents

I. Introduction

The need for this basic right to quality continues to expand, with more of our natural systems being modified and folded into the inventory of the built environment. With this, development controls such as the National Building Code (i.e., NBC, enacted as RA 6541) prescribe a unified dictum for many aspects of our built environment.

Code; as well as provides technical guidance and instruction for the Landscape Architecture profession and landscape construction industry.

II. Structure of Document

The Philippine Landscape Architecture Design Standards (PLADS) is organized into six chapters, all mutually reinforcing and defining the country’s core concerns of Landscape Architecture practice, as the accompanying chart illustrates.

Development policies on our built environment in the Philippines aspire to deliver a quality of life in which the enjoyment of safe, nurturing, and resilient spaces is conveniently accessible to the public.

Understandably, the scope and content of the NBC has traditionally been and continues to be primarily on architecture and engineering (i.e., A+E), mainly covering the spaces within building envelopes, their immediate vicinity, and associated engineering infrastructure support systems. Yet, the larger context of outdoor footprint where buildings are sited that fall within the ambit of landscape architecture remains unaddressed.

Given that the quality of spaces beyond building envelopes add both tangible and intangible value to projects by way of desirability and resilience, income, and engendering a sense of pride-of-place, establishing a set of Philippine Landscape Architecture Design Standards reinforces areas of development control not included in the current National Building

Figure 1 Various landscape project types

Each chapter provides useful governing standards as guidance for development and installed work.

Figure 2 Structure of Document

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

III. Purpose

The PLADS offers a whole-of-site approach to prescribing a minimum acceptable level of development with how projects should be delivered on the ground to achieve a more balanced development and better-scoped quality of the built environment.

Furthermore, as a helpful resource, it offers definitive guidance to all development stakeholders within the context of practice in the Philippines.

The content embodied in the PLADS ensures a minimum acceptable quality of development or installed work that meets the need for a safe, resilient, and comfortable built environment accessible to the public. It ensures that the quality of both design and installed work meet their intended uses in the landscape, guaranteeing that these shall be adequate in their dimension, size, and capacity; appropriate in their materials and construction; and durable as demonstrated by their resilience.

1

2

Duplicate the wealth of technical design information already openly available in published landscape architecture and site planning design standards and manuals;

Interfere with nor supplant the proprietary standards of practices whose design deliverables already embody or exceed the content and quality of these minimum standards;

3

As a national resource for policy-making and decision-making, the PLADS fills the gap in the country’s current development control toolkit of the built environment.

IV. Limitations of this Document

It should be noted that the PLADS is not meant to be an exhaustive all-inclusive resource for the full range and permutations of design solutions possible. Rather, it prescribes the minimum acceptable basic requirements for key areas of landscape design and construction. Specifically, this document does not attempt to:

4

Claim to be the “Default Manual of Practice,” as various practices are encouraged to formulate and innovate their Manuals of Practice aligned to their business processes;

Recommend on project-specific designs, as the prescriptive recommendations of the PLADS are not meant to be interpreted as project-specific solutions, and recognize that all projects must incorporate specific innovative variants and permutations of designs;

5

Restrict the design and construction of landscape items, systems, and assemblies that exceed the minimum prescription of these standards for project-specific needs, recognizing that more stringent requirements are deemed generally desirable and respected as part of practice prerogatives and project covenants.

Figure 3

Design of landscape spaces entail technical solutions embodied in PLAD’s minimum standard details

V. Stakeholders

VI. Interpretation

The PLADS is meant for use and reference by a broad spectrum of stakeholders in the Landscape Architecture industry, allied professional fields, and concerned regulatory authorities. These include but are not limited to the following:

1. Measurement

Units of measure as indicated throughout the PLADS are in metric-

VII. Revisions and Companion Volumes

The PLADS is a buildable document, allowing for incremental additions and periodic updates as may be needed in response to changing conditions.

VIII. Related Legacy Documents

1. Government authorities at the national level with regulatory powers over development

2. Government authorities at the local level (e.g., provincial governments, Local Government Units)

3. Government authorities regulating professional practice (i.e., Professional Regulation Commission, Board of Landscape Architecture)

4. Practices of Landscape Architecture-site planning

5. Practices of allied architecture and engineering (A+E)

6. Academic institutions and centers of learning offering degree-granting programs

7. Property developers

8. Landscape and development contractors

Figure 4

Metric system used in detail dimensions

The Philippine Association of Landscape Architects (PALA), in coordination with the Professional Regulatory Board of Landscape Architecture (PRBoLA), is the responsible authority for the periodic updating, release, and publication of succeeding revisions to this document in whole or in part.

These Standards shall be read and understood together with a number of related key national documents that are part of the legacy of Landscape Architecture practice in the country, including but not limited to the following:

1. RA 6541 The National Building Code

2. Reconciling Conflicts and Ambiguities

In the event of any inadvertent conflicts and ambiguities noted or cited within the PLADS, the more relevant stringent measure, parameter, condition, or specification within this document shall govern. Should there be a design issue that is not covered, a more stringent measure or condition from a recognized set of standards shall apply, observing best practices.

Where any part of the PLADS is deemed necessary for revision without the need for a substantial revision of the entire document, such a revision shall be covered by a date-stamped, numbered Addendum containing the specific revision or revisions. The Addendum shall be considered an integral part of the Standards.

2. RA 9053 The Landscape Architecture Law of 2000

3. PALA Doc 200

4. All related Professional Regulatory Board of Landscape Architecture ( PRBOLA ) resolutions.

5. Resolutions

6. Design and Planning Guidelines for Hospitals and Other Facilities

7. Guidebook No. 06: Landscape Architecture (PALA, 2020)

page is intentionally left blank

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

1.0 PRACTICE

1.0

P R A C T I C E

This chapter is meant to act as a guide on the “basics” and legal boundaries of the Landscape Architecture profession in the country. It also serves as a reference material for all matters relating to the practice, especially the expected customs when dealing with clients, fellow consultants, and contractors.

CONTENTS

1.1. Introduction 19

1.2. Definition of Terms 19

1.3. History of Landscape Architecture in the Philippines 19

1.3.1. The Birth of Landscape Architecture 19

1.3.2. The Emergence of Landscape Architecture in the Philippines 20

1.3.3. The Philippine Association of Landscape Architects (PALA) 21

A. The Organization 22

B. The Members 22

C. IFLA Membership 22

1.4. The Scope of the Landscape Architecture Practice 22

1.4.1. International Definition of Landscape Architecture (as Defined by UN-ILO) 22

1.4.2. Landscape Architecture as Defined by Republic Act No. 9053 24

1.5. Landscape Architecture as a Regulated Practice 25

1.5.1. Overview: Stakeholders in the Practice 25

1.5.2. Professional Registration and Regulation 25

A. Qualifications to Take the Licensure Examination

B. Obtaining a Certificate of Registration/Professional License

C. Becoming a Member of PALA

D. Setting Up Practice

a. Partnerships, Associations, and Corporations

b. Engaging with Foreign Landscape Architects

E. Suspension and Revocation of Registration/License

1.5.3. The Landscape Architect’s Code of Ethics 27

1.5.4. Interface with Allied Professions 28

1.5.5. Entities Restricted from the Practice 29

1.6. Professional Practice: Landscape Planning 29

1.6.1. Land Use Categories 29

1.6.2. Disaster Risk Reduction and Management 29

1.7. Professional Practice: Landscape Design Consultancy 30

1.7.1. Stages of the Design Process 30

1.7.2. Interface within Projects among Stakeholders 30

1.8. Professional Practice: Landscape Construction Supervision 31

1.9. Professional Practice: Academe 32

1.9.1. Requirements to Enter the Academe 32

1.9.2. Academic Institutions that Offer Landscape Architecture Programs 32

1.9.3. Research 32

1.10. Professional Practice: Policymaking and Policy Regulation 33

1.10.1. Development Permitting 33

1.10.2. Assessment 33

1.11. Professional Practice: Project Management 34

1.12. Professional Practice: Design Management 35

1.12.1. Scope of Work 35

1.12.2. Design Management Services 35

1.13. Professional Practice: Construction Management in Landscape Architecture 36

1.14. Digital Technology in the Landscape Architecture Practice 36

11.1 Introduction and Purpose

This chapter is meant to act as a guide on the “basics” and legal boundaries of the Landscape Architecture profession in the country. It also serves as a reference material for all matters relating to the practice, especially the expected customs when dealing with clients, fellow consultants, and contractors.

This Chapter discusses the definition, scope, and parameters of the Landscape Architecture Practice in the Philippines, beginning with a brief history to provide context on how it emerged and developed as a profession. Relevant laws and board resolutions are referenced and comprise the majority of the information in this Chapter to outline the legal definition, scope, and parameters of the local practice. Also presented are the interfaces among other professions, showing how Landscape Architects interact and collaborate with these allied fields, and the different branches of the profession, highlighting the diversity and wide range of possibilities it can offer. The various digital technologies and their importance to the development of the profession are also touched on briefly.

1.2 Definition of Terms

1.2.1 Professional Regulatory Board of Landscape Architecture (PRPRBoLA)

The collegial body on all matters involving the implementation of policies laid down in RA No. 9053, otherwise known as the “Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000” (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

1.2.2 Landscape Architect

This chapter is meant to act as a guide on the “basics” and legal boundaries of the Landscape Architecture profession in the country. It also serves as a reference material for all matters relating to the practice, especially the expected customs when dealing with clients, fellow consultants, and contractors.

A natural person qualified to practice Landscape Architecture and issued a certificate of registration/professional license and a professional identification card by the Philippine Regulatory Board of Landscape Architecture (PRPRBoLA) and the Professional Regulation Commission (PRC) (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

and enjoyment of various outdoor spaces, which consist of hardscape components and the softscape of plants, such as gardens, sports fields, playgrounds, recreational grounds, camping sites, resorts, national and public parks, historical parks, squares, memorial parks, subdivisions, parks and parkways, zoological and botanical gardens, greenbelts, cemeteries, plazas, patios, yards, outdoor shopping and pedestrian malls, promenades, sidewalks, roads and walkway systems, traffic islands, easements and circles, roof and open interior gardens and courts, and other open spaces; the protection, conservation, and rehabilitation of the natural environment and scenery to enhance the ecological system and quality of life. (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

1.2.4

1.2.3 Landscape Architecture

The functional, orderly, and aesthetic arrangement, changing and development of natural scenery and land areas to produce the most desirable effect for human use

Philippine Association of Landscape Architect (PALA)

The sole national accredited professional organization of Landscape Architects recognized by the PRC.

1.2.5 Professional Regulation Commission (PRC)

The national government agency that administers, implements, and enforces the regulatory laws and policies of the Philippines with respect to the regulation and licensing of the various professions and occupations under its jurisdiction, including the enhancement and maintenance of professional and occupational standards and ethics and the enforcement of the rules and regulations relative thereto (PRC, n.d.)

1.2.6

Securities and Exchange Commission

(SEC)

The national government regulatory agency charged with supervision over the corporate sector, the capital market participants, and the securities and investment instruments market, and the protection of the investing public (SEC, n.d.)

1.3 History of Landscape Architecture in the Philippines

1.3.1 The Birth of Landscape Architecture

The practice of Landscape Architecture in the Philippines stems from a long-running international tradition spanning almost 200 years of formal recognition. Before then, created landscapes were already transforming societies for thousands of years in settled and pastoral Neolithic cultures worldwide and even symbolized in the biblical Eden. Yet, this conscious transformation of the environment beyond agriculture and pastoralism was first coined in 1828 as the term “Landscape Architecture” by Gilbert Laing Meason started a design movement.

As the United States’ territorial expansion grew in the 1800s to include the Philippines, Landscape Architecture eventually entered the local design lexicon in shaping the master plans and beautification of civic spaces for the City of Manila and Baguio.

North America. After its exponential growth in the years following, in 1978, IFLA’s headquarters were established in Versailles, France, moved subsequently to Geneva, Switzerland, and then back again to France.

The term “Landscape Architect” as a professional title was popularized by Frederick Law Olmsted in the United States in 1863, and in 1899, it was firmly established after Olmsted and Beatrix Jones-Farrand, along with others, founded the American Society of Landscape Architects (ASLA).

As Landscape Architecture continued to gain traction globally, the International Federation of Landscape Architects (IFLA) was founded in 1948 at Cambridge in the United Kingdom with Sir Geoffrey Jellicoe as its first president. IFLA at the time comprised 15 member nations from Europe and

1.3.2 The Emergence of Landscape Architecture in the Philippines

Landscape Architecture was formally introduced in the Philippines in 1938. Louis Croft was an American Landscape Architect and planner appointed to work for the Philippine Commonwealth government and

Figure 1. Frederick Law Olmsted Source: National Association for Olmsted Parks, 2022

introduced the field to a handful of Filipino architects. With his influence, Landscape Architecture was added as a subject in the Architecture curriculum of several universities in the 1940s to 1950s. It began to emerge as a profession and was finally established as an independent professional field in 1968.

In the 1960s, the first generation of Filipino Landscape Architects returned to the Philippines after completing their education and training in the United States. Foremost then were Dolores QuimboPerez, who returned to the country in 1963 after obtaining her master’s degree in Landscape Architecture from the University of CaliforniaBerkeley, and the late Ildefonso P. Santos Jr., also known as the “Father of Philippine Landscape Architecture,” who graduated from the University of Southern California. They set up their local practices and lobbied to establish a Landscape Architecture undergraduate degree program at the University of the Philippines-Diliman.

During the profession’s formative years, the general public, academe, government authorities, and fellow

design professionals widely regarded Landscape Architecture as an obscure career, nothing more than ornamental garden design and beautification. This misconception caused confusion with the use of the title “Landscape Architect,” as architects considered the term in conflict with their protectionist law that prohibited using the term “Architect” by those not licensed to do so.

In 1971, the University of the PhilippinesDiliman began offering a four-year undergraduate bachelor’s degree in Landscape Architecture (BLA). This was made possible by the dean of the college at that time, Aurelio Juguilon, and Ildefonso P Santos Jr. This solidified the recognition of Landscape Architecture as a profession and ensured a steady growth in the number of Landscape Architects in the country.

Ildefonso P. Santos Jr. was instrumental in establishing the Specialty Board for Landscape Architecture (SBLA) within the Professional Regulation Commission (PRC). In May 1984, the first professional licensure examination for Landscape Architecture under PRC was held. In 1985, Dolly Q. Perez helped institute the master’s degree

Figure 2. Ildefonso P. Santos Jr.

Source: Ron Mendoza, Mega Publishing

program in Tropical Landscape Architecture (MTLA) at the University of the Philippines-Diliman.

On March 30, 2001, Republic Act 9053 (RA 9053), otherwise known as the “Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000,” was enacted to regulate the practice in the country.

1.3.3 The Philippine Association of Landscape Architects (PALA)

A. The Organization

In the 1970s, as the number of Landscape Architecture professionals started growing in the country,

Ildefonso P. Santos Jr. spearheaded the formation of the Philippine Association of Landscape Architects (PALA). On December 8, 1977, PALA was formally launched as an organization, comprising nine founding Landscape Architects, with Ildefonso P. Santos, Jr. appointed as President and Dolly Q. Perez as Vice-President. Other founding members included George Abrina, Zenaida de la Cruz-Galingan, Oscar Lintag, Sergio Penasales, Felix H. Peronilla, Carlito B. Pesons, and Jose P. Velasquez.

Today, PALA is the only national Landscape Architecture professional organization recognized by the

a. b. c. d. e.

Professional Regulation Commission (PRC). As the duly Accredited Professional Organization (APO) of Landscape Architects in the country, PALA has the following duties and responsibilities (PRC Resolution No. 2018-1089, 2018):

Define the professional responsibilities of its members; Ensure that its members adhere to the Code of Ethics, Responsibilities, and highest professional and technical standards; Improve the standards of the profession through effective collaboration with the Board and the PRC;

B. The Members

Aside from being the sole APO for Landscape Architects in the Philippines, PALA is also the only Accredited Integrated Professional Organization (AIPO) for Landscape Architects, wherein membership of professionals is automatic and mandatory (PRC-Resolution No. 2018-1089, 2018). In other words, upon passing the PRC Landscape Architecture licensure exam, registered Landscape Architects are automatically included as members of PALA.

C. IFLA Membership

Look into the conditions affecting the practice of the profession and to propose policies or measures to the Board or the PRC for its improvement;

Ensure the welfare and best interest as well as harmonious relationship among its members; and

Report violations of the Professional Regulatory Law to the PRC, through the Office of the Legal Service, for possible prosecution or filing of a complaint.

PALA comprises a broad spectrum of professionals in various Landscape Architecture fields, all of whom are responsible for the propagation and advancement of the profession in the country. Many PALA members opt to practice individually or establish their firms. Some engage in regulatory positions in national and local governments and authorities, while others constitute the core faculties of Landscape Architecture programs in different colleges and universities across the country1

1 The different branches of Landscape Architecture practice are discussed in Sections 1.6 to 1.13 of this Chapter.

In 1977, PALA was elected as a member of the International Federation of Landscape Architects (IFLA) during the IFLA Congress in Bahia, Brazil, formally partaking in this global professional society. With this membership, Filipino Landscape Architects are now formally recognized as individual members under IFLA and correspondingly belong to IFLA’s Asia-Pacific Region (IFLA-APR), one of the federation’s four international regional groupings. The other three groups include (1) Europe and the Middle East, (2) Africa, and (3) the Americas (IFLA-APR, n.d.).

1.4 The Scope of the Landscape Architecture Practice

1.4.1 International Definition of Landscape Architecture (as Defined by UN-ILO)

The United Nations’ International Labor Office (UN-ILO) lists Landscape Architecture as a distinct occupational category separate from but related to Architecture and Urban/Town Planning. Under its International Standard Classification of Occupations of 2008, Landscape Architecture is

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS PRACTICE

rural areas, including private and public open spaces, parks, gardens, streetscapes, plazas, housing developments, burial grounds, memorials; tourist, commercial, industrial and educational complexes; sports grounds, zoos, botanic gardens, recreation areas, and farms

Asia-Pacific Middle East

Figure 3. Number of current members of IFLA per region

Source of Data: IFLA , 2021

defined as a technical profession and both an art and a science (ILO, 2004).

The tasks of a Landscape Architect include: Developing new or improved theories, policy and methods for landscape planning, design, and management at local, regional, national, and multinational levels; Developing policy and plans, implementing and monitoring proposals, as well as developing new

or improved theories and methods for national parks and other conservation and recreation areas. Developing new or improved theories and methods to promote environmental awareness; and undertaking planning, design, restoration, management, and maintenance of cultural and historic landscapes, parks, sites, and gardens

Contributing to the planning, aesthetic and functional design, management, and maintenance of infrastructures such as roads, dams, energy, and major development projects;

Identifying and developing appropriate solutions regarding the quality and use of the built environment in urban, suburban, and rural areas, and making designs, plans and working drawings, specifications of work, cost estimates, and time schedules

Monitoring the realization and supervising the construction of proposals to ensure compliance with plans, specifications of work, cost estimates, and time schedules

Planning, designing, managing, maintaining, and monitoring functional and aesthetic layouts of the built environment in urban, suburban, and

Undertaking landscape assessments, including environmental and visual impact assessments for developing policy or undertaking projects; Inspecting sites, analyzing factors such as climate, soil, flora, fauna, surface and subsurface water and drainage; and consulting with clients and making recommendations regarding methods of work and sequences of operations for projects related to the landscape and built environment;

Conducting research, preparing scientific papers and technical reports, developing policy, teaching, and advising on aspects regarding Landscape Architecture, such as the application of Geographic Information Systems (GIS), remote sensing, law, landscape communication, interpretation, and landscape ecology

Managing landscape planning and design projects

1.4.2 Landscape Architecture as Defined by Republic Act No. 90532

Republic Act 9053 (RA 9053), otherwise known as the “Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000” is defined as “An Act regulating the practice of Landscape Architecture in the Philippines, appropriating funds therefore and for other purposes” (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001)3.

Though similar to the description provided by the UN-ILO, the following excerpts from RA 9053 formally define the scope of Landscape Architecture both in the local and international context, taking precedence as the official definition of the profession in the Philippines.

As defined in Article II of RA 9053, the Scope of Landscape Architecture includes, but is not limited to the following:

The act of planning sites and outdoor spaces;

2 Refer to Article II of RA 9053

3 Refer to RA 9053 in the Annex of this Chapter

B. F.

Recommending on and formulating landscape development policies concerning visual resources, streetscapes, the rehabilitation of inner cities, slums and historical districts, parks, and recreation items which are important components of area development plans at the local, regional and national levels, and as components of area development and planning codes, zoning ordinances and other studies;

f. Preparation of plans, specifications, bills of materials, cost estimates, general conditions, and landscape work contract documents;

C.

c. C onsultation, oral advice and direction, conferences, evaluation, investigation, estimates, appraisals and assessment, Landscape Architectural and operational programming;

d. Schematic design, design studies, and development, concepts and contract documents;

g. Construction and project management; giving general management, administration, supervision, coordination, and responsible direction to the planning, designing, construction, reconstruction, enlargement, renovation, repair, orderly removal or demolition, remodeling, alteration, preservation, or restoration of landscape sites or structures including all their component sites and environs intended for private or public use;

e. Preparation of preliminary technical, economic and financial feasibility studies of plans and project promotional services, including preparation of specialized studies such as environmental impact assessments (EIA);

G. D. E.

h. All other works, projects, and activities that require the professional competence of Landscape Architects, including the teaching of Landscape Architecture subjects given in the licensure examinations for Landscape Architects; computer-aided design; the scientific, aesthetic, and orderly coordination of all works and branches of the work, systems,

H.

I. J.

and processes necessary to enhance and safeguard life, health, and property, and the promotion and enrichment of the quality of life; the Landscape Architecture design of engineered structures or any part thereof; i. The planning, layout, and utilization of spaces within and around buildings or structures including their sites; environment and urban design, site planning, outdoor space planning, Landscape Architectural detailing, Landscape Architectural lighting, laying out of associated mechanical, electrical, sanitary, plumbing and other utility systems, equipment, and fixtures; and j. Site programming, grounds maintenance and administration, and Landscape Architectural conservation and restoration A.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS PRACTICE

1.5 Landscape Architecture as a Regulated Practice

1.5.1 Overview: Stakeholders in the Practice

Planning Consultants

Project Owner

Government (Land Use, Permits, Taxes, Decision -Making)

Project Manager

Construction Manager

Field Experts

Contractors

Suppliers and Vendors (Revenues and Safety)

Maintenance Providers

Figure 4. Stakeholders in the Practice

The rights and privileges, duties, and responsibilities of a Landscape Architect are enlisted under Rule 5, Section 14-15 of the Revised Rules on the Accreditation of Professional Organizations and Integrated Professional Organizations by the PRC (Republic Act No, 9053, 2001).

Clientele/ Business Entities ( Products/ Service Quality and Value)

Employee Income

Investors (Financial Returns)

1.5.2.

Professional Registration and Regulation

The PRC licensure examination for Landscape Architecture is a requirement to obtain a valid professional license and become a fully registered Landscape Architect in the Philippines. The following excerpts are taken from RA 9053 and specify the licensure and registration processes4:

Communities Health Safety Economic Development

COMMISSION ON HIGHER EDUCATION (CHED)

Institutions Offering a B Landscape Architecture Program

PHILIPPINE ASSOCATION OF LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS (PALA)

Figure 5. Stakeholders in the Profession

PROFESSIONAL REGULATORY BOARD OF LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE (PRBoLA)

A. Qualifications to Take the Licensure Examination

The Landscape Architecture licensure examination is conducted annually. To be eligible to take the exam, each applicant must comply with the following requirements:

1. BeacitizenofthePhilippinesorany country with which the Philippines has a foreign reciprocity agreement regarding the practice of Landscape Architecture;

2. Hold a bachelor’s or postgraduate degreeinLandscapeArchitecturefrom anacademicinstitutionrecognizedby

4 The complete text and details of these processes can be found in the Article IV of RA 9053

the Commission on HigherEducation(CHED)oraccredited with either the International Federation of Landscape Architects (IFLA) or the American Society of Landscape Architects (ASLA);

3. Have no convictions in any crime involving moral turpitude.

B. Obtaining a Certificate of Registration/Professional License

of issuance duly signed by the Chairperson of the Commission shall be issued to every registrant who has paid the required fees.

C. Becoming a Member of PALA

A Landscape Architect automatically becomes a member of PALA once the individual passes the licensure exam and becomes a registered Landscape Architect under the PRBoLA. Regular members and fellows of the PALA shall:

Licensure Renewal

Once a Landscape Architect passes the licensure exam, the registration process is as follows:

1. A certificate of registration/ professional license shall be issued and subject to registration fees.

1. Have the rights and privileges, includingtherighttovoteandbevoted upon, if and when the individual is in good standing;

In order to renew Landscape Architecture licensure, a registered Landscape Architect must submit a valid Certificate of Member in Good Standing from PALA and official receipts of membership dues prior to the issuance or renewal of certificates of registration and professional identification cards (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001). D. Setting Up Practice

a. Partnerships, Associations, and Corporations5

for a partnership, association, or corporation using the terms “Landscape Architects,” “Landscape Architects and Planners,” “Architects and Landscape Architects,” or any such appropriate term; provided that eighty percent (80%) of the members of the partnership, association or corporation are persons properly registered/ licensed as Landscape Architects (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

• Only duly registered/licensed Landscape Architects shall render work and services proper for a Landscape Architect as defined in RA 9053 (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

2. The certificate of registration of Landscape Architects shall bear the signatures of the Chairperson of the Commission, the Chairperson, and membersoftheBoardstampedwith the official seal indicating that the person named is entitled to practice the profession with all the privileges allowed under RA 9053.

3. A professional license bearing the registration number and date

2.Beeligibletooffice,tocommittees, to membership on the PALA Board of DirectorsandCommitteemembership;

3. Pay annual membership dues;

4. Attend at least one general membership meeting annually; and

5. Provide an updated profile upon request of the PALA Board.

• Persons properly registered/ licensed as Landscape Architects may among themselves, or with persons properly registered/ licensed in any field related to Landscape Architecture such as town/urban planning, civil engineering, architecture, and interior design, forestry, and other fields of specialization, form and obtain registration with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)

• Licensed Landscape Architects are not allowed to form a One Person Corporation (OPC) for the purpose of exercising the profession unless otherwise provided under special laws (SEC Memorandum Circular No. 7, 2019).

b. Engaging with Foreign Landscape Architects

• Foreign Reciprocity Rule6

5 Refer to Section 26 under Article V of RA 9053

6 Refer to Section 29 under Article V of RA 9053

NoforeignLandscapeArchitectshall beregisteredandissuedacertificate of registration/professional license to practice Landscape Architecture in the Philippines or be entitled to anyoftherightsandprivilegesunder

RA 9053 unless the country of which theyareacitizenspecificallypermits Filipino Landscape Architects to practice within its territorial limits on the same basis as the citizens of such foreign country (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

c. Suspension and Revocation of Registration/License

The PRBoLA shall have the power, upon due notice and hearing, to revoke or suspend the certificate of registration or professional license of a Landscape Architect, or to cancel a temporary or special permit for any of the following reasons:

Appeals for appropriate relief.

1.5.3. The Landscape Architect’s Code of Ethics8

Landscape Architects shall promote social development by enhancing quality of life and addressing social development concerns through planning and design.

• Coverage of Temporary/Special Permits

1. Any cause specified in the preceding SECs

2. The use or perpetuation of any fraud or deceit in obtaining a certificate of registration/ professional license

Foreign national tasked to perform Landscape Architecture services in the Philippines for government or privately-owned projects shall, before assuming duties, functions, and responsibilities, secure a special/ temporary permit from the PRBoLA, subject to the approval by the PRC, and the Department of Labor and Employment (DOLE), and comply with mandatory conditions as stated in Article V of RA 90537

3. Incompetence, negligence or gross ignorance or abatement of the illegal practice of Landscape Architecture

4. Chronic inebriety or habitual use of drugs

5. Violation of the provisions of RA 9053, its implementing rules and regulations, or of policies of the PRBoLA, including the Code of Ethics for Landscape Architects

Landscape Architects are always expected to conduct themselves in the most professional and ethical manner possible. The Code of Ethics for Landscape Architects provides guidelines that must be followed in any sort of Landscape Architectural practice. Violations to this Code of Ethics may result in the revocation of the Landscape Architect’s license (PRPRBoLA Board Resolution No. 02, 2004). The following list is a general summary of the Code’s contents:

A. Landscape Architects must promote and protect Landscape Architecture through their moral conduct and advocacy of the profession

C. Landscape Architects must continue to renew their license in the interest of maintaining credibility as a professional.

D. Landscape Architects have a responsibility to their employers and clients by providing unwavering professional commitment, protecting confidentiality of information, not engaging in acts that constitute conflict of interest, and by receiving fair remuneration.

7 Refer to Section 30 under of Article V of RA 9053 f or details on mandatory conditions

Any such action of the PRBoLA shall be subject to appeal to the PRC whose decision shall be final, but not without granting the right of the Landscape Architect to apply with the Court of

B. Landscape Architects shall protect the environment and public interest by putting their personal interests and that of their clients as secondary to the interests of the larger public.

8 Refer to PRBoLA Board Resolution 02 S2004 (Code of Ethics for Landscape Architects) in the Annex of this Chapter]

E. Landscape Architects have a responsibility to the Philippine Association of Landscape Architects (PALA) and shall contribute to its welfare and advancement. Landscape Architects shall strive to be members of good standing that actively participate and support the organization’s programs.

F. Landscape Architects have a responsibility to fellow Landscape Architects and shall not do any harmful act that would injure or damage

another Landscape Architect’s reputation and career. Landscape Architects shall obtain work based on personal experience and ability and shall do so in the spirit of fair competition.

G. Filipino Landscape Architects shall observe proper relations with foreign consultants and shall adhere to their rights as embodied in RA 9053 and its implementing rules and regulations.

1.5.4. Interface with Allied Professions

Profession Title Accredited Professional Organization

Environmental Planner EnP

Philippine Institute of Environmental Planners

Architects Ar United Architects of the Philippines (UAP)

Interior Designer ID Philippine Institute of Interior Designers (PIID)

Agriculturist Agr Philippine Association of Agriculturists, Inc

Forester For Society of Filipino Foresters (SFF)

Typical Roles Overlapping with LA Governing Law

Land Use Planning, Site Planning, Environmental Compliance, etc RA 10587

Building Permits, Occupancy & Locational Clearances RA 9266

Building Permits, Occupancy & Locational Clearance, Furniture Design RA 10350

Consultancy & Research Projects HB 7246

Consultancy & Research Project, Land Use Planning, Urban Landscaping Forest Management Plan, EIAs, etc RA 10690

Geodetic Engineer G. Engr. Geodetic Engineers of the Philippines (GEP) Topographic Surveying, Site Grading, Soil Type, Cartography, GIS, etc RA 8650

The scope of the Landscape Architecture practice encompasses analysis, planning, design and construction, and stewardship of the natural and built environment (ASLA, 2013), and thus overlaps with many of these related professional fields. As with any profession, communicating and interacting with specialists is important to be able to have a more holistic and integrated project output. This section lists the allied professionals that commonly interact and collaborate with the Landscape Architect in the different aspects of the Practice.

Civil Engineer C. Engr.

Philippine Institute of Civil Engineers (PICE); As sociation of Structural Engineers in the Philippines, Inc, (ASEP)

Sanitary Engineer SE Philippine Society of Sanitary Engineers (PSSE)

Master Plumber MP

National Master Plumbers Association of the Philippines (NAMPAP)

Mechanical Engineer M.Engr. Philippine Society of Mechanical Engineers (PSME)

Electrical Engineer E. Engr.

Table 1. List of Allied Professionals

Institute of Integrated Electrical Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (IEEE)

Building Permits, Occupancy & Locational Clearances, Quantity Surveying, Project Management, Construction Management

RA 544

Building Permits, Occupancy & Locational Clearances, Public Health Management RA 1364

Building Permits, Occupancy & Locational Clearances, Plumbing System Design RA 1378

Building Permits, Occupancy & Locational Clearances, HVAC System Design, etc. RA 8495

Building Permits, Occupancy & Locational Clearances, Lighting Utilities Design RA 7920

1.5.5. Entities Restricted from the Practice

Unless a person is issued with a certificate of registration and professional license, or a temporary/ special permit given by the Board and Commission, a person may not use the title “Landscape Architect” or any other related names, such as “Landscape Consultant,” “Landscape Designer,” “Landscape Engineer,” “Landscape Artist,” “Landscape Agriculturist,” “Landscape Horticulturist,” “Landscape Planner,” “Land Planner,” “Site Planner,” or similar terms that suggest the work of a Landscape9 Architect. Violations will be met with corresponding penalties as stated under RA 9053 (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

1.6. Professional Practice: Landscape Planning

Landscape planning pertains to the large-scale planning of development areas, towns, cities, and regions and involves macro-level analysis and application (Simonds, et al, 2006).

Landscape Architects may be involved in landscape planning and work on a broad scale of projects that vary across different land uses and contexts. Any land development with a total project cost of PHP 350,000 and above is required to have a Landscape Architect that will sign and seal all plans, drawings, and specifications (HLURB, 2013).

1.6.1.

Landscape Use Categories

General land use categories include the following types of developments: a. Forest & forest land b. Agriculture c. Agri-industrial d. Water e. Tourism f. Eco-tourism g. Socialized Housing h. Informal Settlements i. Commercial j. Industrial k. Institutional l. Parks and Recreation m. Cemetery/memorial parks n. Buffer/greenbelts

o. Infrastructure/utilities, transportation, and services p. Landfill/dumpsite

These land uses are further grouped into four general zoning classifications (HLURB, 2013):

A. Protection Land Use – Includes natural and restored forests; rehabilitated and reforested degraded mining areas; critical ecosystems for protection; disaster-prone areas; critical watershed areas; marine protected areas; all prime agricultural lands; ecologically fragile and environmentally critical areas whose conversion will result in serious environmental problems and threats to public health and safety; natural and man-made areas or sites of cultural, historical and anthropological significance which are declared as such by internationally recognized institutions; and all other areas not included and declared as production areas.

C. Settlements and Institutional Land Use – Comprised of urban and rural lands used for the development of new settlements or improvement of existing ones;

D. Infrastructure Land Use – Refers to the provision of land needed for basic services that foster economic growth, including road networks, transportation and communication facilities, social services, environment service facilities, and utilities.

B. Production Land Use – Refers to land use allotted for efficient, sustainable, and equitable production, including agricultural lands, coastal and marine zones, production forests, mineral lands, energy resource lands, industrial lands, and tourism development areas.

1.6.2. Disaster Risk Reduction and Management Landscape Architects play an active part in the disaster risk reduction and management (DRRM) aspects of landscape planning. As designers of the built environment, the scope of their work includes the consideration and implementation of the RA 10121 or the “Philippine DRRM Act”, which clearly states the need to “adopt a disaster risk reduction and management approach that is holistic, comprehensive, integrated, and proactive in lessening the socioeconomic and environmental impacts of disasters including climate change, and promote the involvement and participation of all sectors and all

to Section 33 under Article VI of RA 9053

stakeholders concerned, at all levels, especially the local community” (2010).

The Philippine DRRM Act aims to ensure the best possible outcome in a situation when disaster strikes. To achieve this, certain aspects of the DRRM Act require Landscape Architects to respond and act accordingly in creating their projects. These aspects and their expected outcomes must always be considered as part of the design and planning process, as listed below:

standards during or immediately after a disaster.

d. Rehabilitation and recovery –

To restore and improve facilities, livelihood and living conditions, and organizational capacities of affected communities; to reduce disaster risks following the ‘building back better’ principle.

B. Conceptual Design Stage

Initial design concepts for the project are formulated. These design concepts are based on pre-design research and typically include two or more schemes to satisfy the client’s requirements and provide choices.

D. Design Development Stage

2.7.

Professional Practice: Landscape Design Consultancy

a. Prevention and mitigation – To avoid hazards and mitigate their potential impacts by reducing vulnerabilities and exposure and enhancing the capacities of communities.

b. Preparedness – To establish and strengthen the capacities of communities to anticipate, cope, and recover from the negative impacts of emergency occurrences and disasters.

c. Response – To provide life preservation and meet the basic subsistence needs of the affected population based on acceptable

2.7.1.

Stages of the Design Process

Design concepts are usually presented through boards, printouts, and audio-visual presentations. The conceptual design can include the probable cost of construction based on the schemes presented.

C. Schematic Design Stage

The design is detailed and further refined. The viability and constructability of the design are clarified, revised if needed, and finalized. This coordination prevents any issues during the construction implementation of the project. The design development includes the updated probable cost of construction reflecting the actual measurements and cost of the given design.

E. Construction Documentation Stage

This branch of the Landscape Architecture Practice involves the following activities for each stage of a project’s design process, as listed below:

A. Pre-design Stage

The project brief is studied in detail before conducting any design work. Suchactivities under this stage include site inventory, site analysis, historical analysis of the area’s socio-cultural, environmental, and development patterns, and user activity pattern studies.

This stage is about refining the final selected design concept if more than one has been presented. Renders of the final design showcase the intended look of the constructed design. The design should be closely coordinated with both the client and other consultants involved in the project. The schematic design can also include a refined probable cost of construction based on the final approved scheme.

This stage includes creating drawings, specifications, and other auxiliary documents needed in the bidding process and subsequent construction implementation. These documents are based on the approved design development drawings and may adjust according to actual, ongoing site matters.

These documents are marked ‘FOR CONSTRUCTION’ and should be signed and sealed by the Landscape Architect to be considered valid.

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS PRACTICE

2.7.2. Interface within Project among Stakeholders

2.8. Professional Practice: Landscape Construction Supervision

This branch of the Practice involves construction supervision of a project throughout the following stages:

Client/Owner

Project Manager

It is also the responsibility of the Landscape Architect to attend site coordination meetings regarding any changes in the design that might affect other trades.

A. Bidding Stage

Upon the completion or submission of the final plans for construction, it is the Landscape Architect’s responsibility to assist the owner and/or project manager with clarifications in the design and the specifications raised by the contractor to provide a proper quotation, typically done through RFIs (Request for Information) and Bid Clarificatory Meetings.

B. Construction Administration and Supervision

Upon awarding of the contract to the selected contractor, the Landscape Architect validates whether the design was properly implemented on-site and updates the drawings accordingly as per site conditions.10

Assisting the contractor by answering RFIs, approval of materials for installation, checking and validating shop drawings submitted by the contractor are also done during this period

C. Final Inspections and Handover Documentation.

Once the contractor has completed the project, the Landscape Architect conducts a final inspection and does a punch list of the finished areas. The punch list11 and other handover documents must be validated by the Landscape Architect for the contractor to be able to consider the project finished.

10 These changes reflected in drawings are formally called “ Change Bulletin ”

1.9. Professional Practice: Academe

This section discusses the academic branch/community of the Landscape Architecture Practice.

1.9.1. Requirements to Enter the Academe

of PALA. Other requirements may vary depending on the position being applied for, the details of which can be found in Article VII of CHED Memorandum Order No. 45, Series of 2017.

program be a bachelor’s degree as it encompasses both science and art courses in almost equal proportions.

Espina of UP-Diliman.

Only registered Landscape Architects can engage in teaching Landscape Architecture at the tertiary level in all private and public academic institutions offering degree programs in Landscape Architecture (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

In general, there are four types of academic positions that can be applied for (CMO No. 45, 2017):

A. Program/Department Head

B. Vice/Assistant Program Head

C. Full-time faculty

D. Part-time faculty member

To be eligible to apply for any of these positions, the applicant must be a registered Landscape Architect under PRC and an active member

1.9.2. Academic Institutions that offer Landscape Architecture Programs

In the Philippines, four universities offer Landscape Architecture as an undergraduate degree program (Galingan, 2020). To ensure that these Bachelor of Landscape Architecture (BLA) programs can keep pace with the demands of global competitiveness, the Commission on Higher Education (CHED) released its first set of Policies and Standards specifically for BLA in 2011, also known as CHED Memorandum Order No. 34, Series of 2011.

A. University of the PhilippinesDiliman, Quezon City, Metro Manila

In 1975, the BLA program was first offered under the College of Architecture in the University of the Philippines-Diliman, becoming the first of its kind to be offered in the country. It was decided that the

In 1985, the master’s degree in Tropical Landscape Architecture was first offered as the local practice began to flourish and there was an increasing demand for graduates both nationally and internationally. Furthermore, the master’s program encouraged BLA graduates to study and train to become future faculty in an Academic circle in need of more members (Galingan, 2020).

Address and contact information: UPCAComplex,EpifanioDelosSantos Street, University of the Philippines, Diliman Campus, Quezon City; [632] 8981-8500 local 3134 to 36, [632] 8957-7962 [direct line], upca. studentconcerns.upd@up.edu.ph, upca_admin.upd@up.edu.ph.

B. Bulacan State University, Malolos City, Bulacan

The BLA program at Bulacan State University was first offered in 2007 under Melodia Sampan. Saturnina Parungao, the dean at that time, initiated the BLA program with the encouragement of Dean Mary Ann

Address and contact information: Mac Arthur Highway, Barangay Guinhawa, Malolos City, Bulacan; [044] 919-7800, officeofthepresident@ bulsu.edu.ph.

C. University of San Carlos, Cebu City,

Cebu

In 2004, the University of San Carlos (USC) opened its Bachelor of Science in Landscape Architecture (BS LARCH) program under the leadership of Socorro B. Atega. After acquiring her master’s degree in Landscape Architecture from Harvard University in 1975, Atega came back to the Philippines and became a part-time faculty member of USC’s Architecture Department, where she taught Landscape Architecture courses. Together with Omar Maxwell Espina, she developed the BS LARCH program at USC. It was only in 2018 when the BS LARCH program was changed to Bachelor of Landscape Architecture (BLA).

Address and contact information: Banilad Road, Sitio Nasipit, Cebu City; [+6332] 230 0100 [Talamban

Campus]

D. University of San Agustin, Iloilo City, Iloilo

and replicated in various projects.

1.10.

The University of San Agustin offers a BLA program under the College of Technology (USA, 2021).

Address and contact information: Gen. Luna St., Iloilo City; 09203964726, cea@usa.edu.ph

1.9.3.

Research

Engaging in research and writing contributes to the advancement of knowledge in the Landscape Architecture profession. Landscape Architecture research involves a technical and broad understanding of ecosystems, cultural frameworks, functional systems, and social dynamics (Azlan, 2013).

Researchers are granted various opportunities, including presenting at local and international conferences, applying for research grants from various institutions and entities, having their work published in journals, and having their research applied

1.10.1.

Professional Practice: Government Service (Policymaking and Policy Regulation)

Development Permitting

Landscape Architects may be included in the development permitting 12 of a project if they are considered necessary to be part of the approving body for the review and signing of plans for a project.

1.10.2.

Assessment

Landscape Architects may have a special role in the assessment of outdoor spaces, including publicly owned outdoor spaces like sidewalks, planting strips or islands, and streets, or private developments with outdoor spaces that require government approval. Assessment works encompass checking and approving plans, design and planning principles, materials usage.

12 Development permitting is the process of issuing or granting the final permit to any developer in order to pro ceed with the detailed and necessary development activities as reflected in the approved plans (Municipality of Bacolor Pampanga, n.d.)

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS PRACTICE

Take for example Quezon City’s Green Building Ordinance, which requires the integration of minimum standards of green infrastructure in the design of new or existing buildings, other structures, and movable properties within the city in exchange for incentives (Order No. SP-1917, 2009).

A local ordinance reviewer assesses whether the development has complied with the standards before granting the incentive. Architects and engineers may review the development’s green areas, but a Landscape Architect has the ability to provide a more technical and holistic assessment of these matters. As a designated local ordinance reviewer, the Landscape Architect can evaluate if the building’s green infrastructure has been implemented properly and complies with the Green Building Ordinance standards.

Figure 7. One Montage Cebu Green Wall

Source : www. cubesystem.com.ph, 2020

Another example is when government development authorities such as the Bases Conversion and Development Authority (BCDA) oversee widescale multi-use master plan developments that require the integration of various structures, open spaces, roadways, transportation infrastructure, etc. Landscape Architects may be employed to assess the plans submitted by the consultants of investor-developers (typically fellow Landscape Architects as well) to verify compliance with the regulations and guidelines of the development area.

1.11. Professional Practice: Project Management

The main objective of Project Management is to relieve the client of all concerns xrelating to construction and contractual matters 13 . A Landscape Architect or Landscape Architectural firm may engage in Project Management if they have the following qualifications (PALA, date):

Experience in cost control and forecasting;

Stages in the Project Management Process

In this type of engagement, the Landscape Architect acts as an independent third party entirely devoted to coordinating the work output, scheduling of consultants (including architectural, engineering, and specialists) and contractors, and managing the project’s finances. Different project stages require specific responsibilities from the Project Manager, as seen in the next section.

construction feasibility of various systems;

c.Prepareperiodicevaluationandcost estimates in relation to the overall budget;

d. Recommend early purchase of materials and equipment that require a long lead time of procurement;

Experience in work scheduling;

Knowledgeable in construction materials, equipment and methods;

Knowledgeable in contracting principles and procedures;

Knowledgeable in local building codes, labor and safety codes, taxation, and legal issues.

A. Planning and Design Stage

In regular consultation with the planning, architectural, and engineering consultants, at this stage, the Project Manager shall: a. Advise the client and the consultants on the consequences of various design decisions and options and how these will affect corresponding schedules and costs;

e.Identifycriticalpathsaffectingwork schedulesandcheckbidpackagesand specificationstoeliminateoverlapping jurisdictions among service providers and contractors.

B. Construction and Post-Construction Stage

In concurrence with consultants, the Project Manager shall:

a. Review bids to check compliance with the stipulated conditions;

b. Recommend awardees of bids;

13 Refer to Chapter 3 - Process for a more detailed explanation on Project Management Processes

b. Review plans, designs, and specificationsagainstsiteconditions to properly advise on appropriate materials alternatives and the

c.Observe compliance with specifications;

d. Confer with the consultants for the interpretation of plans, drawings, and

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

PHILIPPINE

specifications;

e. Ensure the contractors’ works-inprogress remains unimpeded and adhere tothe design intent;

f. Ensure that staff and equipment comply with onsite protocols for the testing and acceptance of materials and other deliveries;

g. Maintain cost accounting records of all work components, including reviewing and approving request payments by contractors for accomplished work.

1.12 Professional Practice: Design Management

The role of the Landscape Architect as a Design Manager is to provide the design team with leadership, management systems, information, support, and training to enable the achievement of project targets in terms of quality, value for money and timeliness (Bhatt, 2018).

1.12.1 Scope of Work

The Design Manager takes on the role of a coordinator rather than a designer. Design Manager is responsible for:

A. Establishing clear communication and collaboration among relevant involved parties to promote an effective flow of design, procurement, and execution method

B. Foreseeing risks before they happen

C. Implementing designs through activities and project management

D. Coordinating and integrating procurement processes

b. Monitor that the deliverables scheduleisfollowedandnotingdelays through a monthly task list c. Coordinatemilestonesapprovaland decisions between the client, the contractor, and the design team

Project Management Design Management

E. Connecting stakeholders in decision-making of design-related activities

1.12.2.

Design Management Services

The aim of Design Management is to ensure that the design team delivers the necessary services as stipulated by their contract and to ensure proper coordination among all parties involved. Design management services include the following:

Management

Design Planning

a. Foresee and schedule deliverables of the design team

Value Management

a.Ensurethattheclient’sdesignintent isfollowedandwell-communicatedto all the relevant parties involved in the design and construction teams

b. Design optimization and review of the overall design to see where it can be optimized and where the client could save resources (depending on the client’s needs)

B. C.

Organization and Control

a. Ensure that the design team is organized and leads the coordination between the relevant parties involved.

established, and all relevant parties involved are informed and understand it.

D.

Monitoring and Reporting

a.Provide design team progress assessments in conjunction with the project timeline and other parties involved outside of the design team

b.Ensure that all documents released by the design team are properly documented and follow the format of the project

2.13. Professional Practice: Construction Management

c.Assign completion dates that are feasible and realistic with the capabilities of the design team and with the overall project timeline

Construction Management ensures that design intent is met, and the construction and project handover remain on schedule and within budget. The Landscape Architect may engage in the Construction Management of a project that has been designed personally or by another Landscape Architect. Depending on the project’s complexity, the Landscape Architect may assign a qualified, full-time staff member onsite to supervise, manage and monitor the overall project schedule, and coordinate with the various contractors and trades. Services include the following:

d.Provide management reports on the design team’s performance as requested by the client

e.Provide recovery plans that can help alleviate or provide a solution to problems as they happen or before they happen, as part of the project’s risk management plan.

A.Pre-bid Preliminaries - Involves preparing documents for construction, including the forms for contract letting, invitation and instructions to bidders, and bid proposals;

B.Bid Evaluation - Entails assisting the client in obtaining proposals from contractors, preparing an abstract of bids, evaluating bid tenders, and awarding and preparing contracts;

C.Construction ManagementIncludes deciding on all claims of the client and contractor and matters relating to the execution and progress of work, interpreting Contract Documents, preparing change orders, gathering and submitting written guarantees required of the contractor or sub-contractors to the client, determining the amount owing and due to the contractor based on assessments made regarding the contractors’ requests for payment, issuing the corresponding Certificates for Payment (which shall certify the current quantity and quality of work completed relative to the Contract Documents), determining the date of substantial and final completion, and issuing the corresponding Final Certificate for Payment to the contractor

2.14. Digital Technology in the Landscape Architecture Practice

important for large scale projects where strict project timelines must be followed regularly and systematically.

As a design tool, digital technology allows Landscape Architects to give clients an enhanced and realistic experience of a project throughout its design process. Furthermore, the use of technology improves a landscape development’s efficiency and durability.

This section lists specific examples of digital technology used in the various branches of Landscape Architecture Practice.

A. Project Management

Software

These software help manage the entire project life cycle. These may also include word processing programs, spreadsheet tools, presentation and email programs. Some of the software used for Project Management include:

• Microsoft Office Suite

The Landscape Architecture industry requires the use of various digital technology due to the level of efficiency and precision needed in the execution of expected services. The use of technology is especially

• Microsoft Project

• GanntPRO

B. Technical Drawing Software

These software allow the Landscape Architect to draft drawings precisely

and efficiently. Furthermore, they provide a realistic presentation of what the expected design output of the project will look like.

SUMMARY

P R A C T I C E

1. Landscape architects interact and collaborate with allied fields and other professions through management and functional interfaces.

2. Practice of Landscape Architecture in the Philippines is regulated, and developed within the parameters and scope set by CHED, PRBoLA and PALA.

3. Relevant Laws and resolutions allow a fair and well defined practice of the profession in the country.

4. Landscape planning pertains to the large-scale planning of development areas, towns, cities, and regions and involves macro-level analysis and application

5. Design Management in the profession ensures that the design team delivers the necessary services as stipulated by a contract enabling proper coordination among all parties involved.

6. Digital Technologies is an important aspect of the profession , building future-proof design services within the field.

C H A P T E R 1.0

P R A C T I C E

SUMMARY OF

ILLUSTRATIONS

AND REFERENCES

A scene in a corporate district sketched by LArch. Efren Aurelio .

Landscape Architecture has always been instrumental in shaping cities and communities, it is said to “stake claim to creating places that impact and benefit so many people” ( Holmes, 2021)

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figures and Tables Page

Figure 1. Images of Frederick Law Olmsted

Source : National Association for Olmsted Parks Website, 2022

Figure 2. Photo of National Artist Ildefonso P. Santos

By : Ron Mendoza, Mega Publishing, 2019

Figure 3. Number of Current Members of IFLA Per Region Figure 4. Stakeholders in the Practice

Figure 5. Stakeholders in the Profession

Figure 6. Interface with Project Among Stakeholders

Figure 7. One Montage Cebu Green Wall Source: www.cubesystem.com,ph, 2020

Figure 8. Different Management Roles in Project Deliveries

Figure 9. CAD and REVIT Software used in Landscape Design

Figure 10. Adobe Photoshop Used in 2D Rendering

Figure 11. 3D Rendering Using SketchUp and Lumion

Table 1. List of Allied Professionals

20 21 23 25 25 31 33 35 37 37 37 28

REFERENCES

Azlan, N.I. (2013). Research Methodology in Landscape Architecture. Trafford Publishing.

Bhatt, M. (2018). Necessity of Design Management in Construction Industry. Retrieved from https://www. academia. edu/37128064/NECESSITY OF DESIGN MANAGEMENT IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY.

Christensen, A.J. (2005). The Dictionary of Landscape Architecture and Construction. The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc.

Commission on Higher Education. (2011). CHED Memorandum Order (CMO) No. 34 Series of 2011 – Policies, Standards, and Guidelines (PSG) for the Bachelor of Landscape Architecture (BLA). Retrieved from https://ched.gov. ph/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/CMO-No.34-s2011.pdf

Commission on Higher Education. (2017). CHED Memorandum Order [CMO] No. 45, Series of 2017 – Policies, Standards, and Guidelines (PSG) for the Bachelor of Landscape Architecture (BLA). Retrieved from https://ched. gov.ph/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/CMO-45-s-2017.pdf

Congress of the Philippines. (2001). Republic Act No. 9053 – Philippines Landscape Architecture Act of 2000. Retrieved from https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/2001/03/30/republic-act-no-9053/

Congress of the Philippines. (2010). Republic Act No. 10121- Philippine Disaster Risk Reduction and Management Act of 2010 Retrieved from https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/2010/05/27/republic-act-no-10121/.

Galingan, Z. (2020, December 16). Pan-Asian Challenges of the Practice of Landscape Architecture, International Conference on Landscape Architecture Profession (And Establishment of Mutual Recognition of Professional Qualifications).

Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board. (2013). Comprehensive Land Use Plan Guidebook. Retrieved from https://hlurb.gov. ph/services/local-government-unit/clup-guidebook/.International Federation of Landscape Architects. (n.d.). About IFLA APR. Retrieved from https://iflaapr.org/about-ifla-apr

International Labor Organization. (2004). International Standard Classification of Occupations: Proposal Landscape Architects. Retrieved from https://www.ilo.org/public/english/bureau/stat/isco/isco88/p15.htm

Municipality of Bacolor Pampanga. (n.d.). Issuance of Development Permit - Subdivision and Memorial Parks. Retrieved from https://www.bacolorpampanga.gov.ph/wp-content/uploads/MUNICIPAL-PLANNING-DEVELOPMENT-OFFICE pdf#:~:text=The%20Development%20Permit%20is%20the,reflected%20in%20the%20approved%20plans

Philippine Association of Landscape Architects. (2022). PALA DOC 200. Publisher.

Professional Regulation Commission. (2004). BoLA Board Resolution No. 02 Series of 2004 – Code of Ethics for Landscape Architects. Retrieved from https://www.prc.gov.ph/sites/default/files/Code%20of%20Ethics%20%20for%20 Landscape.pdf

Professional Regulation Commission. (n.d.). Mandate. Retrieved from https://www.prc.gov.ph/mandate

Quezon City Council. (2009). Ordinance No. SP-1917 S-2009 – Green Building Ordinance of 2009. Retrieved from http://quezoncitycouncil.ph/ordinance/SP/sp-1917,%20s%202009-1.pdf

Securities and Exchange Commission. (2019). SEC Memorandum Circular No. 7 Series of 2019 – Guidelines on the Establishment of a One Person Corporation (OPC). Retrieved from https://www.sec.gov.ph/mc-2019/mc-no-07-s2019-guidelines-on-the-establishment-of-a-one-person-corporation-opc/

Securities and Exchange Commission. (n.d.). Mandate. Retrieved from https://www.sec.gov.ph/about-us/mandate-missionvalues-and-vision-2/

Simonds, J.O., Starke, B.W. (2006). Landscape Architecture: A Manual of Environmental Planning and Design. The McGrawHill Companies.

Waterman, T. (2009). The Fundamentals of Landscape Architecture. AVA Publishing SA

page is intentionally left blank

2.0 DESIGN

This chapter is dedicated to providing a detailed list of the design requirements and considerations for the most commonly used landscape development typologies. Several landscape development typologies are listed in this chapter, and the methodologies for how they may be classified are logically explained to clarify organization.

CONTENTS

2.1. Introduction 58

2.2. Definition of Terms 59

2.3. Elements of Landscape Design 59

2.4. Landscape Design Principles 62

2.5. The Landscape Design Context 66

2.5.1. Human Context 66

2.5.2. Site Context: Climatic Region 69

2.6. The Landscape Design and Planning Process 70

2.6.1. The Landscape Design and Landscape Site Planning Process 71

2.6.2. The Landscape Planning Process 71

2.7. Landscape Design Typologies 74

2.7.1. Methodologies in Typology Organization 74

2.7.2. Typologies 74

A. Urban Design 74

a. Vertical Greenery b. Private Homes B. Transportation Infrastructure 76 a. General b. Land Transportation c. Airports d. Seaports

C. Public Open Spaces

a. Public Open Spaces 78 b. Privately-owned Public Space D. Schools and Campuses

E. Commercial Developments: Malls and Mall Complexes

F. Hospitality Developments: High-end Resorts and Hotels 82 G. Parks and Recreation 83 a. Playgrounds b. Outdoor Sports Areas Outdoor Courts Golf Courses c. Community Gardens: Public Gardens H. Ecological and Environmental Landscapes 87 a. Landscapes Near Nature Areas b. Landscape Preservation Sites 90 c. Heritage Tree Protection d. Eco-tourism Sites: Ecolodges e. Brownfields

I. Productive Landscapes 94 a. Farm Tourism b. Permaculture

J. Heritage Conservation 95 a. Battlefields

K. Hospital and Healthcare Facilities 96 a. Privately-owned Hospitals and Healthcare Facilities b. Public Hospitals and Healthcare Facilities c. Therapeutic Gardens

L. Memorial Parks or Cemeteries 99 M. Interiorscapes 100

2.1 Introduction and Purpose

This chapter is dedicated to providing a detailed list of design requirements and considerations for the most commonly used landscape development typologies.

This chapter prescribes basic guidelines for the design and planning of landscape architectural developments in order to arrive at functional, aesthetic, environmentally sustainable, and culturally sensitive spaces. The basic elements and principles of design and the landscape design context are discussed to ensure suitability to the Philippine setting. The distinct processes involved in landscape design and landscape planning, respectively, are identified and explained, giving a step-bystep procedure for how landscape developments are manifested, from initial conceptualization to implementation.

This chapter is dedicated to providing a detailed list of the design requirements and considerations for the most commonly used landscape development typologies. Several landscape development typologies are listed in this chapter, and the methodologies for how they may be classified are logically explained to clarify organization.

The design process is complex, but this chapter does not attempt to go into such detailed technicalities.

Figure 1. Landscape design enhances user experience and the quality of surrounding

Figure 2. Landscape design also improves pedestrian safety and mobility

2.2 Definition of Terms

2.2.1

Hardscape

Structures incorporated into a landscape, such as fountains, benches, or gazebos. It also includes the hard surface elements of a planned or designed landscape, including walks, driveways, edges, walls, and fences (Christensen, 2005)

2.2.2 Indigenous Cultural Communities/Indigenous Peoples (ICCs/IPs)

A group of people or homogenous societies who have continuously lived as an organized community on communally bounded and defined territory and who have, under claims of ownership, occupied, possessed, and utilized such territories, sharing common bonds of language, customs, traditions and other distinctive cultural traits that are different from the majority of Filipinos (Republic Act No. 8371, 1997)

that will allow for the implementation of the landscape planning concept.

2.2.4 Landscape Planning

The development and application of strategies, policies, and plans to create successful environments, in both urban and rural settings, for the benefit of the current and future generations (Landscape Institute, 2016).

2.2.5

Landscape Site Planning

Landscape Site Planning - A process that involves studying and analyzing a specific site to fulfill the best design for a particular requirement needed. This includes studying the physical and socio-cultural aspects, environmental conditions, potential users of the area, and more. This process leads to proper site selection and site analysis to formulate appropriate conceptual plans. (Simonds & Starke, 2006)

2.2.6

Softscape

Softscape – Vegetation that is incorporated into a landscape, such as shrubs and flowers (MerriamWebster, 2021).

2.3. Elements of Landscape Design

2.2.3 Landscape Design

The culmination and application of studies done on an area resulting in plans, drawings, and specifications

Figure 3 A sample of landscape design charette, which initially lays down ideas and vision in sketch

Design often begins as a twodimensional exercise during the Conceptual Stage1, Where different uses and intent areas are defined on a plan, areas begin their transformation into volumes

1 The Conceptual Stage is when the preliminary design framework of the project is explored. Refer to Chapter 4 Process for a detailed explanation of Landscape Architec tural Project Stages.

of space as the concept is further developed. Each space is defined by the combination of size, shape, material, color, texture, and other qualities that best satisfy the desired intent. While planning is twodimensional, three-dimensional thinking takes the designer into the realm of design (Simonds & Starke, 2006). Spaces are defined by the base plane, overhead plane, and vertical elements.

2.3.1 Spaces

Plans define areas in square meters or hectares, but space is designed in volumes enclosed and organized by physical elements. A tall vertical element in the middle of a flat open space becomes a point of orientation that people are drawn to when they cluster around it or come to rest at its base. People naturally tend to protect their flanks, so a vertical plane or wall will give this protection and suggest shelter. Two intersecting walls create a corner, and more corners provide more enclosure. The addition of overhead planes provides more control over the space from above (Simonds and Starke, 2006). Moreover, emotional responses such

as tension, relaxation, gaiety, and contemplation can be created by manipulating the size, form, texture, color, and abstract expression of a space.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS DESIGN

An open field with a level ground plane can generate a sense of being overwhelmed and unprotected to the

Figure 4. Space is designed in volumes enclosed and organized by physical elements. A.

Spatial Size

The size of an interior space has a strong effect on people’s feelings and behavior. Outdoor spaces can create similar psychological effects.

timid, but freedom and openness to the bold. A volume of space may be stimulating, or it may be relaxing. It can be immense or confining. People

are attracted to those spaces that suit their purpose and are repelled by or have little interest in those unsuited to the intended use (Simonds & Starke, 2006).

Spatial Form

The saying that “form follows function” can generally mean that “any object, space, or thing should be designed as the most effective mechanism for doing the job at hand” (Ibid, n.d.). If this includes aesthetic and intellectual considerations, and the designer achieves apparent harmony of form, material, finish, and use, the object should work well and be pleasant to see.

C.

Spatial Color

In the creation of meaningful spaces, the knowledgeable handling of color is essential (Simond and Starke, 2006). There are many theories of color and systems of color application that can be used in landscapes. One such theory is the Chinese theory of volumetric color design, where the color arrangements of nature are followed

The base plane is treated in earthy colors such as the hues and values of clays, loams, stone, gravel, sand, duff, and moss. The blues and bluegreens of water are rarely used on base planes or floors unless in places

where walking is discouraged. Walls and overhead structures are given colors of tree trunks and branches, such as blacks, browns, and deep grays. The Chinese theory of color is also used for materials, textures, and forms. All features and scenes observed in nature have their harmonious coloration system.

2.3.2 Base Plane

The ground plane also referred to as the base plane, is where all the uses or elements of a space are assigned. Typically shown on the plan are the different uses of the base plane and their relationships. The natural base plane surface is often the earth’s surface, composed of soil, vegetation, and water bodies. The base plane can be inclined or undulating, hard or soft, impervious or pervious. (Simonds and Starke, 2006).

2.3.3 Overhead Plane

For outdoor spaces, the overhead plane is typically regarded as open to the sky. Sometimes, however, overhead structures are required for shelter and height control. Overhead

structures are significant in the Philippine setting, where the dry and rainy seasons require outdoor spaces to have sufficient protection from both the sun and rain. It could be as light as fabric, natural as a tree’s understory, or as solid as concrete. Aside from controlling the penetration of sunlight and rain, it can control the color of light and cast shadows on the base plane. Ideally, the overhead structure is kept simple because it is sensed more than it is seen (Simonds and Starke, 2006).

2.3.4. Vertical Plane

Out of the three volumetric planes, the vertical plane is the most visually apparent and the easiest to control (Simonds and Starke, 2006). Vertical elements can block unwanted views or frame desired views; assist in leading users to an intended destination; enclose spaces partially or completely, or be used as safety barriers. They can also be used as focal points of a space, such as a sculpture or a feature tree in the middle of an open space.

base plane

overhead plane

Figure 5. Base Plan & Overhead Plane

Monuments, arches, and obelisks are some examples of common vertical elements found in big cities around the world.

Figure 6. Vertical Plane articulates the spaces in front of it.

2.3.5. Time

can be remodeled for new uses or planting patterns remade to invoke the previous landscape character. The future can also be considered by leaving spaces that can be added on to or by guaranteeing the longterm preservation of significant historical elements. Seasonal changes that involve extended or shortened daylight hours, the blooming or shedding of plants, the growth of trees into maturity, and the weathering and decay of materials all lend to the awareness of time in the design of spaces. According to Lynch, “the planner provides for the celebration of the present time, the great anniversaries and events, so that there may be a sense of occasion as well as a sense of place” (1984).

design principles that organize features and elements to produce a good design.

2.4.1. Unity

B.

Just as important as the understanding of space in design is the awareness of the influences of time. Both space and time are the dimensions where we exist. Good design preserves the evidence of the past use and meaning of a space. This can be as basic as seating areas or as complex as the spiritual significance of an ancient monument or tree. Contrasts between new and old contribute to the perception of the passing of time. Parts of buildings

2.4. Landscape Design Principles

Visual design elements alone do not make landscape design. Design must undergo a process that considers several aspects such as the land, environment, and user needs to ensure a visually pleasing, functional, and ecologically healthy design. To ensure that these elements have the right balance and harmony, one should understand the landscape

Unity refers to working with the design as a whole by following a design style or theme. It ensures organization and order through continuity, repetition, and proximity or interconnection. Continuity refers to the consistent use of the design elements and features, particularly in form, texture, and color.

Repetition creates patterns or sequences in the landscape to evoke a sense of predictability and familiarity. It can be as simple as using the same landscape feature, either softscape or hardscape, several times.

A.

If the design allows, repetition can be made more interesting by alternating colors or textures. Repetition should be applied carefully as this may create monotony if overused and confusion if underused.

Figure 7. Continuity is often exhibited in layouts of sidewalks, arcades and streetscapes

Figure 7. Repetition

C.

Proximity or Interconnection

is the grouping or physical linkage of landscape features based on proximity. Depending on the design theme or style, the elements’ overlapping, spacing, or isolation can create a unified design.

the elements’ overlapping, spacing, or isolation can create a unified design

2.4.2.

Simplicity and Variety

These are design principles that can be achieved depending on the degree of repetition of the landscape feature.

B. Variety - adds interest to the design and makes the landscape livelier and more stimulating. A lack of variety results in a stiff and uninteresting design.

A. Simplicity - means removing nonessential features from a design but still preserving its integrity. Therefore, each element and feature in the design composition must have meaning. A simple design brings clarity and purpose to the design (Hansen, 2010).

Figure 8. Proximity of Interconnection

Figure 9. Simplicity in design

Figure 10. A variety of landscape elements

2.4.3. Emphasis or Dominance - refers to focalization and highlighting a landscape feature to make it stand out. The human mind is always drawn to a subject which emerges or is easily identifiable through size, shape, and color. Dominance may highlight several focal points in the landscape, such as radial designs and converging lines leading to a subject. This design principle can engage and excite the users.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 11. Dominance

A. Subordination

-refers to design features that support another feature that is given more emphasis. They serve as the backdrop for a focal point and assist in attracting the user to a particular point in the landscape.

B. Opposition

-can be achieved by contrasting features based on color, form, texture, and lines. It can be used for softscape designs. Pairing opposites can make an excellent combination to highlight features that other elements don’t have, but should be used with other design principles to achieve harmony.

2.4.4. Order

Order refers to the equilibrium or equality in visual attraction around an imaginary axis or central point. It aims to achieve harmony through a balanced spatial layout. This can be achieved through massing, symmetry, asymmetry, or perspective.

A. Massing

Effective massing of landscape features starts by grouping them based on their similarities and adding them to the composition, usually around a central feature.

B. Symmetry or Formal Balance is achieved by mirroring the objects from one side of an imaginary axis. The repetition of features on both sides of the axis shows absolute balance and evokes passive formality.

Figure 14. Symmetry

Figure 12. Subordination

Figure 13. Opposition

C. Asymmetry or Informal Balance is used for free-flowing design, giving the user a natural and casual experience. Balance is achieved wherein both sides of the axis do not necessarily mirror each other, but elements interact to make both sides have equal visual weight.

Figure 15. Massing of plants and elements

Figure 16. Assymetry

D. Perspective Balance

-refers to the balance of features and elements through the levels of perspective. Unlike asymmetry, which suggests an equal visual weight on both sides of the axis, perspective balance considers the differences in visual weight between a view’s foreground, midground, and background. Depending on the subject or dominant feature, emphasis can be commonly found in either the foreground or background.

2.4.5. Scale and Proportion

As landscape design principles, scale and proportion are both associated with size and measurement.

the human scale. Varying textures and colors with similarities in size and proportion can create a balanced and unified design.

2.4.6. Rhythm

Rhythm creates motion through the repetition of elements in regular sequences. It is related to visual movement as it guides the user to different parts of the landscape.

2.4.7. Transition or Gradation

Figure 17. Perspective balance

REVIEW NOTES:

LANDSCAPE DESIGN PRINCIPLES:

1. Unity a. Continuity b. Repetition c. Proximity

2. Simplicity and Variety

3. Emphasis or Dominance a. Subordination b. Opposition

4. Order a. Massing b. Assymetry c. Symmetry d. Perspective Balance

Transition or gradation refers to a gradual change in the characteristics of a feature, leading to a change in area altogether with seamless connectivity and movement.

Figure 18. Scale and proportion

5. Scale and Proportion

6. Rhythm

7. Transition or Gradation

A. Scale refers to the comparative value of a feature or element relative to human size or a fixed structure. Scale may also refer to a feature’s comparative size or value in relation to another feature.

Unlike repetition, which may be monotonous, creating a transition makes the landscape more interesting and harmonious.

Figure 19. Rhythm

B. On the other hand, proportion refers to the comparative value of all parts of the landscape in relation to one another. Proportion in plants is always relative to the size of the structure dominating the design and

Figure 20. Transition or gradation

Visual design elements alone do not make landscape design. Design must undergo a process that considers several aspects such as the land, environment, and user needs to ensure a visually pleasing, functional, and ecologically healthy design.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

2.5.The Landscape Design Context

Before any design is created, the design context must be understood. Context refers to the circumstances of the design, which give meaning as to why it is being created in the first place. The question of who the design will cater to and where it will be located forms the basis of the design context, leading to a holistic analysis of design considerations and appropriate application of the landscape design principles discussed in the earlier section.

a landscape design is useable for all. Individual user requirements include design considerations catering to the comfort and convenience of a person. In contrast, cultural considerations include design considerations catering to the Filipino people as a group of individuals with similar characteristics. These cultural considerations discuss how Filipino culture affects landscape design and the resulting integration that emerges from this relationship.

Proxemics describes four types of social distances between people that relate to measurable physical distances:

1. Intimate distance is the distance between intimate partners and family members. Measurable distance between these individuals may be as close as 0.45m away.

2.5.1. Human Context

How a landscape design is experienced is a personal matter and may vary for different individuals. However, there are general standards that serve as a baseline to make a landscape usable for everyone, regardless of personal perceptions.

This section discusses the general requirements that must be considered for humans, as individuals and as part of a culture, to ensure that

A.

Individual User Requirements

Individual user requirements that affect landscape design are enumerated and discussed in this section.

a. Proxemics

Proxemics is the study of how individuals unconsciously structure space to match their level of comfort with their surroundings. It is the study of measurable distances between people as they interact with others, depending on the type of relationship.

2. Personal distance is the distance between good friends and acquaintances. The measurable distance among these individuals may range between 0.45m to 1.20m.

Each type of social relationship has its translation into measurable physical distances. These relationships affect the size and usability of space depending on the expected social situation of the area being designed. A private, familyoriented resort development may have a more intimate setting, while a public, transient area in the city may be vast and open. Being able to achieve users’ expectations when it comes to the social distances they experience is important when designing for their satisfaction (Philip, 2001).

3. Social distance is the distance among casual acquaintances business partners. The measurable distance among these individuals may range between 1.2m to 3.5m away.

4. Public distance is the distance encountered on formal occasions or among individuals who are detached from one another. The measurable distance among these individuals is usually at 3.5m or further.

b. PWD Considerations

All landscape spaces should aim to be equitable and accessible to all types of users, including Persons with Disabilities (PWDs). This allows every individual to experience the landscape design independently and with minimal help. The general design considerations for PWD access include placing access ramps for wheelchair users, providing tactile flooring and railings for the visually impaired, and visual cues and signage for the hearing impaired. Batas Pambansa Blg. 344 or the Accessibility Law (1983)

outlines all required standards for PWD accessible areas and is used as the primary reference for proper implementation of PWD inclusive design1.

c. Health & Hygiene

By virtue of being outdoors, landscaped spaces are more subject to pest and vermin exposure, especially if the areas are not maintained well. Because of this, health and hygiene issues may arise for these kinds of developments and may affect a person’s health. Issues such as water stagnation and landscape waste disposal should be adequately addressed to avoid pest infestation and mosquito breeding. Proper waste disposal and collection are also vital in preventing the spread of pests and vermin. Outdoor trash bins should be designed to minimize contact by having pedals instead of handles and should remain enclosed and sealed off to avoid pest attraction.

Addressing these issues also makes landscape design more suitable for individuals who have a certain comfort level regarding sanitation.

Pollen-sensitive users or those who may have allergies must be considered, especially in health facilities. For hospitals and clinics, plants with pollen or allergen potential should be avoided for the sake of sensitive patients.

d. Safety

1 See Chapter 6 Details for detailed drawings of PWD facilities.

The safety of all types of individuals is of utmost importance in designing landscapes. This includes the safety of pedestrians, cyclists, children, the elderly, and PWDs. Landscape elements such as benches or play areas should be located away from steep slopes and roadway hazards. For walkways and bike lanes, specifying plants or trees that are not prone to breakage and become falling hazards can prevent potential dangers to pedestrians and cyclists. Non-slip flooring materials should be specified for all outdoor surfaces. Given the tropical climatic conditions of the Philippines, safety from rain and sun exposure must also be considered in locating and

providing the proper amenities for user protection. Lighting is also an important design consideration at night to prevent crime and unforeseen accidents or collisions.

e. Convenience

Landscape design is considered convenient if it can be used or experienced by the individual with little effort or difficulty. Wayfinding elements such as visible signage can help users easily identify their location or provide directions to other areas. Ensuring user comfort is another way of making a landscape design more convenient, such as providing benches every 15-20 meters along a long walkway or ample open space to make the experience less tiresome.

trolleys.

B.

Cultural Considerations

a. Cultural Characteristics

Cultural requirements encompass integrating cultural habits and customs in the design to create spaces that resonate with the users. Certain cultural habits unique to Filipinos are essential considerations in landscape design and planning, enabling designers to contribute to Philippine vernacular character. In general, three Filipino characteristics contribute most to how Filipino culture is translated into local landscape design:

Clan Culture

f. Accessibility

Accessibility creates efficient pathways between connected areas. Accessible spaces must consider the circulation of all forms of movement in the landscape, other than pedestrian movement, as each individual has different accessibility needs. This includes vehicle drivers, cyclists, PWDs, and maintenance personal with equipment such as

Filipinos can be described as clannish, preferring to belong to or associate with groups of people with similar backgrounds or status. This distinct Filipino characteristic is attributed to the following cultural norms:

• In social settings, it is common to see an extended family or a Barangay community doing activities together, such as

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

seeing someone off the airport, for example. Recreational activities such as a trip to a park, resort, church, or shopping mall are often multi-family affairs. In landscape planning, this cultural trait is worth considering in both small- and large-scale landscape projects.

and education about shared ownership of public spaces and their value and purpose in society and the environment.

the benefit of the environment, such as designing for more trees or using paving materials with a good solar reflectance index (SRI)2

b. Indigenous Cultural Communities and Indigenous Peoples

• Filipino culture has a characteristic tendency to have a low level of social responsibility beyond the family or group. This is apparent especially with how Filipinos give little importance to the upkeep of public open spaces, often littered or vandalized. Filipinos tend to see these spaces as someone else’s responsibility. This issue can be addressed through proper planning and design of landscapes

• Families of similar status and background tend to choose to live in the same area, resulting in exclusivity and a greater sense of security needs. These preferences in housing and neighborhood types are important cultural aspects that landscape architects need to consider in neighborhood and landscape planning.

Preference for Shade

Perhaps because of the tropical weather, Filipinos generally do not like having direct sun exposure as it causes discomfort. Whether at the poolside deck or the outdoor cafe, it is common to see Filipinos staying in shaded areas. Outdoor activities tend to occur in the early morning and late afternoon when the sun’s intensity is lowest. For Landscape Architects, designing to create shaded places for people’s comfort and wellbeing is vital., Equally important are landscape design strategies that minimize the heat island effect for

• Maximalism

The Filipino word “abubut” translates to trinkets or knick-knacks valued not for their usefulness but for the emotional connection Filipinos attach to them. Borloloy, on the other hand, are accessories or ornaments that are added to accentuate an object or space. The jeepney, with its elaborately designed exterior, is an excellent example of borloloy. (Lorenzo, M.C. 2015) The Filipino’s penchant for filling up every available space with things, referred to as Maximalism, strongly correlates to abundance and wealth, where having more is better than less. Maximalism through abubut and borloloy is not limited to the home, but may also be apparent in Filipino landscape architecture and other design fields.

In some cases, landscape developments may be located near or on ancestral lands that belong to Indigenous Cultural Communities or Indigenous Peoples (ICCs/IPs). Ancestral lands of ICCs or IPs are protected under the Indigenous Peoples Rights Act (Republic Act No. 8371, 1997). Therefore, it is important that the planning and design for landscapes located in these socially, culturally, and physically sensitive areas should be geared towards protecting and conserving their culture and way of life. The design process must be inclusive of ICCs/ IPs and allow them to partake in the decision-making aspects of any development that impacts their land

c. Historical Considerations

2 The Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) is a measure of a surface’s ability to reject solar heat. It is defined so that a standard black is 0 and a standard white is 100 (Heat Island Group, 2021).

There may be times when landscape developments are subject to restrictions because of historical or cultural features in the area that must be protected. These restrictions may come in the form of a national law or a local ordinance. Naturally, the design of the landscape must adhere to the governing laws of the specific area. To ensure the preservation

of historical or cultural sites, new landscape developments must be designed to complement these features for seamless integration of the existing and the new.

2.5.2. Site Context: Climatic Region

The Philippines has four climatic regions based on the distribution of rainfall (PAG-ASA, n.d.):

Climate Type 1: Maximum rain period from June to September

Climate Type 2: Maximum rain period from December to February

Climate Type 3: Short dry season from December to February

Climate Type 4: Rainfall is evenly distributed throughout the year Insert Climate Map here

Figure 21. Philippine Climate Map from the Philippine Atmospheric, Geophysical and Astronomical Administration.

The Philippine climate is either tropical rainforest, tropical monsoon, or humid subtropical in higher altitude areas. Depending on which region the site is located in, the landscape development must ensure that its softscape design is suitable to the location. Microclimate is also a design consideration. This might affect the conditions of specific areas within the landscape – e.g., a shady area where plants requiring full sun may not be suitable.

Identifying the climatic region of the site leads to more informed planning and design decisions for the selection, location, installation methodology, and maintenance of softscape in the landscape design.

Figure 22. Waiting sheds are important landscape elements both in urban and rural areas of the country -- a refuge for pedestrians from sun & rain.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

2.6. The Landscape Design and Planning Process

2.6.1. The Landscape Design and Site Planning Process

The design process is typically carried out in linear order, as shown in the following steps below. However, a project can revert to a step and revise the space programming or design accordingly. Examples of these situations might include a change in the client’s preferences, newly identified site constraints, or other issues that arise in the middle of the final design stage or during construction stages3.

Step 1.

Determining Requirements from the ProjectBriefandTermsofReference

The landscape architect’s design must deliver the requirements of the project. Furthermore, the Landscape Architect’s responsibility is to recommend what additional requirements are needed or which requirements can be disregarded.

Step 2.

Conducting a Site Inventory and Analysis

All landscape designs must consider the various site conditions before any kind of design can be established.

When conducting a site inventory, the following general items are considered:

that are obstructed by the site

• Site utilities

• Existing site access to main roads and other outside elements

b. Social

• Stakeholder participation

• Potential users of the landscape

• Potential non-users that will be affected

• Historical elements

• Cultural elements

• Price range and level of affluence of the development and its surroundings

• Financial considerations and economic potentials of the development to the locality

a. Biophysical

• Site location and its relation to its immediate vicinity

All landscape design projects are based on a client’s Project Brief or Manual. This serves as the foundation for the whole landscape design process, from the inventory, analysis, conceptualization, and design programming, to the detailing.

3 Refer to Chapter 3 Process for a detailed explanation of Landscape Architectural Project Stages.

• Natural resources within and the surrounding areas

• Zoning, setbacks, height, and other developmental restrictions

• Topography

• Source and movement of water

• Orientation

• Existing vegetation

• Climatic conditions

• Existing structures

• View that can be seen and views

Once all items are taken into account, they will be analyzed in relation to the project brief and its requirements. All analyses and studies must be related to the potential developments to be done. This includes but is not limited to the following items:

a.

Locations of design spaces within the site

Vantage points of the site

b. c. d. e.

Support elements and utilities that need to be added and placed on site Circulation and accessibility planning Studying the effects of the various design elements on the current site conditions

The site analysis is usually summarized into the StrengthsWeaknesses-Opportunities-Threats (SWOT) Analysis. In the Strengths category, the current positive aspects of the site that can be utilized are listed. The Weaknesses are the current negative aspects of the site that must be considered. The Opportunities pertain to the positive effects that will occur when the new spaces and elements are developed. These also include the potentials for locating and placement of different spaces together. Lastly, Threats are the potential adverse effects of the various elements and spaces to their

respective existing and proposed areas.

Step 3. Creating Functional Diagrams

The Functional Diagrams translate the site analysis into design. They give a visual representation of the site’s functional space programming. This process is exploratory, allowing the Landscape Architect to study different configurations and spatial arrangements prior to the final conceptual drawings. Functional diagrams include space programming diagrams, bubble diagrams, form compositions, and proximity matrices.

can voice concerns about the design at this stage, allowing the Landscape Architect to adjust the design before the final design drawings.

After these stages, the Design Development Stage follows, where the landscape design is drawn to completion in preparation for Construction Documentation. These drawings inform the client of the specifics and details of the landscape design. This phase is the last opportunity for the client to comment and change items in the landscape design before construction. Any changes here will be coordinated and reflected in the construction drawings for implementation.

for construction implementation. Clarity of drawings is crucial so that the execution of the design intent is correct. The drawings in this stage are distributed to bidders, after which the awarded bidder will use these documents as a reference during construction. Any changes during construction will incur costs if there are items already purchased or works done. These changes come in the form of FCD drawing revisions, also known as “Change Bulletins,” aiming to properly show additional drawings and adjustments to reflect on-site conditions and solutions.

2.6.2. The Landscape Planning Process

goals. The steps encompass studying the biophysical and socio-cultural systems of a landscape to determine the best land uses. (Ahern, 2005)

Step 4. Developing the Conceptual and Schematic Drawings and Design Plans (Approval and Coordination from Schematic Stage to Design Development Stage)

The Conceptual and Schematic Design Stages are when the intended total landscape design is created and presented to the client through conceptual images, perspectives, and rendered drawings. The client

Step 5.

Drawing Final Landscape Architectural Drawings (Construction Documentation Stage)“For Construction Documentation” (FCD) drawings are done when the Design Development drawings are approved. During this stage, the landscape design is finalized and detailed

Landscape Planning is similar to Landscape Design, but is more of a multidisciplinary endeavor that is larger in scale and more complex in nature. It typically involves the enhancement, restoration, and creation of landscapes (Ersoy, 2016). Sustainable landscape planning can be modeled after Steiner’s Ecological Planning Model (based initially on Ian McHarg’s Ecological Planning Method), which addresses multiple abiotic, biotic, and cultural

The steps are generally linear, moving from Step 1 to Step 11. These are depicted in the solid bold arrows. These solid bold arrows are double-headed because reverting to the previous step to clarify and update information is important in maintaining the accuracy of the assessment and planning. The solid non-bold arrows depict the transdisciplinary aspect of planning. The arrows represent the influence of information from a different step that might affect ideas and plans. Lastly, the dotted lines signify the importance of the involvement of the stakeholders of the project in the planning process. They can influence and contribute in almost all steps, making them effective and reliable sources of information.

Each step in Steiner’s Ecological Planning Model is described in further detail below.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Step 1. Problem and opportunity identification

Step 4. Local-level inventory and analysis

Determine the current issues of the area being studied. Conduct an inventory and analysis to extract data (physical, socio-cultural, etc.) about the area. The analysis in this step is more focused on determining the issues and problems of the study area.

Step 2. Goal establishment

From the analysis, identify the goal and create objectives to break down the problem into smaller tasks that will cumulatively achieve the goal.

Conduct a more detailed analysis of affected sites. The localized analyses will ensure that macrocreated solutions are suitable to the area that it is planned for.

Step 5. Detailed studies

Conduct detailed studies for special items or elements within the master plan. This includes coordination with experts of a specialized field or pertinent personalities of the locality. These studies will be used as a basis for the feasibility and effectiveness of macro analyzed areas.

Step 3.

Regionallevelinventoryandanalysis

- Conduct a macro analysis of the region to achieve the set objectives and goals.

Step 6. Planning concepts

- Formulate planning conceptsprior to the creation of a detailed landscape plan. The planning concept will mesh all areas and land

Steiner’s Ecological Planning Model (1991)

uses under a single encompassing concept to ensure that the various areas of different land uses are cohesive.

Step 10.

Plan and Design implementation

Step 7. Landscape plan - Include the detailed plan of the area to be developed. This would include the final details and complete drawings and specifications that will allow the construction of the development.

- Oversee the implementation process to ensure that the intended plan will be followed.

Water as Ecologically Driven Landscape Planning

Step 8.

Education and citizen involvement

Collect the affected citizens’ insights and allow them to study and give comments on the landscape plan. This ensures that the final plan is inclusive of the concerns of those affected by the development.

Step 11.

Administration - Ensure proper maintenance and administration after project implementation to align with sustainability goals and user satisfaction. This also provides opportunities to determine any improvements required of the current plan.

An ecological approach to planning spaces usually incorporates the movement of water as the prime influencer on how spaces connect and function. The high, low, and average water levels are the determinants of space usage. When the movement of water is used as a driver for design, flora and fauna can thrive, and the overall biodiversity of the landscape improves.

Nature-based stormwater management strategies should be aligned with the site’s natural course of water to improve water quality and recharge rivers and aquifers successfully.

A series of swales, rain gardens, and catchment basins are used in the landscape design shown in the image above.

Step 9. Design explorations - Include the possible changes and adjustments based on citizen participation. Explore alternative methods to implement the plan as necessary.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 23. Sample storm water management strategy (Source: SGS Design)

2.7.

Landscape Design Typologies

2.7.1. Methodologies in Typology Organization

The classification of landscape development typologies can be quite complex, as various typologies may be appropriately placed under more than one category. This makes certain typologies fluid and can cause overlaps in terms of where they may be classified. For example, “Vertical Greenery” or “Private Homes” may be classified under “Urban Design,” but in actuality, these typologies need not only be designed for urban areas. Another example is “Community Gardens,” which may be classified under “Parks and Recreation.” Still, it may also be classified under “Ecological and Environmental Landscapes” if the development has been aptly designed for ecological sustainability.

they are most commonly found or how they are most commonly used.

The Landscape Typology Matrix

One such study that attempts to form a structured organization of landscape types is the Landscape Typology Matrix (Talidong et al., 2021). This study organizes landscape typologies into three main categories: accessibility, landscape usage, and environmental sensitivity. The details of this study can be found in the Annex A of this Chapter.

associated with the horizontal plane, but there are various opportunities for vertical landscapes, especially with the continuous innovations in the market for vertical greenery installations4. In developments with limited space, incorporating vertical greenery serves as an option to increase green areas and lower building temperatures.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

General

• Vertical greenery systems must be structurally sound for safety purposes.

For the sake of clarity and formality, however, the following section classifies the various landscape typologies in a straightforward manner, basing their organization on commonalities, whether it be where

2.7.2. Typologies

This section provides a comprehensive list of applicable landscape development typologies in the Philippines. However, it does not provide a complete list of all typologies and may be added to in subsequent versions of this document. Each landscape design typology is presented below with its own set of landscape design and planning considerations.

A.

Urban Design

a. Vertical Greenery Landscape design is usually

4 Refer to Chapter 6 Details for details on vertical greenery.

• Accessibility for maintenance requirements must be considered in vertical greenery, especially if the system is several storeys high on the surface of a building. Maintenance personnel must have a safe and efficient way of accessing the system for irrigation, pruning, plant replacement, and other maintenance activities.

• If the vertical greenery system is located at a high altitude, plants may be subject to intense winds, resulting in wind damage and dryness. The location of the system and its corresponding wind exposure must be considered to ensure that the plants will not be subject to such harsh environments.5

5 Refer to Chapter 6 Planting for requirements of podium planting.

Figure 24. Vertical greenery installations

Plant Selection & Considerations

Choosing which plants to use influences what type of vertical greenery system to install. In general, there are two types of vertical greenery systems: (1) support and (2)carrier. Support systems are designed to guide plants up a vertical surface, while carrier systems contain planting media on a vertical surface.

Support System

1. Climbing and cascading plants are appropriate to use for support systems

2. Support systems require plants to be planted on grade if the intended height growth reaches less than 3 meters height. Otherwise, plants are placed in containers for every 3-meter height interval.

Carrier System

1. Groundcovers, shrubs, ferns, and grasses are appropriate to use for carrier systems.

2. Carrier systems can be

horizontal or vertical. In a horizontal system, plants are grown in substrate media similar to a typical landscape, while in a vertical system, plants are grown on a vertical surface (Chiang & Tan, 2009).

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

1. Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

2. PD 1096 - The National Building Code of the Philippines

3. Quezon City Ordinance No. SP1917 - Green Building Ordinance of 2009

b. Private Homes

Private homes are personal spaces. As such, it is important to prioritize the preferences of the owner of the residence over that of the Landscape Architect. It is, however, the Landscape Architect’s job to integrate all these design choices together to make a cohesive, functional, and aesthetically pleasing space (Booth, 2012).

In the sample residential landscape above, small spaces are maximized with wide doorways that provide a blended transition from indoor to outdoor spaces. PWD-friendly landscape features such as the wide pool steps with railings have been incorporated. A variety of pocket spaces are also provided, such as outdoor dining, a pool lounge, and an open lawn, creating spaces for both intimate and large gatherings.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

Booth and Hiss (2012) identified the following considerations when designing residential landscapes:

• Façade – The front yard or landscape is part of the facade of the house and should complement its architectural design. To showcase the architectural design, landscape

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 25. Residential landscape provide efficient transition spaces from the indoor to outdoor spaces, while creating intimate and gathering zones. (Source: PGAA)

elements should not cover or overwhelm it but should instead highlight it tastefully with appropriate hardscape and softscape elements. Oversized or dominating trees, shrubs, and very dense planting should be avoided for front landscapes. Safety and security – These are crucial considerations in giving homeowners peace of mind. Gates, fences, and softscape materials must be designed to maintain privacy inside the lot and prevent possible thieves from entering. Strategic usage of lighting also discourages the possibility of crime.

• Accessibility – Access for multiple types of movement allows homeowners to leave and enter the house efficiently. For example, should the owner choose to walk or ride a bike, they can use a designated pedestrian gate rather than a garage door. Pedestrian gates also serve as the proper entrance for visitors. Garage doors should ideally be used for vehicular access only.

• Planting and Maintenance –Residential planting design depends on the owner’s

preference. Still, it is the responsibility of the Landscape Architect to balance what the owner wants with the appropriate planting species suitable to the site conditions. The owner must be informed of the maintenance requirements of the intended landscape design in preparation for the foreseen maintenance costs. This also allows the owner to decide if it is necessary to hire maintenance personnel.

• Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

• PD 1096 - The National Building Code of the Philippines

• Declaration of Covenants, Conditions, and Restrictions (CC&Rs) and bylaws of Homeowners’ Association (HOA)

• Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS DESIGN

trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

• Presidential Decree No. 957Regulating the sale of subdivision lots and condominiums providing penalties and violations thereof

B.

Transportation Infrastructure

Transportation infrastructure encompasses transport nodes or transit areas for land, air, and sea. It includes multi-provincial and city bus terminals, connecting road networks and their corresponding streetscape infrastructure; international and domestic airports; and multi-modal and low-capacity seaports.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

Good and effective transportation hubs can be summarized with three main characteristics (World Bank, n.d.):

• Connectivity – Transportation hubs must be directly connected to a transportation network to maintain usage and relevance.

• Quality – Transportation hubs should be convenient and efficient in transporting both passengers and cargo. Moreover, they should be comfortable and have an aesthetic and pleasant atmosphere.

Figure 26. Mactan International Airport’s Landscape

• Economic growthTransportation hubs should be potential growth spots for the area, facilitating the improvement of quality of life through economic development (Salat & Ollivier, 2017).

All transportation hubs heavily impact the area where they will be developed. Traffic may increase in the general area, and there may be fewer green spaces due to the required infrastructure development. Therefore, the design and planning of any hub development must consider how to minimize the environmental and social impact of the surrounding area.

General (Land, Air, Sea)

• Streetscape infrastructure such as sidewalks must consider usage for both passengers and cargo. Sidewalks should be able to accommodate a large volume of users at any given time of the day. Strategic wayfinding such as signage and landmark provisions are also important considerations when designing effective sidewalks.

• Public transportation access such as on-street terminals is ideal for promoting mass accessibility for all types of users.

• The layout of parking areas for both private and public vehicles should be considered for accessibility and convenience of the users to the main terminal area.

Land Transportation

• All overhead elements in the landscape, such as waiting sheds, vehicular terminal sheds, powerlines, trees, and other vegetation, must consider the allowable vertical clearance to avoid any obstructions with multiple types and sizes of vehicles.

• The size of roads and other required elements and provisions such as barriers, tollgates, road islands, allowable adjacent developments, sidewalk requirements, etc. are determined by the type of road network being developed (national primary, national secondary, national tertiary,

provincial roads, municipal and city roads, barangay roads, expressways, and bypasses)6

• The concept of “green roadways7” should always be considered for environmental enhancement.

Airports

• Airports are large-scale developments that heavily impact the surrounding area. Airports require massive space for runways and their connecting networks, terminals, a control tower, hangar spaces, parking lots.

• Buildings in the immediate vicinity around the airport have height restrictions to prevent any airplane collisions.

• Planting materials must not encourage wildlife and bird populations to reduce the threat of bird strikes.[ A bird strike refers to the collision between a bird (or any other airborne animal like bats) and an aircraft

and causes a significant threat to aircraft safety.] Airport complexes should also have sufficient fencing to prevent any threats from theft, vandalism, and terrorism.

Seaports

6 Refer to DPWH Philippine National Road Net work – Road Classifications (n.d.)

• Seaport developments include considerations for their dock areas, equipment locations, cargo storage areas, parking locations for cargo and passenger vehicles, terminals, road network for the movement of vehicles disembarking and embarking unto vessels. Proper designation of passenger and cargo areas through appropriate space planning outside the terminal lessens dangers and possible harm to unauthorized personnel. Coastal planting design should be used for seaport developments. Special environmental considerations will be needed for seaports near environmentally sensitive land and sea locations.

• Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

7 Green roadways integrate transportation and ecological design to ensure functional and sustainable infrastructure beneficial for both humans and the environ ment alike.

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• Republic Act No. 10587Environmental Planning Act of 2013

• DENR Administrative Order No. 2003-30 - Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) for the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) System

• Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

• Presidential Decree (P.D.) No. 1067 - Water Code of the Philippines

• Republic Act No. 9147 - Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act

• Presidential Decree No. 705Forestry Code

• Republic Act No. 8550 - Philippine Fisheries Code

• Republic Act No. 7160 - Local Government Code of 1991

• PD 1096 - The National Building Code

• RA 11361 - Anti-obstruction of Powerlines Act

• DPWH Guidelines, Standards, and Manuals for Roads and Highways

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

• Manual of Standards for Aerodromes, February 2017, 2nd Edition, Civil Aviation Authority of the Philippines

• Engineering standards for port and harbor structures port planning manual, Schema Konsult Incorporated, 2009, Philippine Ports Authority

C.

Public Open Spaces

a. Public Open Spaces

Public open spaces include streets and sidewalks, plazas, and other communal areas that are part of the public realm or publicly owned and managed by the government. These kinds of spaces are meant to be accessible and enjoyed by all. Aside from providing space for recreation and enjoyment, they function as spaces for social encounters and

cultural enrichment.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS DESIGN

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

These spaces tend to be located in more urbanized areas where open and green spaces are considered a valuable commodity.

Design considerations for public open spaces include but are not limited to the following (State of Victoria, 2016):

Safety and Accessibility

1. Safe and convenient access to and through these spaces with connectivity to the pedestrian network of other public spaces

2. Located next to areas with a high volume of pedestrians

3. All areas have clear views of entry and exit points

4. Gated/enclosed open spaces should have multiple exit and entry points, depending on the number of streets surrounding them

5. Defined transition spaces between the public realm and private realm

6. Provision of sufficient lighting and appropriate zoning of facilities

7. Diverse Uses

8. Incorporation of vendor stalls located near pedestrian paths

Figure

9. Provision of spaces that may allow adjacent businesses to

27. Variety of public open spaces, provide spaces for recreation and social encounters.

use the street space for furniture and merchandise display

10. Incorporation of other support activities around the edges of the space

11. Provision of bicycle or jogging paths and play areas, but locating them away from each other

12. Provision of multi-functional spaces that can accommodate events and wellness activities

13. Provision of spaces for active and passive use

Character

1. Incorporation of specific unique landscape features for the site, such as sculptures, water features, or outdoor art installations

2. Incorporation of materials that support the existing character or a sense of place of the area

3. Comfort and Wayfinding

4. Provision of signage and maps

5. Provision of adequate seating areas

6. Provision of protection from sunlight and rain such as trees or shade structures

Other Considerations

1. Use of planting materials that support and enhance local biodiversity

2. Incorporation of environmentally sustainable and responsible design such as sustainable drainage systems, use of native plant species, and local materials

3. Incorporation of maintenance program

4. Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

5. Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

6. Republic Act No. 10587Environmental Planning Act of 2013

7. Republic Act No. 7160 - Local Government Code of 1991

8. Republic Act No. 826 - An Act

Creating the Commission on Parks and Wildlife, Defining Its Powers, Functions, and Duties

9. Presidential Decree No. 1216 - Defining Open Space in Residential Subdivisions

10. BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install

Facilities and Other Devices

11. Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

b.

Privately-owned Public Space

Privately-owned public spaces, also known as POPS, are open areas typically at street level that are publicly accessible but privately owned and maintained. The communal grounds of mixeduse developments, malls, religious grounds, and centers – including squares, plazas, arcades, and covered pedestrian pathways and spaces – are examples of POPS. In the downtown areas of cities like Singapore or New York City, developers are incentivized by the government with GFA exemptions if POPS is incorporated into their developments, encouraging the proliferation of more open and publicly accessible spaces. Because they are privately-owned, accessibility to POPS, especially in the Philippines, can have varying operational hours for security and

safety purposes. In the Philippines, some prime examples of POPS include Bonifacio High Street in Taguig City and the Eastwood City Central Park in Quezon City.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

POPS should be large enough to be used as an amenity for a variety of meaningful uses and accommodate changing uses at different times of the day. For example, POPS can be used as a marketplace in the morning, but can be converted into a concert hall in the evening or simply remain an open space for various uses. The recommended guidelines for POPS are as listed below (URA, 2020):

a. Size and Configuration

• Spaces that are covered or sheltered from the sky should have a considerable and appropriate height in proportion to their size.

• The space should be regularly shaped for easy circulation and accessibility

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

b. Access and Location

• The space shall be at street level with its frontage facing a major street or public sidewalk.

• The space shall ideally be barrierfree, not gated or fenced in. It shall be open and unobstructed to allow pedestrian access and high visibility from the street.

c. Public Seating and Amenities

• Adequate public seating shall be provided.

• Considerations for children and the elderly are encouraged, e.g., seats with armrests or backrests.

• The provision of other public amenities is encouraged, such as:

• Design Features: Public Art, Water Features;

• Outdoor exercise or play equipment

• Built-in stages or bleachers for events; and

• Drinking Fountains, Wi-Fi connection, phone charging stations

d. Shade

• If not completely covered, the space shall have ample shade structures for protection from

the elements throughout the day, such as trees, pergolas, trellis, umbrellas, awnings, and other landscape elements.

• The use of shadow studies is encouraged before the construction of the space to ensure sufficient shade is provided throughout the day.

staff, and occasional visitors.

Schools and Campuses

Schools and campuses tend to have vast open areas for various activities, events, and sports. These open spaces are used mainly by students and staff but may occasionally be made available and used by visitors. Schools and campuses typically attract the development of other uses in the vicinity, such as residential areas and commercial establishments.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

Diverse Use of Spaces

The goals of optimal campus landscape design should cover educational, cultural, ecological, social, and economic goals (Yan, 2015). The landscape design of these open spaces shapes the school’s identity because it influences the quality of experience of the students,

• The design of campuses should provide spaces for meetups, a quiet place between classes, and spaces for activities that cater to campus traditions. Open spaces should be made comfortable through the provision of trees or shade structures.

• Students should be able to commune with nature, be inspired, and learn from it. Therefore, it is good to highlight patches of natural features on

campuses campus that will serve such purposes.

• Large open spaces to accommodate vibrant school activities, such as public concerts and fairs, should be provided. These spaces also serve as emergency evacuation areas in the event of a natural disaster, such as an earthquake or fire. Examples of such spaces are the Sunken Garden in UP Diliman and the Grandstand at the University of Santo Tomas.

D.

Figure 28. The UP Sunken Garden is open to the UP community, public and outsiders

Photo by : Glen Orbon

• Movement and Circulation

• Places of learning, health and wellness, residence, and other components of a campus should be interconnected to provide easy access to different uses.

• Circulation systems should be properly designed to accommodate both pedestrians and vehicles, giving priority to pedestrians and cyclists.

• Site Topography

• As school campuses tend to be large open spaces, natural catchments, detention, and retention ponds should coincide with the natural slope and elevations of the site. Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• Batas Pambansa (B.P.) Blg. 232The Education Act of 1982

• Republic Act No. 10618 - Rural Farm Schools Act

• Republic Act No. 11396 - SUCs Land Use Development and Infrastructure Plan (LUDIP) Act

• CHED Memorandum Order No. 11

Series of 2020 - IRR of RA 11396

• Republic Act No. 9344 - Juvenile Justice and Welfare Act of 2006

• PD 1096 - The National Building Code of the Philippines

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

• Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation Commercial Developments: Malls

Figure 29. Different experiences are provided by commercial/mall landscapes and added amenities, enhacing consumer experience.

E.

In the Philippines, commercial developments mostly comprise malls and mall complexes, especially in urban areas or towns. Malls are known to be a “onestop-shop,” providing people with their essential needs, as well as a space to spend leisurely time and recreation. The landscape design for these developments is essential to facilitate circulation and

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

areas, and enhance greenery and aesthetics to create a more pleasant atmosphere.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

• Accessibility

Malls are typically crowded spaces frequently visited for the establishments they offer and their use as transportation nodes.

In urban areas like Metro Manila, train stations and bus or jeepney terminals are located adjacent to malls. As such, parking, pedestrian access, and public transportation considerations are important in their space programming. Easy and convenient accessibility increases the usability of such commercial developments.

• Wayfinding

1. Effective signage and landmarks, such as sculptures or water features, allow users to easily identify where they are located, especially as mall developments tend to be large with multiple wings. Landmark landscape elements may also serve as converging or meet-up places.

2. Clear sightlines in open areas should be provided to allow users to easily locate which way they need to go or which establishment they want to visit. Dense planting and large trees and shrubs should be located at the peripheral areas or corners of the mall where they do not block sightlines.

• Flexibility of Space

Large, spacious areas allow for multiple types of events, such as concerts, seasonal sales, or fairs. User experience can be enhanced through aesthetic landscaping, but spaces should be kept open and flexible for these various uses. Decorative pavement that allows heavy foot traffic is ideal for these kinds of spaces.

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• PD 1096 - The National Building Code of the Philippines

• Republic Act No. 7160 - Local Government Code of 1991

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

the main setting for leisure and recreational activities, allowing guests to relax and enjoy the environment and each other’s company. Hospitality developments cater primarily to groups of friends or families, but may also be used as suitable locations for business conferences or team-building events.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

• Privacy

Privacy is of utmost importance for guests. Planting design may be used as natural screening for entrances into private accommodations or amenities such as private pools or cabanas.

• Safety

F.

• Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation Hospitality

Developments: High-end Resorts and Hotels

The landscape design of hospitality developments plays a central role in providing guests with a unique lifestyle experience. Lush gardens and outdoor amenities serve as

Figure 30. Arrival landscapes for hospitality developments are usually characterized by lush gardens

Safety is also an important consideration for hospitality landscapes. In hospitality developments, guests may have outdoor evening activities or functions. As such, all outdoor areas must have adequate landscape lighting, especially in changes of elevation such as steps or ramps. Stepping stones used in lawns should be non-slip to avoid any tripping hazards.

•

Multi-use Spaces

Large, landscaped areas should be multi-functional and flexible for activities and events such as weddings, parties, or business

conferences.

Intimate and quiet areas should also be provided for outdoor wellness activities such as meditation and exercise.

• Identity and Culture

Hospitality developments located in more provincial, rural areas must ensure that they connect and blend in with the natural features of the site and the local area’s identity and culture.

and toilet flushing requirements.

As hospitality developments are also heavy on energy consumption, it is ideal to incorporate renewable energy systems, the most common being solar panels.

The use of green infrastructure for sustainable drainage and stormwater management may also be incorporated and used as interesting and educational water features around the site.

• PD 1096 - The National Building Code of the Philippines

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

• Republic Act No. 7160 - Local Government Code of 1991

• Republic Act No. 9593 - Tourism Act of 2009

• Hotel Code of the Philippines

G.

penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

Parks and Recreation a. Playgrounds10

If the development is in a rural area, it is ideal to source local materials to make transportation requirements as efficiently as possible while supporting the local economy.

• Environmental Considerations

As hospitality developments are heavy on water consumption, it is ideal to incorporate rainwater and greywater to reduce water demand8 harvesting systems for the development’s landscape irrigation

Existing trees and shrubs should be preserved, while native plants may be incorporated into the landscape design to enhance biodiversity.

For hospitality developments that are located within or near environmentally sensitive areas, ecolodges may be considered9.

• Tourism guidebook for local government units: revised edition by DOT, DILG, DENR, and DAP (2017)

• DENR Administrative Order No. 2003-30 - Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) for the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) System

Playgrounds create a stimulating and fun environment for children. Children can run, jump, play, and move about within this area, making safety a primary design consideration for this kind of landscape development.

8 Greywater is wastewater that comes from non-toilet plumbing systems such as sinks, showers, and washing machines.

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

9 See section on Ecolodges in this Chapter.

• Presidential Decree (P.D.) No. 1067 - Water Code of the Philippines

• Republic Act No. 9147 - Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act

• Presidential Decree No. 705Forestry Code

• Presidential Decree No. 953

- Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and

Figure 31. Play area in a residential complex

Source: DMCI Homes

10 Refer to Chapter 6 Details for playground amenity details

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Landscape Design and Planning

Considerations

Protective surfacing Surfaces under and around play equipment should be soft enough to cushion falls. For most play equipment, these surfaces should contain a minimum of 300mm of wood chips, mulch, sand, pea gravel, and other alternative materials.11

Fall zones – Cushioning material should extend a minimum of 1800mm in all directions from stationary pieces of play equipment. In front and behind swings, the material should extend a distance equal to twice the height of the suspending bar. Equipment spacing – Play structures must be placed at least 3600mm apart to allow children space to circulate or fall without striking another structure. Moving equipment should be in an area away from other play structures, so children have adequate room to pass from one play area to another without being struck by a moving swing or by another child jumping from a slide. Catch points and protruding hardware – There should be no exposed hardware such as protruding bolts, narrow gaps in metal connections, or open hooks at the top and bottom of swings. All of these can cut, puncture the skin, or catch the clothing of children.

Openings that can trap – Openings in guardrails, spaces between platforms and between ladders should measure less than 87.5mm or more than 225mm to prevent children from getting trapped and strangled in openings where they can fit their bodies but not their heads.

Pinch, crush, shearing, and sharp hazards – Equipment should not have sharp points or edges that could cut skin. Moving pieces of equipment should not have exposed moving parts that might crush or pinch a child’s finger.

Routine maintenance – A designated personnel should have a periodic inspection of equipment and surroundings to maintain the overall safety of the play area. Replacement of defective or unsafe equipment must be done immediately to prevent any accidents. Storage of loose play items and other maintenance equipment should be located nearby but remain inaccessible to children.

- Defining Open Space in Residential Subdivisions

4. Presidential Decree No. 953

- Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

The design of outdoor play areas varies for different sports, but has common landscape considerations for both the players and spectators of the sport, as listed below.

Tripping hazards – There should be no exposed concrete footings, abrupt changes in surface elevations, tree roots, tree stumps, and rocks that can trip children or adults.

Guard rails – Elevated surfaces like platforms, ramps, and bridge ways should have guard rails to prevent falls.

Supervision – The play area should be designed so that adults can observe children at play. Therefore, seating and waiting areas for parents, guardians, and play supervisors must be properly located and designed for comfort and accessibility to the play area. (Harris & Dines, 1998)

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

5. BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

b. Outdoor Sports Areas

• Outdoor Courts

Safety and Security

• Outdoor playing courts shall have a north-south orientation to ensure player visibility is not impaired by sun glare. If a playing court is not oriented properly, the player’s sight may be impaired at certain times of the day and compromise safety and fair play.

1. Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

2. Revised IRR for PD 957 - Housing and Land Regulatory Board (2009)

3. Presidential Decree No. 1216

Outdoor play areas encompass open spaces developed into different kinds of play courts, fields, and activity spaces to accommodate sports such as basketball, badminton and tennis, volleyball, football, soccer, baseball, and even skateboarding. Proper planning and design of these spaces will assure safety, security, usability, accessibility, quality, and user satisfaction.

• Overhead elements such as trees and shade structures shall be kept clear of the outdoor play area to prevent obstructions during games.

• Drainage slopes shall be calculated correctly, and sufficient systems appropriately installed. Proper drainage is essential for outdoor play areas, particularly for playing courts paved with impervious material. This ensures the prevention of water damage and slip hazards.

• Outdoor play areas can create threats, such as noise pollution and accidents. Injury and property damage can happen if a playing element unexpectedly leaves the boundaries of the play area. Plant buffers such as trees and shrubs shall be planted around the perimeter of the play area to reduce noise pollution. Protective perimeter nets shall be installed to prevent playing elements from escaping the play area.

• Fences or gates around the play area shall be installed to prevent vandalism, destruction of property, and theft while the play area is not operational.

pedestrian walkways.

Each type of outdoor play area has its own set of standard court sizes and specific material considerations. The dimensions of courts also vary depending on the level of play, whether at the collegiate, professional, or Olympic level. Listed below are the professional organizations that provide international standards for each type of outdoor play area:

Basketball–InternationalBasketball Federation (FIBA)

Golf Courses

Golf courses are specialized developments requiring the alteration of vast land areas to provide adequate playing areas. Landscape elements include various landforms and water bodies, wooded areas, amenity centers, and circulation paths. Play elements include tees, putting greens, bunkers, fairways, and roughs. All these elements require proper design and planning considerations.

Badminton – Badminton World Federation (BWF)

Tennis – International Tennis Federation (ITF)

Public Seating and Amenities

Public seating, such as benches or bleachers, viewing areas, and restrooms shall be provided.

Accessibility

Accessibility to all types of users shall be considered. This includes the proper location and provision of access to public transportation, parking, ramps, bike paths, and

Volleyball–FédérationInternationale de Volleyball (FIVB)

Football/Soccer – Federation Internationale de Football Association (FIFA)

Baseball – World Baseball Softball Confederation (WBSC)

Skateboarding and other related sports – World Skate

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

• Grading

Massive grading shapes the golf course and must be executed properly to achieve the intended experience. Landforms and their corresponding slopes directly affect the difficulty level of play and determine the layout of the course and arrangement of the holes and other amenity areas.

• Size

The golf course development must be able to accommodate the desired number of holes and amenities. The client must establish this requirement at the beginning of the design process.

•

Environmental Considerations

Site inventory and analysis must be conducted to track existing vegetation as land manipulation activities may lead to the loss of vegetation and biodiversity habitat. The softscape design of the golf course development must be used to replace any vegetation – especially native vegetation – that has been lost.

Figure 32. Manila Golf and Country Club

Turf maintenance is crucial in retaining the quality of the playing surface and includes frequent irrigation and mowing. Rainwater and greywater harvesting systems should be considered to reduce municipalsupplied water demand.

trees, plants, and vegetation

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

in the design and planning of plant collections, amenities, and activities of public gardens. The corresponding design and planning considerations are listed below.

• Accessibility

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• Republic Act No. 9593 - Tourism Act of 2009

• Executive Order No. 190Abolishing the Golf Course Construction and Development Committee and Transferring its Powers and Functions to the Department of Environment and Natural Resources

• DENR Administrative Order No. 2003-30 - Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) for the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) System

• Presidential Decree No. 953Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain

c. Community Gardens: Public Gardens

Public gardens are accessible spaces that can be enjoyed by all, especially for recreation and leisure. They are typically home to diverse collections of plants used for educational and research programs and biodiversity enhancement and conservation. The most common types of public gardens include botanical gardens, conservatories, arboreta, display gardens, and zoos (Rakow & Lee, 2011).

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

Accessibility to all types of users must be considered. This includes the proper location and provision of access to public transportation, parking, ramps, bike paths, and pedestrian walkways.

• Specific Use (Rakow & Lee, 2011)

education is a key objective in these types of gardens, so the inclusion of information signage should always be provided for all flora and fauna on display.

H. Ecological and Environmental Landscapes

a. Landscapes

Near Nature Areas

In public garden projects, Landscape Architects should work together with ecologists, foresters, botanists, zoologists, taxonomists, horticulturists, and other experts

1. Botanic gardens shall prioritize botanically diverse collections of herbaceous and woody plants with research programs for plant improvement, conservation, and basic educational offerings.

2. Arboreta shall focus on the study and display of woody plants such as trees and shrubs.

3. Display gardens shall be educational in nature but focus more on showcasing welldesigned exhibits of plants.

4. Zoos shall highlight the animals and the corresponding fauna in their native habitat.

5. Providing knowledge and

Landscapes within or near nature areas such as forestlands, coastal areas, rivers, wetlands, and other water bodies require specific design considerations due to their proximity to such environmentally sensitive areas.

Figure 33. Species at the Candaba Wetlands Bird Santuary

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

General (Landscapes Near Waterbodies and Forests)

• The design should address the mitigation of environmental hazards such as landslides, erosion, and flooding (if applicable, as flooding is a natural occurrence in riparian areas, for example).

• The development should be protected from natural disasters. The design should incorporate emergency evacuation plans as a disaster risk management strategy.

• Developments should support the cultural identity of the place. Landscape elements should encourage and showcase local culture and traditions. Local materials should be used for construction.

• Education through signage and community activities (e.g., tours or programs) is an important tool to highlight the significance of these environmentally sensitive areas and the need to protect them.

Green and Open Spaces Near Waterbodies

Minimizing Impact

• Developments near coastal areas, waterfronts, and riverbanks should aim to protect, restore, and improve the natural features and functions of the water bodies. Site hydrology should be studied carefully.

• Grey infrastructure (such as the use of concrete channels) should be minimized, while green infrastructure12should be used as a main design element of the site to facilitate natural hydrology cycles and connect to the adjacent waterbody.

Biodiversity Enhancement

• Plant materials suitable to coastal or riparian conditions should be used.13

Other Considerations

• If hardscape materials must be used, they must be able to withstand water conditions and salt spray.

• If possible, provide areas where users can connect directly with the water, such as terraced steps into the water, floating or submersible walkways, and elevated walkways near the water edge.

Green and Open Spaces Near Forests

• Biodiversity Enhancement and Protection

• Green and open spaces near forests should act as stepping stone patches where existing wildlife can also thrive. This can be done by increasing the size of the green space and using native plant species.

12 Green infrastructure is an approach to water management that protects, restores, or mimics the natural water cycle (American Rivers, 2019). Examples of green infra structure include bioswales, rain gardens, and constructed wetlands. Refer to Chapter 7 Details for the technical details of these natural drainage systems.

13 Refer to Chapter 5 Planting for suitable planting species.

• Landscape lighting should be designed carefully and not be a source of light pollution. Any evening activities that are expected to happen in the development should not disturb the nocturnal fauna.

• Minimizing Impact

• The development should follow

Figure 34. Bird Hide Path at the Candaba Wetlands Bird Santuary

Figure 35. Information, trail and wayfinding structures are made of logs, wood and stones at the Puerto Princesa Subterranean River National Park

the natural slope and grade of the area.

• Existing vegetation should be safeguarded. Existing trees and shrubs should be balled out and replanted if necessary. Introducing exotic and invasive species in the planting design should be avoided.

• Should reforestation be needed, tree species and reforestation techniques that apply to the site should be included.

• Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

• Presidential Decree No. 705Forestry Code

• Republic Act No. 10121 - Philippine Disaster Risk Reduction and Management Act of 2010

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• Republic Act No. 7160 - Local Government Code of 1991

• DENR Administrative Order No. 2003-30 - Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) for the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) System

• Presidential Decree (P.D.) No. 1067 - Water Code of the Philippines

• Republic Act No. 9147 - Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

b. Landscape Preservation Sites

Landscape preservation sites are historical places, large and small, that reveal the evolving relationship between man and nature, especially in the utilization of resources. Landscape preservation sites may vary in scale and represent the combined natural and manmade features that illustrate the history, significant events, people, or culture closely connected to that site (Camenson, 2007). The Rice

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Terraces of the Philippine Cordilleras is an example of a culturally rich landscape preservation site that has been named a UNESCO World Heritage Site. In maintaining landscape preservation sites, it is vital to involve the original stakeholders, such as the community elders, the keepers of culture and traditions, and the local people right at the beginning of the process. The potential benefits of preserving a historical landscape include providing scenic, economic, ecological, social, recreational, and educational opportunities that can produce an improved biophysical and socio-cultural environment, improved quality of life, and a sense of identity (Birnbaum, 1994).

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

• Inventory and documentation of existing conditions;

• Site analysis and evaluation of integrity and significance;

• Development of a landscape preservation approach and treatment plan;

• Development of a management plan and management philosophy;

• Development of a strategy for ongoing maintenance; and

• Preparation of a record of treatment and future research recommendations.

In designing and planning sites and properties with the purpose of landscape preservation, rehabilitation, restoration, reconstruction, conservation, revitalization, and enhancement, Landscape Architects shall conduct feasibility studies, investigate, select, and properly allocate land and water resources for appropriate use while working with allied professions (Camenson, 2007).

• Planning and Research Preservation planning and research shall be done before commencing any changes in the site. The general steps to undergo preservation research shall include the following (Birnbaum, 1994):

Tools such as historical photos, maps, oral history, land titles, and other written documents shall be utilized to show, compare, and analyze past and current configurations.

PHILIPPINE

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for

Reference

1. Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

2. Republic Act No. 10066 - The National Cultural Heritage Act

3. Republic Act No. 4846 - Cultural Properties Preservation and Protection Act

4. Republic Act No. 7160 - Local Government Code of 1991

5. DENR Administrative Order No. 2003-30 - Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) for the

●Presidential Decree (P.D.) No. 1067 -

by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

c. Heritage Tree Protection

6. Republic Act No. 9147 - Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act

7. Presidential Decree No. 705Forestry Code

8. Presidential Decree No. 953

- Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

9. BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons

Heritage tree conservation has its typical environmental benefits, but more so facilitates environmentally driven urban development management, and educates the public on the social and cultural value of these trees (Jim, 2017). However, in many cases, especially in heavily urbanized areas, trees are eliminated to give way for further development. In 2009, the Department of Environment and Natural Resources - National Capital Region (DENRNCR) started the Heritage Tree Program (Memorandum Order No. 1, s-2019) as part of the urban greening and tree protection efforts for Metro Manila. This program aims to identify, preserve, protect, and save heritage trees in the region. The corresponding landscape design and planning considerations in heritage tree protection are listed below.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations Tree Status

A tree is considered to have heritage status if one or more of the following criteria are satisfied, after which DENR provides technical assistance to care for it (DENR-NCR, 2020).

• These trees should be at least 50 years old with a minimum circumference of 100 centimeters.

• The tree must have a significant historical, cultural, or aesthetic value for the local community.

Philippine Environmental Impact

Figure 36. Some of the country’s heritage sites recognized by UNESCO (Tubattaha Reef, Mt. Hamiguitan, Banaue Rice Terraces and Vigan. )

Figure 37. Some of heritage trees in various sites in Metro Manila (DENR)

• The tree may be native or endemic, exotic, rare, threatened, or endangered.

Design Integration

• During the site inventory and analysis stage, a proper site survey must be carried out, noting the location, species, and canopy size of any significant trees to be protected.

• The heritage trees must be included in the landscape design of the proposed development to be built around them.

• In cases where mature trees are exotic or invasive, the decision to remove and replace them with indigenous species should be carefully made through informed analysis of individual trees and their significance to the site.

Transplanting Considerations

• Heritage trees must ideally remain in their original location. Transplanting should be considered as a last resort.

• If the tree must be transplanted, an experienced team must conduct the process to ensure tree survival.

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

1. DENR-NCR Memorandum Order No. 1, s-2019 - Heritage Tree Program

2. Quezon City Ordinance No. SP 2638, S-2017 - An ordinance mandating the preservation of century and heritage trees in the jurisdiction of Quezon City.

3. Republic Act No. 9147 - Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act

4. Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

5. Presidential Decree No. 705Forestry Code

6. Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

7. Republic Act No. 7160 - Local Government Code of 1991

d.

Eco-Tourism Sites: Ecolodges

Ecolodges are low-impact, naturebased accommodations that protect

the surrounding environment; benefit the local community; provide a spiritual communion with nature and culture; and are designed, constructed, and operated in an environmentally and socially sensitive manner (Naguran, 2010). An ecolodge is bound to the natural and biophysical resources of its surrounding environment, which is the unique experience that guests get to enjoy.

The landscape design of ecolodge developments should contribute to safeguarding the site’s natural assets and cultural heritage.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

Restrictions

• Size – Ecolodges are considered community-scale lodging and are smaller compared to hotel and resort developments. The number of accommodations may range from two to 75 rooms (Naguran, 2010).

• Lighting – Limited and controlled landscape lighting minimizes the development’s disturbance and light pollution on the surrounding natural environment and wildlife

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 38. Various eco-resorts in the country maximize the use of local and indigenous materials in the make of lodges and decks.

• Access – As ecolodges may be located adjacent to sensitive habitats such as forests or wetlands, fences may be necessary to discourage unauthorized entry into these places. Signage may also inform guests of restrictions, proper behavior, potential hazards, and educational trivia.

Amenities

As wellness-driven developments, ecolodge amenities may include swimming pools and meditation or health centers.

minimal impact on the natural surroundings.

• The development must fit into its specific physical and cultural contexts through careful attention to form, landscaping, color, and the use of vernacular architecture.

• Alternative, sustainable means of water consumption should be explored to reduce demand on municipal-provided water, such as rainwater or greywater harvesting systems.

• Solid waste disposal and sewerage systems must be handled properly.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

and cultural significance of the site and how the ecolodge development enhances these values.

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

8. The DENR-DAO 2013-19Guidelines in Ecotourism Planning and Management in Protected Areas

Zoning

Ecolodge developments should never be located in intensive use zones, which is primarily dedicated to commercial and industrial uses (Mehta, Baez, and O’Loughlin, 2002)

Environmental Considerations (Naguran, 2010)

• Energy demands should ideally be supplied with renewable energy sources and minimized through passive design techniques.

1. Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

2. Republic Act No. 10587Environmental Planning Act of 2013

3. Republic Act No. 7586 - National Integrated Protected Areas System (NIPAS) Act of 1992

4. Executive Order No.111Guidelines for Ecotourism Development in the Philippines and the National Ecotourism Strategy (NES)

9. DENR Administrative Order No. 2003-30 - Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) for the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) System

10. Presidential Decree (P.D.) No. 1067 - Water Code of the Philippines

11. Republic Act No. 9147 - Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act

12. Presidential Decree No. 705Forestry Code

13. Republic Act No. 826 - An Act Creating the Commission on Parks and Wildlife, Defining Its Powers, Functions, and Duties

• An ecolodge should preserve existing vegetation and provide additional landscape areas for this.

• Construction should have

• The local community should be involved in the initial planning stages to ensure that the development creates no harmful impact, but creates economic benefits by providing livelihood opportunities.

• The development should offer interpretive programs to educate both its employees and guests about the environmental

5. Executive Order No. 578Establishing the National Policy on Biological Diversity, Prescribing its Implementation throughout the Country

6. Republic Act No. 7160 - Local Government Code of 1991

7. Tourism guidebook for local government units: revised edition by DOT, DILG, DENR, and DAP (2017)

14. Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

15. Republic Act No. 10121 - Philippine Disaster Risk Reduction and Management Act of 2010

16. BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons

by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

e. Brownfields

Brownfields are drastically altered landscapes that are unstable, unproductive, and extremely vulnerable to erosion (Harris & Dines, 1998). Such examples include previous construction sites, quarries, landscapes damaged due to floods, and abandoned sites. In most cases, little to no measures are taken to prevent further degradation or regenerate the land to a more productive state.

quality, air quality, erosion, aesthetics, wildlife, adjacent areas, long-range productivity, and post-disturbance land use. (Harris & Dines, 1998)

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

Land Preparation

• The land shaping process refers to the manipulation of slopes through grading to create more usable and manageable areas for development. Stratigraphy refers to the layering of subsurface materials to create stability, improve water holding capacity, and reduce toxic materials. These two processes should be done to ensure the site is suitable for further development.

• Diversion ditches, dikes, and conduits should be constructed to channel stormwater and protect the site from further erosion. Sediment ponds and silt filtration systems will also help minimize sediment pollution and runoff.

• Plants should be installed as necessary for erosion control and soil stabilization. Permanent planting areas should be established to start the process of ecological succession. The use of native plant species should be prioritized.

Other Environmental Considerations

Brownfields must undergo a reclamation process before any potential redevelopment. This is a complex process that must be facilitated by clear economic, social, and environmental objectives. The landscape design of brownfield redevelopments must help achieve social and economic targets and improve the site’s environmental state. Several environmental factors that will affect the development must be considered, such as water

• Surface conditioning helps improve the quality of the topsoil and aid in the growth of new planting materials on-site. Surface conditioning processes include importing new topsoil (if needed), topsoil stabilization, water retention capacity improvement, and balancing soil pH.

• Boundary markers, walls, and barricades should be constructed to limit the size of construction disturbance and protect soil, water quality, and adjacent undisturbed areas.

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

Erosion and Sedimentation Control

• Erosion can be prevented and mitigated through mulching and seeding.

1. Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

2. Republic Act No. 10587Environmental Planning Act of

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 39. An example of brownfield remediation landscape in London. ( Haiman, 2010)

2013

3. Republic Act No. 9593 - Tourism Act of 2009

4. Presidential Decree (P.D.) No. 1067 - Water Code of the Philippines

5. Republic Act No. 9147 - Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act

6. Presidential Decree No. 705Forestry Code

7. DENR Administrative Order No. 2003- 30 - Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) for the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) System

8. Republic Act No. 7160 - Local Government Code of 1991

9. BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

demonstrations, and attractions such as crop landscaping, farm animals, and the like are usually provided at farm tourism sites (Mahaliyanaarachchi, 2015)

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

In the design and planning of farm tourism sites, various unique activities need to be considered.

The more activities visitors can experience, the more they boost the farm’s popularity and income (Mahaliyanaarachchi, 2015).

routes, shops, accommodations, support infrastructure, waste management systems, security measures, directional and educational signages, washrooms, and rest areas shall be included.

• Farm tourism sites offering overnight stays shall provide the appropriate accommodation depending on the space, aesthetic, and demand. Examples include farmhouse guest rooms, cabanas or cottages, converted barns, campsites or tents, treehouses, water cabins, or small farm hotels.

promote reforestation. In the Philippines, permaculture landscapes are typically organized into six spatial zones: the house, the garden, grazing, cash crop, food forest, and the wilderness. The inner zones (Zone 0 to Zone 2) include the house and planting materials that need attention, such as ornamental plants and vegetable crops. The outer zones (Zone 3 to 5) contain landscape elements and planting materials that need minimal attention, such as fruit trees and perennial plants. (Flores & Buot, 2021).

Access and Location

• The site shall be accessible to visitors at a safe and peaceful location.

b. Permaculture

Permaculture is guided by the following design principles (Holmgren, 2011):

Productive Landscapes

a. Farm Tourism

The basic principles of agri-tourism or farm tourism are sightseeing, interactive activities, and shopping for goods or souvenirs. Activities such as tours and processing

• Accessibility to all types of users shall be considered. This includes the proper location and provision of access to public transportation, parking, ramps, bike paths, and pedestrian walkways.

Amenities

• Facilities and amenities such as a reception area, parking area, dining room, guided tour

Permaculture, short for “permanent agriculture,” employs naturebased principles and methods in agricultural design to make productive landscapes more sustainable and holistic (Holmgren, 2011). Permaculture uses the natural cycles of plants and animals to heat and cool buildings, restore groundwater, aerate the soil, control erosion, build soil fertility, incorporate small-scale food production, incorporate appropriate technology and recycling, and

• Observe and interact

• Catch and store energy

• Obtain yield

• Make use of renewable resources and services

• Produce no waste by converting waste into resources

• Integrate rather than segregate

• Use small and slow solutions

• Use and value diversity

• Use edges and value the marginal

• Creatively use and respond to change

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

Integration

• Symbiotic relationships should be encouraged by putting elements together to benefit each other and reduce unutilized outputs.

• Elements with multiple relationships should be incorporated to stabilize the ecosystem, such as planting trees to recharge the water table. Multi-beneficial amenities such as an organic kitchen garden, aquaculture, and bee-keeping should also be considered.

Environmental Considerations

• The use of swales encourages natural drainage to slow down the flow of stormwater runoff to prevent erosion and give time for leaf litter and seeds to penetrate the soil.

• The process of natural succession

will speed up restoration by planting various complementary native species at the same time. Constructed wetlands will also increase ecosystem diversity.

• Soil erosion on open slopes should be controlled through contour planting.

Maintenance

• An annual comprehensive planting design should be planned for.

• Plant maintenance should be done through clean, simple, and natural methods.

Agriculture Act of 2010Republic Act 9593 - Tourism Act 2009

• Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

The main challenge in memorializing a battlefield is how to allow visitors to connect to and appreciate a past event through landscape design. Limiting factors in visitor experience may come in the form of modern infrastructure surrounding the battlefield park. Noise pollution and visual blight or degradation of visual quality are also challenges that need to be addressed because they directly impact the interpretive programs of the battlefield landscape (O’Connor, 2018).

(Insert photo/photos of a chosen J.

Heritage Conservation: Battlefields

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• Presidential Decree (P.D.) No. 1067 - Water Code of the Philippines

• Republic Act No. 9147 - Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act

• Presidential Decree No. 705Forestry Code

• Republic Act No. 10068 - Organic

Battlefields are cultural landscapes due to their significance of memorializing the great human struggle and sacrifice experienced during a historical event. A battlefield, by definition, is a landscape that is tied to a specific date where a battle among people took place. It serves as an educational ground for people to learn about and appreciate their heritage, cultural identity, and the sacrifice of their forefathers, imbibing a sense of nationalism and pride.

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 40. Sites at Corregidor Island in Bataan commemorate World War II.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations Research

• Battlefield preservation requires historical research and surveys, in-depth evaluation of its integrity, mapping, classifying resources, and defining its significance.

• Analysis mapping of specific battle locations is required. Each location is significant as a place in the landscape, and each has the potential to enhance the visitor experience and awareness of the events that transpired.

Landscape Networks

• The landscape design must link each battlefield location so that they become a network of historical events narrated through the landscape.

• Interpretive plans or signage should show how each of these locations is connected in the overall series of events and should highlight the significance of each battlefield landscape (O’Connor, 2018).

Historical Experience

• A clearly defined entrance to the park must be provided to allow visitors to identify that they are entering a new place. Vegetative buffers can be used to hamper exterior noises to enhance the visitor experience of being “transported back in time” (O’Connor, 2018).

• Entry areas should offer visitors a glimpse of what it was like to be living during the battle period by using materials used during the historical event being memorialized.

Circulation

• If possible, programs for each significant battle location within the park must be experienced on foot to enhance the user experience of being immersed in the landscape.

• Short and extended trails for the visitors throughout the battle location network are to be provided.

• Interpretive displays and view corridors or points should be visible along vehicular and pedestrian circulation paths.

Applicable Related PH Laws and

Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• Republic Act No. 10066 - The National Cultural Heritage Act

• REPUBLIC ACT NO. 4846Cultural Properties Preservation and Protection Act

• DENR Administrative Order No. 2003-30 - Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) for the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) System

• Republic Act No. 9147 - Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act

• Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

• Presidential Decree No. 705Forestry Code

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install

Facilities and Other Devices Hospitals and Healthcare Facilities

K.

a.Privately-owned

Hospitals and Healthcare Facilities

Hospitals, first and foremost, are places of healing and should be appropriately designed for this very purpose. Through landscape design, hospitals can facilitate a patient’s interaction with the natural environment to reduce stress, provide fresh air and natural ventilation, and provide places for social interaction and community.

Privately owned hospitals and healthcare facilities are managed and funded by a private entity, individual, or group. Private hospitals are more expensive than public hospitals and may have a bigger budget to include landscape design in their developments.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

Landscape Areas

Hospitals may include the following landscaped areas (Yücel, 2013):

• Green corridors between buildings, usually for waiting and eating, where walkways connect structures

• Main entrance setbacks facing the street

• Drop-off and pickup areas with roofed seating and directional signages

• Small gardens or courtyards, which should be large enough to accommodate both patients and visitors

• Tree-shaded plazas

• Roof terraces or roof gardens

• Therapeutic gardens or healing gardens

• Meditation gardens

• Viewing or walk-in gardens

• Edible gardens

• For all areas, paved walkways and seating areas must be provided to accommodate accessibility

for PWDs in wheelchairs, walkers, and crutches.

General Considerations

• Multiple sightlines to landscape areas must be provided to encourage the use of the space.

• The use of plants with pollen should be carefully considered and consulted among the design team to avoid any adverse allergic reactions among sensitive patients.

• Playground areas may be considered for children.

• Interiorscapes in hospitals are also possible and encouraged as long as there is enough indoor space to accommodate the design14.

by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

• Presidential Decree No. 953

- Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation b. Public Hospitals and Healthcare Facilities

• Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• Republic Act No. 4226 - Hospital Licensure Act

• PD 1096 - The National Building Code of the Philippines

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons

14 See section on Interiorscapes in this Chapter.

Public hospitals and healthcare facilities are funded by the taxpayers’ money and managed by the government. Because of budget limitations, landscape design may be simpler and smaller than private hospitals and healthcare facilities. Nevertheless, gardens and open spaces should still be provided in public hospitals to be considered places of healing. Open spaces are particularly important to public hospitals as they tend to be more crowded than private hospitals.

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 41. Planning layout of Medical City Garden Plaza Ortigas (By Altavas Landscape Architect)

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

The same landscape design considerations are applied in public hospitals and healthcare facilities as in private ones. The main consideration in the landscape design and planning of these public facilities is the allowable budget. Whatever the case, good landscape design should be able to work within the given budget constraints. Despite this challenge, because the government runs these facilities, Local Government Units (LGUs) may set aside a budget for the landscape

design of their local healthcare facilities, may it be for hospitals or rural health units (RHUs).

Educating LGU members is important to raise awareness of the advantages and benefits of having well-designed open spaces and gardens for healing and wellness, peace, and community building.

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS DESIGN

• Republic Act No. 7160. 1991. An Act Providing for a Local Government Code of 1991.

• Republic Act No. 4226 - Hospital Licensure Act

• PD 1096 - The National Building Code of the Philippines

• Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

and community utilization.

Therapeutic gardens need not only be located in healthcare facilities for healing and rehabilitation, but in any place where community engagement, peace, and relaxation are encouraged.

c. Therapeutic Gardens

Therapeutic gardens, as defined by the American Horticultural Therapy Association (n.d.), are plantdominated environments purposely designed to facilitate interaction with healing elements of nature. Therapeutic gardens can be in the form of gardens for movement and physical rehabilitation, solace and comfort, learning, sensory enjoyment,

Figure 43. Bishan-Ang Mo Kio Therapeutic Park in Singapore is designed to engage the senses with a landscape of plants

(Insert photo/photos of a chosen

Figure 42. Parking area and landscape of Rural Health Unit in Ilocos Sur by Land and Man Integrated Design

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations (Winterbottom and Wagenfeld, 2015)

General Design Principles

• Culture and Identity – The garden should be adaptable to a wide range of individual preferences and provide choices to accommodate various cultural requirements, depending on the type of development and its location.

• Use – Therapeutic gardens may incorporate a scheduled and programmed set of activities for their target users (e.g., if it is located in an elderly facility, programs for the elderly should be established)

• Safety – The design and features of the garden should have failsafe features where hazards and the possibility of errors are minimized. The garden should have well-defined parameters to evoke the feeling of being in a safe space.

• Physical Exercise – The garden should be utilized to allow users to expend an appropriate level of physical effort for the sake of exercise and therapy.

• Accessibility – The garden should incorporate PWD accessibility. Sightlines must be clear, landscape elements must be reachable, and adequate clearances and spaces must accommodate movement.

• People-plant interaction - Users should be able to interact with plants through the sense of touch, sight, smell, and hearing.

Interdisciplinary Design Approach

• oEspecially for hospitals, eldercare centers, and other treatment and community facilities, an interdisciplinary team involving the Landscape Architect and therapeutic specialists must design the best possible garden design appropriate for the development.

• oIf needed, an occupational therapist consultant is ideal to have in the design team to evaluate how users will interact with the garden elements.

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of

2000

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

• Presidential Decree No. 953 - Requiring the planting of trees in certain places and penalizing unauthorized cutting, destruction, damaging, and injuring certain trees, plants, and vegetation

They are usually managed by local governments or religious sectors (Manila Memorial Park, 2020).

Between the two, memorial parks require more detailed landscape design and aesthetics.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

Location

L.

Memorial Parks or Cemeteries

As the term suggests, Memorial parks are park-like and set in open landscapes typically surrounded by man-made water features, trees, and flower beds to provide a peaceful atmosphere suitable for meditation, and to respect and honor the dead. Graves are marked with tombstones lying flat on landscaped plots so as not to disrupt the scenery. Memorial parks are also known as privatelyowned modern cemeteries. On the other hand, traditional cemeteries are historically older and can typically be seen with above-ground tombs and overlapping niches.

• Memorial parks or cemeteries shall be located on the periphery of the town center or in areas sparsely inhabited and where little hazard to human life or health could result.

• The number of memorial parks or cemeteries allowed within each municipality or city shall be based on the locality’s death rate and expected future needs.

• The memorial park or cemetery must be located in an area where the water table is not higher than 4.50 meters below the ground surface as certified by the National Water Resources Board (NWRB).

• The construction of memorial parks or cemeteries shall not be allowed in environmentally critical areas as defined in

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Proclamation No. 2146.

• Memorial parks or cemeteries must conform with the locality’s land-use plan or zoning ordinance having jurisdiction over the project site. Corresponding zoning restrictions and regulations as mandated by the Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board (HLURB) shall apply for municipalities or cities with approved and unapproved comprehensive land use plans or zoning ordinances.

Accessibility

• A road shall serve the site with a minimum width or right-of-way of not less than 8m. The rightof-way of major roads shall be increased as project size increases.

M.

Interiorscapes

Amenities

• Memorial parks or cemeteries shall achieve flexibility in design and orderly layout to comply with the various spatial requirements of burial ceremonies, economic land use, and environmental control measures.

• Suitable areas shall be allocated for trees, shrubs, plants, and other functional and decorative elements such as monuments, sculptures, fountains, and benches.

Interiorscaping, or indoor landscaping, is the concept of bringing the landscape inside the built environment for human use and enjoyment. Interiorscaping, though aesthetically pleasing for indoor environments, comes with a set of maintenance challenges, as indoor plants require special care, especially for sunlight and irrigation requirements.

Public spaces that would greatly benefit from having well-designed interior landscapes are adult living centers, botanical gardens, casinos and gaming centers, educational facilities and institutions, healthcare facilities, hotels, malls, museums, offices, places of worship, residences, restaurants, retail establishments, zoos, green buildings, and the like.

Landscape Design and Planning Considerations

With this, plant height must be considered carefully. For fixed planters where the plant is expected to grow, the mature height of the tree or shrub must be considered.

• Color – The color palette of the planting design must be considered carefully, especially under artificial lighting. Plant colors may be viewed differently from when they are in natural light.

• Plant palette limit –Interiorscapes have a limited range of possible plants, as certain plants do not thrive well indoors. These include variegated, non-green, and flowering plants.

Factors to consider in interiorscaping include the following (Hammer, 1991):

• Visual confinement of the indoor space – Trees and shrubs should not overwhelm the space.

• Light – Ideally, interiorscapes, especially permanent planters, must be located in areas where there is natural light for optimal growth. If natural sunlight is not available, artificial grow lights must be used to maintain plant health.

• Planter Depths – The depth of the planter, especially for permanent planters, must consider the plant’s required soil depth, especially if it is expected

Figure 44. Interior Landscape at Lexus Showroom in Bonifacio Global City

to grow further. The drainage requirements of planters must also be considered carefully to avoid any water damage to the building structure15.

• Plant Weight – The weight of the plants, soil/growing media, and drainage system must be considered in the design, especially for rooftop greenery where structural loading is vital. Locating trees, palms, or heavy shrubs on top of load-bearing columns or beams should be considered. Preserved plants – If the use of live plants is not ideal, the installation of preserved plants may be considered.

• BP Blg. 344 - An Act to Enhance the Mobility of Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices

• Republic Act No. 9053 - Philippine Landscape Architecture Act of 2000

• PD 1096 - The National Building Code of the Philippines

15 See Chapter 6 Details for rooftop greenery details.

Applicable Related PH Laws and Policies for Reference

page is intentionally left blank

C H A P T E R 2.0

D E S I G N

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS AND REFERENCES

Chapter Cover

Initial ideas are established through design vignettes

Sketch by: LArch. Ian Reimon Buyco

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figures and Tables Page

Figure 1. Landscape design enhances user experience and the quality of surrounding

Ian Reimon Buyco

Figure 2. Landscape design also improves pedestrian safety and mobility

Figure 3. Design charettes initially lays down ideas and vision in sketch

Ian Reimon Buyco

Figure 4. Space is designed in volumes enclosed and organized by physical elements.

Efren A. Aurelio

Figure 5. Base Plan & Overhead Plane

Figure 6. Vertical Plane articulates the spaces in front of it

Figure 7. Continuity is often exhibited in layouts of sidewalks, arcades and streetscapes

Efren A. Aurelio

Figure 8. Proximity of Interconnection

Figure 9. Simplicity in design

Figure 10. A variety of landscape elements

Figure 11. Dominance

Figure 12. Subordination Figure 13. Opposition Figure 14. Symmetry

Figure 15. Massing of Plants and Elements

Figure 16. Assymetry

Figure 17. Perspective balance

Figure 18. Scale and proportion

Figure 19. Rhythm Figure 20. Transition or gradation

58 58 59 60 61 62 62 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 65

Figure 21. Philippine Climate Map from the Philippine Atmospheric, Geophysical and Astronomical Administration.

Figure 22. Waiting sheds are important landscape elements both in urban and rural areas of the country -- a refuge for pedestrians from sun & rain.

Photo by: Jeoren Hellingman

Figure 23. Sample storm water management strategy (Source: SGS Design)

Figure 24. Vertical greenery installations (Photo by: www.cubesystem.ph)

Figure 25. Residential landscape provide efficient transition spaces from the indoor to outdoor spaces, while creating intimate and gathering zones. (Source: PGAA)

Figure 26. Mactan International Airport’s landscape

Photo by: Davitt Report Publication

Figure 27. Variety of public open spaces, provide spaces for recreation and social encounters.

Ortigas Park Photo by: Elmer Domingo

Community Park Photo by: Mike Andres

Figure 28. The UP Sunken Garden is open to the UP community, public and outsiders

Photo by : Glen Orbon

Figure 29. Different experiences are provided by commercial/mall landscapes and added amenities, enhacing consumer experience

Sketch by: Efren Aurelio

Figure 30. Arrival landscapes for hospitality developments are usually characterized by lush gardens

Figure 31. Play area in a residential complex

Source: DMCI Homes

Figure 32. Manila Golf and Country Club

Figure 33. Species at the Candaba Wetlands Bird Santuary

Photo by: Gabroiel Yumang

Figure 34. Bird Hide Path at the Candaba Wetlands Bird Santuary

Photo by: Ferdz Decena

Figure 35. Information, trail and wayfinding structures are made of logs, wood and stones at the Puerto Princesa Subterranean River National Park

Figure 36. Some of the country’s heritage sites recognized by UNESCO (Tubattaha Reef, Mt. Hamiguitan, Banaue Rice Terraces and Vigan. )

Mt Haguimitan Range Photo: Kleo Marlo Tubattaha Reef by Jerome Kim

Figure 37. Some of heritage trees in various sites in Metro Manila (DENR)

Figure 38. Various eco-resorts in the country maximize the use of local and indigenous materials in the make of lodges and decks.

Eco-lodge Photo : Stephen Amar

Figure 39. An example of brownfield remediation landscape in London. ( Haiman, 2010)

Figure 40. Sites at Corregidor Island in Bataan commemorate World War II

Figure 41. Planning layout of Medical City Plaza Ortigas (by Altavas Landscape Architects )

Figure 42. Parking are and landscape of Rural Health Unit in Ilocos Sur ( by LMID )

Figure 43. Bishan-Ang Mo Kio Therapeutic Park in Singapore is designed to engage the senses with a landscape of plants

Figures and Tables 90 90 91 93 95 96 98 98 100

Figure 44. Interior landscape at Lexus Showroom in Bonifacio Global City, Manila

Page

REFERENCES

Ahern, Jack. (2005). Theories, methods & strategies for sustainable landscape planning. From Landscape Research to Landscape Planning: Aspects of Integration, Education and Application. 119.

Aquino-Ong, S. (2012). Heritage trees in the Philippine urban landscapes: an assessment of their selected socio-cultural, ecological and conservation values.

Austin, G. & Yu, K. (2016). Constructed wetlands and sustainable development. Routledge. Oxon.

Birnbaum, C. (1994). Protecting cultural landscapes: planning, treatment, and management of historic landscapes. 36 Preservation Briefs. U.S. Department of the Interior National Park Service Cultural Resources. Washington, D.C. Retrieved from https://www.nps.gov/tps/how-to-preserve/preservedocs/preservation-briefs/36Preserve-Brief-Landscapes.pdf

Biodiversity Management Bureau (BMB) (2015). Guidebook to protected areas of the Philippines. Biodiversity Management Bureau – Department of Environment and Natural Resources. Philippines. Retrieved from https://www.denr.gov.ph/ images/DENR_Publications/PA_Guidebook_Complete.pdf

Booth, N.& Hiss, J. (2012). Residentiallandscapearchitecture:designprocessfortheprivateresidence. Prentice Hall. Columbus, Ohio.

Camenson, B. (2007). Opportunities in landscape architecture, botanical gardens, and arboreta careers. Revised Ed. McGraw Hill. New York.

Chiang, K & Tan, A. (eds.) (2009). Vertical greenery for the tropics. National Parks Board, Singapore.

Christensen, A.J. (2005). Dictionary of landscape architecture and construction. McGraw-Hill. New York.

Cranz, G. (2016). Ethnography for designers. Routledge. New York.

De Chapman, G. (2018). Landscapedesign:tenimportantthingstoconsider. University of Florida IFAS Extension. Retrieved from https://edis.ifas.ufl.edu/publication/ep375#:~:text=The%20five%20steps%20of%20the,drawing%20a%20final%20 design%20plan

DENR-NCR (2020). The heritage trees of Metro Manila. Department of Environment and Natural Resources - National Capital Region. Retrieved from https://ncr.denr.gov.ph/index.php/news-events/photo-releases/1364-the-heritage-trees-ofmetro-manila?highlight=WyJoZXJpdGFnZSIsInRyZWVzIiwiaGVyaXRhZ2UgdHJlZXMiXQ==

European Landscape Convention (2000). CouncilofEuropeLandscapeConvention.CouncilofEurope. Retrieved from https:// www.coe.int/en/web/landscape/the-european-landscape-convention

Ersoy, E. (2016). Landscapeecologypracticesinplanning:landscapeconnectivityandurbannetworks. Sustainable Urbanization. DOI: 10.5772/62784.

Hansen, G. (2010). Basicprinciplesoflandscapedesign.EDISUF/IFAS.2010. Retrieved from https://edis.ifas.ufl.edu/publication/ mg086

Flores, J. and Buot, I., Jr. (2021). The structure of permaculture landscapes in the Philippines. Biodiversitas, Volume 22, No. 4. DOI: 10.13057/biodiv/d220452

Hammer, N. (1991). Interior landscape design. McGraw-Hill Architectural & Scientific Publications, Inc. New York.

Harris, C., Dines, N. (1998). Time-saverStandardsforLandscapeArchitecture:DesignandConstructionData. McGraw-Hill, Inc. New York

Heat Island Group. (2020). Definitions and Terms – Solar Reflectance Index. Retrieved from https://heatisland.lbl.gov/resources/ definitions-and-terms

Landscape Institute (2013). PublicHealthandLandscape:CreatingHealthyPlaces. Retrieved from https://landscapewpstorage01. blob.core.windows.net/www-landscapeinstitute-org/migrated-legacy/PublicHealthandLandscape_ CreatingHealthyPlaces_FINAL.pdf

Hawtree, F.W. (2005). The golf course: planning design, construction, and maintenance. E & FN Spon. London.

REFERENCES

Hicks, N. (2002). The national parks and other wild places of the Philippines. New Holland Publishers. London.

Holmgren, D. (2011). Permaculture:principlesandpathwaysbeyondsustainability. Holmgren Design Services. Victoria, Australia.

Jim, C. Y. (2017). Urbanheritagetrees:natural-culturalsignificanceinformingmanagementandconservation. Greening Cities, 279–305. DOI:10.1007/978-981-10-4113-6_13

Landscape Institute (2016). Landscape planning introduction. Retrieved from https://www.landscapeinstitute.org/technicalresource/landscape-planning-introduction/

Lorenzo, M.C. (2015). Filipino culture of filling up space in a gated community. Urban Planning and Architecture Design for Sustainable Development, UPADSD 14-16 October 2015. DOI: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.sbspro.2015.12.017

Lynch, K. (1984). Site planning. Third Edition. The MIT Press. Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Mahaliyanaarachchi, R. (2015). Agritourismfarmandfarmstay.Department of Agri Business Management. Faculty of Agricultural Sciences Sabaragamuwa. University of Sri Lanka. Retrieved from https://www.researchgate.net/publication/281447684_ AGRI_TOURISM_FARM_FARM_STAY

Manila Memorial Park (2020). Differenceofmemorialparkandcemetery. Retrieved from https://www.thememorialpark.com/ post/difference-of-memorial-park-and-cemetery

Mehta, H., Baez, A. & O’Loughlin, P. (Eds.). (2002). International ecolodge guidelines. Burlington, Vermont: The International Ecotourism Society.

Mehta, H. (2016). Ecolodge planning and workshop. International School of Sustainable Tourism. Subic. Merriam-Webster, Incorporated (n.d.). Definition of softscape. Retrieved from https://www.merriam-webster.com/ dictionary/softscape

Naguran, M. (2010). HiteshMehtaonecolodgeprinciplesandhisnewbook“AuthenticEcolodges”. An interview. Gaia Discovery. Retrieved from https://www.gaiadiscovery.com/latest-people/hitesh-mehta-on-ecolodge-principles-and-his-newbook-authent.html

O’Connor, K. (2018). Restoring landscape experience: research and new design for the battlefield landscape of Minute Man National Historic Park. Landscape Architecture and Regional Planning. University of Massachusetts Amherst. Retrieved from https://scholarworks.umass.edu/larp_ms_projects/91

Philip, D. (2001). Architectural Psychology. International Encyclopedia of the Social & Behavioral Sciences. Pergamon. Oxford, United Kingdom. Retrieved from: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/B0080430767013784.

Rakow, D & Lee, S. (2011). Public garden management. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New Jersey.

Salat, H. & Ollivier, G. (2017). Transformingtheurbanspacethroughtransit-orienteddevelopment: The 3V Approach. World Bank, Washington, DC. Retrieved from https://openknowledge.worldbank.org/handle/10986/26405

Simonds, J.O. & Starke, B. (2006) Landscapearchitecture:amanualofenvironmentalplanninganddesign. 4th ed. McGraw-Hill. New York.

TIES (2015). What is eco-tourism? The International Ecotourism Society. Retrieved from https://ecotourism.org/what-isecotourism/

Victoria State Government (2016). Urban design guidelines for Victoria. Retrieved from https://www.urban-design-guidelines. planning.vic.gov.au/guidelines/public-spaces

Whiting, D., & de Jong, J. (2014). Water-wise landscape design - CMG GardenNotes #413: principles of landscape design. 413-1 to 413–12. Retrieved from https://cmg.extension.colostate.edu/wp-content/uploads/sites/59/2020/01/GN-410-Water-WiseLandscapes.pdf

WWF (2001). Tourism: position statement. Retrieved from http://awsassets.panda.org/downloads/wwf_tourism_position.pdf

Yan, L. (2015). StudyonOptimalDesignofUniversityLandscapeontheBasisofEducationalFunction.InternationalConference on Arts, Design and Contemporary Education (ICADCE). Atlantis Press. Retrieved from https://www.atlantis-press.com/ article/23857.pdf

Yücel, G.F. (2013). HospitalOutdoorLandscapeDesign. InTech. DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/55766. Retrieved from https://www. researchgate.net/publication/304142342_Hospital_Outdoor_Landscape_Design

3.0 PROCESS

this page is intentionally left blank

132 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

3.0

P R O C E S S

TOPIC HIGHLIGHTS

The purpose of this chapter is to provide a basic understanding of the rules of engagement expected of all stakeholders involved during the design and construction processes of a Landscape Architectural project for more streamlined coordination and smooth execution.

Types of Landscape Architectual Projects

Landscape Architectural Project Stages

CONTENTS

3.1. Introduction 117

3.2. Definition of Terms 117

3.3. Types of Landscape Architectural Projects 118

3.4. Landscape Architectural Project Stages 120

3.4.1. Pre-Contract Stage

A. Pre-design Stage 121 B. Conceptual Design Stage 123 C. Schematic Design Stage 124 D. Design Development Stage 125 E. Construction Documentation Stage 126 F. Procurement and Bidding Stage 128

3.4.2. Post-Contract Stage

A. Construction Administration Stage 133 B. Turnover/Handover and Maintenance Stage 134 C. Post-Occupancy Evaluation Stage 135

3.5. Project Documentation

3.5.1. Pre-Contract Stage 137

3.5.2. Post-Contract Stage 143

3.5.3. Project Correspondence 144

3.6. Understanding Landscape Cost Factors 145

this page is intentionally left blank

3.1 Introduction and Purpose

Diagrams and flowcharts are provided to give a more understandable representation of these concepts. Sample forms and reports are also shown to illustrate the required documentation clearly.

the bidder offers to carry out and complete the works described in the bid documents in accordance with the conditions of the contract and statutory obligations.

b.Relationship of site works budget to overall project budget, with the prime consultant.

3.2.4. Change Order or Variation Order

This chapter illustrates the stepby-step processes of professional engagement during the implementation of a Landscape Architectural project, from the initiation stage to the closeout and post-construction stages.

It should be noted that this chapter does not cover technical landscape engineering and construction processes that are executed at the project site. The purpose of this chapter is to provide a basic understanding of the rules of engagement expected of all stakeholders involved during the design and construction processes of a Landscape Architectural project for more streamlined coordination and smooth execution.

3.2. Definition of Terms

- May be used interchangeably with the term “tender” (see 4.2.11), but “bid” is more typically used among bidders or when the owner deals with bidders, while the owner or their procurement entity uses the term “tender.” It is important to note that bidding and tendering have distinct processes but always goes hand in hand.

3.2.2.

Bidder

- The person, firm, or company submitting a bid.

3.2.3.

Budgetary Cost Estimate

- Pertains to an amendment to a construction contract that changes the contractor’s scope of work, may it be an addition, deduction, or omission of the scope of work. For a change order to be valid, the owner and contractor must agree to the terms before implementing the change order (Farley, 2018).

3.2.5. Closeout

3.2.1. Bid

- A formal offer by a contractor, in accordance with specifications for a project, to do all or a phase of the work at a specific price following the terms and conditions stated in the offer (Dictionary of Construction Terminology, n.d.).

- Can also refer to the price for which

-Cost relationships between site disciplines, such as civil, irrigation, and environmental systems. It typically includes the following (Design Workshop Inc., 2016):

a.Itemized cost program and unit pricing prepared with the help of a Quantity Surveyor or General Contractor.

– Includes activities involved with the orderly transfer of the completed project from the Contractor to the owner. It begins with starting and adjusting systems and ends with the Contractor’s accepting final payment from the owner (Construction Specifications Institute, 2011).

3.2.6. CSI(Construction Specifications Institute)

– A non-profit association dedicated to improving the communication of

construction information throughout continuous development and transformation of standards and formats, education, and certification of professionals to improve project delivery processes (Construction Specifications Institute, n.d.).

3.2.7.

General Contractor

– The party responsible for overseeing a construction project and entering into the property owner’s prime contract. The General Contractor is sometimes known as the Direct Contractor. A direct contractor is a party who contracts with and is hired directly by the property owner. Another name for this is the General Contractor. This role is determined by who the agreement is with and not the nature of the work, the name of the company in question, or any other factor (Menge, 2021).

alternative offer (Garmory et al., 2007).

3.2.9.

Quantity Surveyor

– Employed when the service he or she renders will be of value and economy regarding the project, especially for large contracts where proper cost control is essential (Garmory et al., 2007).

3.2.10.

Statutory bligations

– Compliance with requirements regarding noise, safety, building regulations, local laws and restrictions, health and safety, and others (Garmory et al., 2007).

3.2.11.

Tender

3.2.12. Turnover

– Alternatively used with the term “handover,” refers to the phasein construction that involves transitioning building operations from a project team to an operation and maintenance (O&M) team.

3.2.13.

Value Engineering or Value Management

– Frequently carried out after a project has been bid and the contract for construction has been let or is imminent. The process is also valuable in the fee-negotiating process because the landscape architect is interested in the client’s costs, and everyone wants to save money (Rogers, 2011).

involved in the green building movement 1 . Moreover, they may engage in sustainable projects that target green building certification. Some examples of sustainable landscape design practices include capturing stormwater for landscape irrigation and designing rooftop gardens for biodiversity enhancement. All green building certification programs require the involvement of Landscape Architects in a project’s design process. In the Philippines, the most used green building certification programs are LEED2 and BERDE3

3.2.8.

Invitation to bid

– A shortlist of bidders is drawn up based on responses to the preliminary inquiry. Documents to be issued include an invitation to bid in a letter format, and also Separate Forms of Bid should be issued for each

– Refers to a document released by the owner/client to invite suppliers and service providers to bid for a project’s specific scope or accept formal professional offers or bids. The term “tender,” although commonly interchanged with the term “bid,” is usually used in the internal processes of the owner/client and its procurement entity. (Kenton & Kindness, 2021).

3.3. Types of Landscape Architectural Projects

Landscape Architectural projects may be classified according to the following types:

A.

Sustainable Projects

As designers of the built environment, Landscape Architects are directly

1 A global environmental campaign to shift to creating buildings and structures and using environmentally responsible and resource-efficient processes throughout a building’s life-cycle from site selection to design, construction, operation, maintenance, renovation, and deconstruction, this practice expands and complements the classical building design concerns of economy, utility, durability, and comfort (EPA, n.d.).

2 Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, or LEED for short, is a global green building certification program established by the US Green Building Council (USGBC).

3 Building for Ecologically Responsive Design Excellence, or BERDE for short, is a local green building certification program established by the Philippine Green Building Council (PHILGBC).

International Projects

Qualified Philippine-based Landscape

B. E. F. G.

Architectural firms may engage in international projects of various scales, ranging from resort communities and towns to corporate headquarters and hotels. The project manual for these types of projects must reflect the engagement type and corresponding requirements. Community Development and Multifamily Housing Housing developments are one of the most common types of projects that a Landscape Architect may be engaged in. The Landscape Architect is typically involved in the early design integration stages of planning up to the last few stages of the project when site improvements and landscaping is implemented.

C. D.

Streetscape and Transit Projects

These projects are typically based on local and national regulations and are publicly owned by the government. Examples of these projects include road beautification and street design for both pedestrians and vehicles.

Parks and Outdoor Recreation Facilities

Typically publicly owned and managed by the government, these projects may require a Landscape Architect to be part of the team for the master planning, project implementation, and closeout stages.

Commercial, Industrial, and Corporate Development

These types of projects require the design and planning of a development’s public spaces. An excellent example of this type of project are mall complexes and industrial or technology and innovation parks.

Figure 1 Community streetscape design Source: NACTO, Global Street Design Guide

Urban and Regional Planning

This type refers to long-term and largescale projects requiring collaboration with urban planners and other allied professionals to create ecologically sound and sustainable master plans.

Figure 2 Landscape Perspective of a Shopping Plaza by: LArch. Efren Aurelio

Single-Family Residential and Garden Design Projects

These types of projects are for privately owned homes and are smaller in scale. They may range from estate landscapes to small gardens.

H. I.

Conservation, Land and Water Reclamation Projects

For these projects, the built environment’s interrelations with existing natural resources and ecological systems must be studied and designed for. These kinds of projects also include allied professionals engaged in the project’s engineering, scientific analysis, and cultural aspects.

J.

Historic Preservation and Landscape Restoration Projects

These highly specialized projects require historical inventories, land surveys, rehabilitation, restoration, and reconstruction plans. Conservation and/or historic consultants should be included in these projects.

K.

Landscape Art and Earth Sculpture

These projects involve the collaboration between the Landscape Architect and artists that can turn landscapes into provocative works of art.

3.4. Landscape Architecture Project Stages

Like any other project, a landscape architectural project usually undergoes five project phases: Initiation Phase – The scope and goal of the project are defined, and the stakeholder’s expectations are aligned with the project purpose.

Monitoring and Control – The progress and performance of the project are tracked, reviewed, and orchestrated. During this phase, the changes required are reviewed, implemented, and monitored. Closing – Activities are performed to conclude all activities and formally complete the project, phase, or contractual obligations.

Landscape Architectural project stages are generally classified under the phases mentioned above and discussed in detail in the following subsection. Below is a table that shows which phase these various stages are categorized under. These stages are classified into two general stage timelines: Pre-contract and Post-contract.

A.

D. E. B. C.

Planning Phase – The total scope is established, the objectives are defined and refined, and the course of action required to attain project objectives is developed. Execution Phase – The work defined in the planning phase is completed. This phase includes coordination between parties involved in the project and managing resources.

Table 1 Landscape Architectural Project Stages in the Context of Project Phases

Initiation Planning Execution Monitoring and Controlling Closing

Pre-design Conceptual Design Schematic Design Design Development Construction Documentation

Procurement and Bidding Project Delivery

Construction Administration Turnover/ Handover and Maintenance Post Occupancy Evaluation

3.4.1 Pre-contract Stage

The Pre-contract Stage includes processes done before a formal contract is drawn and agreed upon among all parties. It includes Landscape Architectural Stages classified under the Initiation Phase through to the Execution Phase.

A.

Pre-design Stage

The purpose of the Pre-design Stage is to establish the primary requirements of the project. Purposeful design must begin with a comprehensive understanding of parameters to be considered at any point in the design process.

PRE DESIGN SERVICES

Parameters comprise a basic set of guidelines and boundaries that the design team refers to for any dilemma during the project. Predesign parameters can be used as a framework for the design and documentation process of the project. They should be well-documented and readily accessible to the design team.

At this stage, the project’s intended outcome is established through a graphic depiction or a mock-up of the intended documentation deliverables. Pre-design documentation should be clear, precise, and methodically organized. The key components of the Pre-design Stage include but are not limited to the following:

•

Initial Consultation

An initial consultation or interview with the client provides information about the project location, size, initial ideas, budget, and timeline. For large projects, this stage may be presented to the Landscape Architect in the form of a brief, which includes crucial information about the project and the parties involved.

•

Return Brief or Proposal

The Landscape Architect provides

this after receiving key project information from the client. The Return Brief includes ideas and requirements as understood by the Landscape Architect from the initial client consultation, project scope and deliverables, team members, other involved consultants, professional fee, and possible project program (e.g., project duration, schedules, site visits).

• Project Understanding and Research

This stage is done after contract signing and before site inspection to review initial consultation notes and the return brief or proposal and collaborate with other consultants.

potential processes.

The Pre-design Stage requires the client and multi-disciplinary consultants to determine project issues, parameters, and preliminary intentions. The Landscape Architect should integrate his/her pre-design data with other project consultants and vice versa. Some typical issues to be coordinated among the Landscape Architect and other consultants are as follows:

• Detailed Scope of Work

These work scope relationships may include overlaps, redundancies, and potential conflicts that must be coordinated and clarified.

• Code Review

The Landscape Architect should ensure that the design will adhere to various existing codes that govern or have jurisdiction over the area of the site and that will subsequently affect the project.

• Research Needs and Opportunities to Innovate

REVIEW NOTES:

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURAL PROJECT PHASES: 1. Initiation Phase

Planning Phase

Execution Phase

• Site Inventory & Analysis The processes involved in this stage include procuring survey plans, locating the site, documenting existing vegetation, conducting soil and geotechnical analysis (i.e., reviewing the terrain and evaluating the current land uses), and identifying pertinent environmental factors (e.g., site orientation, sun, shade, noise, wind, water). An initial site visit can be done in preparation for a site investigation to better understand design opportunities, challenges, and

• Site Analysis

Coordination of this helps in the creation of informed and coordinated decisions.

• Preliminary Program

A collaborative team of professionals develops this program.

Monitoring and Control

Closing

PRE-DESIGN

STAGE

COMPONENTS: 1. Initial Consultation 2. Return Brief or Proposal

Project Understanding and Research

Site Inventory and Analysis

Detailed Scope of Work

Site Analysis 7. Preliminary Program

Code Review 9. Research Needs and Opportunities to Innovate

Conceptual Design Stage

PRELIMINARY PROJECT PROGRAM

PHILIPPINE

The Conceptual Design Stage is when the preliminary design framework is explored. This framework serves as the basis for the project’s vision and detailed intent to be developed during the Schematic Design Stage. The project’s emerging concept should fulfill the requirements established at the Pre-design Stage.

Design frameworks are derived from and used to help develop a project’s primary mission, vision, program, principles, and performance metrics. The Conceptual Design Stage organizes the programmatic scope and establishes relationships among the primary project components. The objective is to explore varied design approaches that can be evaluated against project goals and objectives. Innovative and creative thinking is encouraged.

Conceptual Design is exploratory, visual, and refined, organized to highlight the project’s primary intent. The Conceptual Design Stage is a flexible process that evolves with the growing requirements of the project. However, a set of basic components should be provided to convey and verify the emerging

direction.

The key Concept Design components are as follows:

• Site analysis and evaluation

• Preliminary project program depicting proposed site elements and associated characteristics

• Design intent

• Design brief

• Performance metrics or measurable objectives

• Design principles (beliefs or assumptions that guide design decision making)

• Alternative conceptual design frameworks or diagrams that respond to established design intent

• Design studies to explore and evaluate conceptual relationships among programmatic elements, highlighting principles to serve the project mission and vision

• Design character or physical characteristics of the emerging proposal

• Estimate of probable construction costs

• Preliminary phasing plan

Coordination efforts during the Conceptual Design Stage should focus on the alignment of multidisciplinary intent. The following are some of the typical items to be coordinated among all consultants to ensure successful collaboration:

• Preliminary Project Program – Depicts the relationships between interdisciplinary design program elements.

• Design Intent – Overall alignment and integration of project mission, vision, goals, objectives, and performance metrics

• Design Character – Unified perspective on physical characteristics, materials, scale, and spatial organization

Schematic Design Stage

C. REFINED PRELIMINARY PLAN COORDINATION OF DESIGN WITH OTHER TRADES

CONDUCT FURTHER RESEARCH & ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS BY THE OWNER

COORDINATION WITH AUTHORITIES - (GOV ERNMENT AGENCIES/ LGUs)

PRESENTATION TO CLIENT

DESIGN

Figure 6. Schematic Design Phase Flow

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

The Schematic Design Stage develops and establishes the design intent of the project. The conditions, concerns, and parameters presented during the Pre-design Stage are analyzed and addressed. Spatial and scalar organization, programmatic scope, and the relationship among major design elements are further developed and refined. Ideas are explored, and proposals are evaluated.

Responsibilities of the Landscape Architect during the Schematic Design Stage

1. Coordinate, confirm, and verify the design requirements with the owner

2. Coordinate with allied professionals or consultants to ensure consistency in the design concept

Design Development Stage

Responsibilities of the Landscape Architect during the Design Development Phase include:

The Schematic Design Stage is similar to the Conceptual Design Stage because it is also analytical and visual. This stage requires extensive and accurate information about the site and thus typically uses additional surveys, feasibility studies, and investigations that the owner may have conducted or requested. More developed design intent and technical analysis are part of the Landscape Architect’s expected output in this stage. Schematic Design documentation must have measurable or quantifiable data, align with different disciplines involved, clearly convey the design intent, and evoke the intended emotions of the owner.

3. Request necessary additional surveys, investigations, and feasibility studies from the owner or project manager

4. Conduct studies and investigations related to the project that is within the general scope of the Landscape Architect as needed

5. Coordinate with any authorities that have jurisdiction over the project

6. Prepare the Schematic Design documentation based on the owner’s requirements

7. Assist in the development and preparations of budgetary cost estimates

The Design Development Stage reinforces the design intent established during the Schematic Design Stage. In this stage, design decisions and concerns must be resolved. The approved design scheme is further developed, and each space or component is given more detail. The physical components of the design, along with their relationship to other elements, are comprehensively studied.

The design is finalized, and all decisions made in this stage are recorded. The drawings and documents produced in this stage are not to be confused with those of the Construction Documentation Stage, as the items from the latter have more specific details meant for the contractors.

Design Development Documentation is both technical and visual. It must provide sufficient information regardless of drawing scale and take into consideration the intent of other consultants.

1. Coordinate with other consultants to ensure accuracy and suitability of the details to be included in the drawings

2. Investigate or study any additional information about the project supplemented by the other consultants

3. Assist in the refining of the cost estimates

4. Attend site visits and meetings

5. Prepare and submit the Design Development Drawing Package

6. Provide recommendations and assistance in case of revisions after value-engineering reviews

Construction Documentation Stage

The Construction Documents Stage provides clear, concise, and complete descriptions of the Contractor’s scope of work. It must include all the information necessary to construct the work to precise standards.

Construction Documents comprise drawings and specifications and are components of a more extensive collection of documents known as Contract Documents 4 Construction Documentation is about communicating, coordinating, and confirming design decisions and all other necessary information for bidding and construction. Drawings must illustrate precisely how construction should be executed. Accompanying documents must include an accurate definition of the designated work scope and all

4 These documents are listed and enumerated in the agreement and referred to in the conditions of the con tract for the work to be performed. They are the documents that are a legal part of the contract and describe the pro posed construction that results from performing services, furnishing labor, and supplying and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction (Construction Specifi cations Institute, 2011).

associated construction standards. Construction Documents should be clear, measurable, and defined in a manner that can be evaluated objectively.

The Design Development documents will be implemented according to the requirements stipulated in the Construction Documents. These requirements include dimensional precision, performance requirements, and interdisciplinary coordination. Construction Documentation is purely a production phase for the tender and bidding processes.

To avoid conflict resulting in poor workmanship or construction cost overruns, Construction Documents must avoid the following errors:

subject to oversight.

2. Discrepancy – Inconsistencies may occur where multiple consultants make inaccurate references or if the drawings are not fully coordinated.

3. Verbosity – Unnecessary or wordy drawing notes may result in confusion and misinterpretation. Drawing notes should be used to identify materials or components and should be short and precise.

4. Construction Documents are meant to be reviewed by contractors who base their bids on information derived from these documents. These types of documents must be simple, coherent, and straightforward. They must be precise and not subject to multiple interpretations.

manager in determining and formulating the Definitive Project Construction Cost Estimates

8. Ensure that the Definitive Project Construction Cost Estimates are based on the latest and approved Detailed Design drawings

9. Ensure that all Landscape Architectural drawings and specifications are in line, consistent, and fully coordinated with the drawings and documents of the other allied consultants

Construction Documentation Best Practices include the following:

• Standardized Formatting

1. Redundancy – There may be the assumption that redundancy ensures that the reader can readily locate information if it is available in multiple locations. However, finding information can be difficult if it is not located in a single predictable location. Furthermore, making a revision to the same information in multiple locations is both inefficient and

5. Responsibilities of the Landscape Architect during the Construction Documentation Phase include the following:

6. Assist the owner, project manager, and the project team in organizing the scope and components of the Contract Packages, Construction Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents

7. Assist the owner and the project

Formatting establishes organizational and operational clarity, enhances documentation and coordination efficiency, and facilitates quality control. This requires drawing sheet and set organization, drafting conventions, schedules, symbols, abbreviations, notation, code conventions, and guidelines for plotting.

oReference Standards

oAIA CAD Layer Guidelines

oUniform Drawing System (UDS)

– Elements of this system include drawing set organization, sheet organization, schedules, drafting

conventions, terms and abbreviations, symbols, notations, code conventions, plotting guidelines. Some examples are the AIA CAD Layer Guidelines and the Uniform Drawing System (UDS)

• Conformance Review

Landscape Architectural documents should conform to the following:

1. Design intent, recorded as the basis of design

2. Program requirements include specific facilities and attributes, spaces, number of people to be accommodated, the required number of parking slots, and others.

3. All applicable codes and agency approval requirements

4. All design review and client submittal review comments that have resolved project issues

5. All commissioning requirements

Drawings and specifications should be developed concurrently. A specification take-off form may be used to define details, corresponding descriptions, and specification section references. The generic use of phrases such as “See specifications” should be avoided as they are implicit and unnecessary. Standardized drawing specification coordination checklists are integral to establish a consistent and comprehensive frame of reference. Such checklists and issue tracking forms ensure that:

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS PROCESS

Preparation of Comprehensive or Detailed Drawings

• Formalized Drawing-Specification Coordination

As the two primary components of the Contract Documents, drawings and specifications have different purposes but support each other.

1. Important items are identified in the drawings and specifications

2. Specified product names and series, models, and catalog numbers are correct

3. Drawings and specifications do not contain duplicate or conflicting information

4. Cross-references in the specifications are correct

5. Referenced standards are correct and applicable

6. Manufacturers’ names and contact information are correct

Coordination of Final Drawings to Other Design Specialists and Consultants

Preparation of Final Specifications

Preparation of Detailed Bill of Quantities

Preparation of Necessary Drawings for Development Permits

Figure 7. Construction Documentation Process

• Graphic Diligence

Checking the Construction Document for any possible errors ensures that correct information is conveyed to the contractors.

Procurement and Bidding Stage

Once the complete set of construction drawings has been approved and sent to potential contractors (also known as the service provider or suppliers), the project team may proceed with the Procurement and Bidding Stage. At this stage, the project team searches for companies that can build or provide the required services. It is important to note that some clients or project owners may already have a shortlist of companies they prefer to engage. If there are none, a pool of service providers or suppliers is invited to submit a formal quotation.

This Bidding Invitation5 may also be

5 [ The term “bidding” is usually used on the side of bidders or when the owner or procurement entity deals with bidders, while the term “tender” is commonly used on the side of the owner or procurement entity. Although the terms may

known as the Tender Invitation. After carefully reviewing all submitted quotations, the project team selects the contractors that the project is awarded to.

• Procurement and Bidding Process

In construction development, “Bidding/Tendering” is the process by which the project team, client, or employer searches and invites contracting companies to bid for a service or item needed for project construction. Once there is a shortlist of possible companies, the Bid/Tender or the invitation to bid can now be sent. Usually, the tender includes the formal letter of invitation to bid, request for quotation, the complete set of drawings (Bidding Documents) for the intended work, the document that discusses the scope of work, and all the other instructions. The bidding process typically begins when the owner sends out the “tender” or the invitation to bid. For government projects, the bidding process should abide by and follow national/local bidding procedures (Kenton et al. l, 2021).

At this point, it is important to note that the bidding procedures depend on whether a project is up for a public or a private bid.

Table 2

Public Bid vs. Private Bid

For the differences between a public and a private bid, see table below: F

PUBLIC BID PRIVATE BID

Follows a well-defined process

Has a predetermined period to advertise the bid

Not legally bound by the public procurement process

Has a selected, pre-qualified list of bidders

Follows a specific advertising process Has little to no advertising

Has a specific bid date and time Has a flexible bid date and time

Requires complete and thorough bids Accepts partial bids

Public opening and reading of each bid Private analysis of each bid

Predominantly selects the lowest bidder Not required to select the lowest bidder

be commonly interchanged, each one has a distinct internal process of its own.]

Source : Hopper, L.J. (2007)

The shortlisted contractors are given sufficient time to review the details and provide quotations for the costs of their services. These quotations are known as bids. Before bids are finalized, most project owners hold a pre-bid conference with eligible contractors to discuss the details of the project and address any queries and concerns. This means that prebid conferences must be attended by significant project stakeholders, including the owner, project managers, designers, and engineers, to ensure all of those involved understand the design intent. After the pre-bid conference, sufficient time is given to the suppliers and service providers to finalize and adjust their bids. The bids submitted by the contractors are evaluated based on their quality, cost-effectiveness, coherence to the project intent, and aesthetic value.

In public bidding, the head of the procuring entity (i.e., any branch, department, office, or agency of the government) can, at any point, reject any or all bids, declare a failure of bidding, or not award the contract to a winning bidder for the following reasons:

1. If there is prima facie or sufficient evidence of collusion between bidders; officers, or employees of the procuring entity; or both bidders and officers or employees

2. If the committee responsible for overseeing the public procurement procedures fails to do so

3. If there is a justifiable reason to argue that awarding the contract will not render the expected deliverables of the project (See Section 41 of the IRR of R.A. 9184)6

4. After the evaluation process, a service provider or supplier is awarded and becomes the official contractor for a specific task in the project.

These methods include the following types:

• Design-Bid-Build (DBB) and Design Negotiate Build (DNB) Project Delivery Methods

These methods, also referred to as “Low Bid” or “Competitive Bid,” are mainly used for public bids. It is a linear process where the Landscape Architect completes plans and specifications, after which service providers or suppliers bid for the project exactly as it is designed. The lowest rated and most responsive bidder is awarded.

to the Construction Stage.

4. One or more contractors may provide contractor project management, depending on whether a single prime contract is used. Depending on the size and extent of the project, contractor project management services may be performed by a project superintendent, a project manager, or team personnel, who are each responsible for different aspectsoftheContractor’sproject managementresponsibilities.DBB typicallyutilizeslump-sumorunit cost contracts.

• Design-Negotiate-Build (DNB)

Usually, the General Contractor, who oversees the progress and construction development of the project, is the first service provider to be selected and awarded. There are several methods in choosing a General Contractor, and these methods are also known as the Project Delivery Methods.

The DBB method is considered by many to be the usual practice of construction contracting. The procedure is as follows:

1. The owner hires the Landscape Architect to design the project in collaborationwithotherengaged consultants, after which the project is made available for bidding.

2. Shortlisted contractors submit their bids.

The DNB method is a variation of the DBB but does not put the project out for bidding, but contractors must still go through a price for the project. Unlike DBB projects which usually utilize lump-sum or unit cost contracts, DNB projects use contracts with the cost of the work plus a fee and a guaranteed maximum price7 (GMP).

6 Republic Act No. 9184, also known as the Gov ernment Procurement Reform Act

3. The project is awarded to the selectedcontractorandproceeds

7 [ Refers to the most a contractor can bill a cus tomer for a project, also known as “not-to-exceed price” con tracts. These agreements require customers to compensate contractors for their direct costs and a fixed fee for overhead and profit, but only to a certain threshold.]

If “cost plus a fee” or “time and material” pricing are utilized, the contractors must submit records of actual costs incurred with the Contractor’s applications for payment.

Table 3. DBB VS. DNB

DBB and DNB usually involve a single contract but may involve administering multiple prime contracts. The prime differences between DBB and DNB are shown in the chart:

DBB DNB

The General Contractor is engaged only after the Construction Documentation Phase.

The General Contractor is on board as early as the Pre-design phase/Schematic Design/ Design Development phase to advise the designers of possible value engineering.

The Landscape Architect’s responsibilities in the DBB and DNB project delivery methods include the following:

• Represent the owner during the Construction Stage

• Observe work conformance with contract requirements

• oReview project progress for contractor progress payment applications

Competitive bids from various contractors are delivered. The Landscape Architect will review each bid and advise the Owner in the selection process.

The Owner preselects reputable, competent, and trusted general contractors and negotiates with them concerning the overall contract price, schedule of completion, and other essential details of the project. The owner analyzes the bids and awards the contract to the selected bidder.

Contracts are usually lump sum or unit costs.

Contracts usually include the cost of the work plus a fee and sometimes includes a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP).

• Prepare and recommend contract modifications

• Attend project meetings

• Inspect the project to determine substantial and final completion

• These project delivery methods are best suited for projects that are budget-sensitive but not sensitive to project changes. Owners have complete control over the design

Value engineering may be undertaken during the construction phase of the project.

Phasing is sequential – one phase does not begin until the previous phase has been completed, which takes more time.

The General Contractor will produce budgetary cost estimates at various stages during the design phase instead of undertaking value engineering during construction.

Project delivery time is shortened.

• Design and Build Project Delivery (DB Method)

In the DB Method, the Contractor and Landscape Architect are the “designbuilder” team the owner hires to deliver the project. As the term implies, the design-builder designs and builds the project. The design-builder gives

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

a guaranteed maximum price (GMP) or lump sum price early in the project, based on the owner’s design criteria and a moderately developed landscape design. The design-builder then develops the required drawings while staying below the furnished GMP, after which subcontractors for the different areas of the project are awarded.

In this method, the design-builder may hire an independent Landscape Architect for the design services aspect or choose to include it as part of their scope of work.

contract modifications. However, the design-builder performs many of the responsibilities that the construction manager would typically perform.

CCA and contractor project management services in the DB contract may be provided in one of the following ways:

builder rather than the owner. In addition to CCA services required by the Landscape Architect’s agreement with the design-builder, the Landscape Architect is required to provide services as set by governing licensing regulations.

Architect. The Landscape Architect’s CCA services during the Construction Stage are subject to the direction of the owner.

The distinction between construction contract administration8(CCA) and contractor project management services may become blurred in a Design and Build contract because the design-builder may provide both services. The owner typically retains some of the CCA responsibilities, such as verifying project progress before making periodic payments to the design-builder and reviewing

8 CCA involves the activities necessary to affect and determine the fulfillment of the contract requirements by the parties to the construction contract (Construction Specifications Institute, 2011).

• A member of a DB team is assigned to administer the contract. The member’s duties may be significantly modified from the usual form of CCA under a single prime contract.

• The owner may retain an administrative professional to represent the owner’s interest during construction. The agreement between the owner and the design-builder stipulates the responsibilities of the administrative professional performing CCA, so the designbuilder knows how to conduct the communications and process submittals during construction.

Since the Landscape Architect’s contractual relationship is with the design-builder, he/she may often be in the position of making recommendations to the design-

A design-builder who does not have a separate agreement with a contractor assumes responsibility for the Contractor’s project management services. In addition, through the design-builder’s agreement with the Landscape Architect or Landscape Architect on staff, the design-builder is responsible for many of the CCA services performed by the Landscape Architect. This type of project delivery method is best suited for new construction projects that are highly time-sensitive, less complex with small user groups, and flexible to mid-course design changes.

Depending on the owner’s preference, the Landscape Architect may be very involved in the Construction Stage and may assume responsibility for communicating with contractors and suppliers.

On the other hand, there may be no formal CCA, other than that required by Landscape Architecture licensing laws. Typical documents for this method are owner-specific, prepared directly by the owner or facility manager9, and may not be based on standardized documents.

• Owner-Build Project Delivery (OB Method)

In this method, the owner provides many of the Contractor’s project management services depending on the extent of the project. The owner may choose to retain a Landscape

9 Facility managers are typically involved in devel oping master plans for facilities and properties and budget pro jections for proposed projects. They frequently serve as lease managers for the owner’s rental properties and are charged with tenant relations. They might also be the owner’s designat ed representative working with independent developers, devel opment consultants, or real estate agents to meet the owner’s facility needs (Construction Specifications Institute, 2011).

The administrative procedures of this project delivery method are significantly less than those of the DBB or DB project delivery methods, as the owner can cover many of them. Procedures for addressing construction modifications are also simplified.

• Integrated Project Delivery (IPD) Method

The IPD method requires the early collaborative contributions of experts who typically come in during the latter part of the Design Stage. Contractors, facility managers, subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers are examples of these experts who become involved with the design team during the Design Process. Decisions are based on the appropriate solutions for the project and the owner’s needs rather than the cost. The early involvement of more “team members” creates synergy and allows the project to reach its highest potential of good design and construction solutions.

work typically performed during construction is moved to the Design Stage, CCA should be simplified. For example, a manufacturer or supplier may have input during the design process that leads to their product information being incorporated into the documents. Therefore, the review of submittals may be eliminated except if it is needed for verification purposes.

the following:

1. Ensure that all the Landscape Architectural drawings and documents sent to the shortlisted suppliers or service providers are correct and accurate for bidding.

2. Attend and participate in pre-bid conferences.

3. Assist the client, project managers, and procurement team in evaluating the submitted bids.

project, including the following:

• The Landscape Architect as the Owner’s Representative

The owner directly commissions the Landscape Architect to be his/her official representative or be the project lead consultant in all project-related matters (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

Once the project delivery method has been selected and final negotiations and clarifications have been made between the procuring entity and the selected contractor, a “Notice to Proceed (NTP)” will be officially issued to authorize the contractor in proceeding with the works required.

4. Assist the Quantity Surveyor in preparing the Definitive Office Estimate (DOE) of the project required for each bid package up for bidding before any decision is made.

3.4.2. Post-Contract Stage

As the client’s representative, the Landscape Architect acts as the overall project manager of the project and ensures that the design and the project remain aligned with the client’s vision, requirements, and expectations.

• The Landscape Architect as the Consultant

• ResponsibilitiesoftheLandscape ArchitectsduringtheProcurement and Bidding Stage

A collaborative effort in the IPD method allows for coordinated documents. Since much of the

The Landscape Architect has the responsibility to ensure that the design of the project is properly and accurately translated from drawing to construction and must therefore be included in the Procurement and Bidding Stage. During this stage, the Landscape Architect is tasked with

The Post-Contract Stage includes activities and processes that ensure the project’s work output complies with the agreed contracts of all parties. The Landscape Architectural project stages included at this point fall under the Monitor and Controlling Phase and Closing Phase and are discussed in detail in the following subsection. The Landscape Architect may assume different professional capacities during this stage in the

The owner directly commissions the Landscape Architect to provide professional landscape consultancy services, either individually or as part of a multi-disciplinary team, together with other duly licensed professionals in project-related matters (Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

As the project consultant, the Landscape Architect is expected to advise about the design aspect of the project. Together with the

other consultants, the Landscape Architect will oversee that the project follows the design intent and provide necessary design solutions to problems that may arise as the project progresses.

• The Landscape Architect as the Contractor

to provide professional advice and implementation services in projectrelated matters (Presidential Decree No. 1594, 1978; Republic Act No. 4556, 1965; Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

A.

Construction Administration Stage

The owner commissions the Landscape Architect through a public or direct negotiation bidding to provide professional landscape consultancy and implementation services in project-related matters (Presidential Decree No. 1594, 1978; Republic Act No. 4556, 1965; Republic Act No. 9053, 2001).

As the Contractor, the Landscape Architect is expected to coordinate with the consultants, construction managers, or project managers about drawing interpretations and any changes that may occur on-site.

To ensure that a project’s design intent is followed and correctly implemented, the Landscape Architect must conduct regular site visits.

attend these conferences, including the client, engineers, architects, and contractors.

• The Landscape Architect as the Subcontractor

The number of times a Landscape Architect visits the project site depends on what is stated on the Landscape Architect’s contract, which is based on the duration of the Construction Stage. However, unforeseen critical issues that need the Landscape Architect’s attention may also add to the required number of site visits.

Construction Administration can either be “off-site observation” or “onsite observation.” Off-site observation is used for tasks performed outside the project site that still require the supervision or approval of the Landscape Architect. This type of observation can be done at the office of the Landscape Architect or any place where project-related concerns can be discussed and addressed (e.g., plant nurseries).

only check on the construction progress or any deviations from the original design intent. These observations must be recorded in site reports and presented to the owner and the team during coordination meetings. The solutions to any issues and concerns must be presented to the project manager. Prior to site implementation, the solutions must first be approved by the owner.

a. Responsibilities and Tasks of Landscape Architects during the Construction Administration Stage

The owner commissions the Landscape Architect through a public or direct negotiation bidding

The responsibilities of a Landscape Architect during the Construction Administration Stage begin at the pre-construction conference, which takes place after the contracts have been awarded to discuss construction schedules, sequences, site safety protocols, and other pertinent details. All the project team members must

On-site construction observation requires the Landscape Architect to be physically present at the project site to check the development’s progress. An example of this is the evaluation of hardscape samples, mock-ups, and installations. Other examples include checking the condition of plants and approving the layout and placements of landscape-related utilities. While site visits are essential for observation and decision-making, the Landscape Architect cannot directly instruct the contractors unless authorized by the owner. The Landscape Architect can generally

1. Attend and participate in technical construction meetings to address any issues and concerns

2. Assist the owner and the project managers in resolving Landscape Architectural issues, concerns, and conflicts

3. Certify construction progress reports and authorize contractors’ billings, which must first be signed and recommended by the Project Managers

4. Submit any revisions or additional cost proposals to the owner through the project managers when changes affect construction cost and schedule

Turnover/Handover and Maintenance Stage

Landscape developments require specific care methodologies because they are exposed to the outdoor elements. Depending on the contract, the first few months or year of the project’s maintenance is typically handled by the landscape contractor who took care of its installation.

The main task of the Landscape Architect during the Maintenance Stage is to ensure that the planting materials remain healthy, and the overall development is kept in good condition. The number of site visits depends on the agreed-upon schedule with the owner.

The Landscape Architect may have a checklist of questions to properly evaluate maintenance: Is the site furniture being cleaned properly? Do the plants have pests or diseases? Have the trees been trimmed properly? Is the lawn area free from water ponding? All findings and corresponding solutions must be recorded and discussed with the owner or property manager. These findings are then compiled into the

punch list10. Based on official contract stipulations, the contractor rectifies the punch-listed items, after which the contractor invites the Landscape Architect, Construction Manager, and Client’s representative to “closeout” the punch-listed items. This process is repeated until all punch lists are closed out.

Conduct regular site visits

C.  Post-Occupancy Evaluation Stage

find aspects of the development that need improvement.

Punchlisting of hardscape and softscape elements

Once the punch-listed items are closed out, the turnover documents/package are prepared by the contractor for submission to the owner and operations and maintenance (O&M) team, who will be responsible for hiring a landscape maintenance service provider. The Landscape Architect may assist the owner or project manager in selecting a service provider.

Report findings to owner or property managers

Assist owner or property managers in evaluating landscape maintenance service providers

Post-Occupancy Evaluation (POE) is done to examine the suitability and effectiveness of the project in relation to the needs and satisfaction of the community it serves. It is conducted by a team of social scientists and the project’s designers, including the Landscape Architect, and may consist of interviews, questionnaires, walkthroughs, and observations. This type of evaluation is done after project handover occupants. The POE team may have a checklist of questions that must be answered using the point of view of the occupants: Is the design of the space satisfactory? How often is it used? What further improvements can be suggested? The answer to these questions can help the designers improve the development’s user experience.

The diagnostic POE requires the most time and largest budget. It is very comprehensive and produces detailed information on what must be done to improve the development and set higher user standards for future developments. This type of POE uses several methods, such as user interviews, questionnaires, walk-through observations, physical measurements, and comparative evaluations of similar developments.

Suggest possible solutions to issues and concerns of owner and/or property managers

10 A punch list is a document showing work that still needs to be done on a construction project. Ideally, Punch Lists should only include small fixes as major issues are expected to be addressed via change orders during the Construction Administration Stage.

Figure 9. Maintenance Stage Process

There are three types of postoccupancy evaluation: indicative, diagnostic, and investigative. The indicative POE can be accomplished relatively quickly, from a couple of hours to a few days. User interviews, audits, and walk-throughs are among the methods used. It is best used to

The investigative POE develops solutions to address issues raised after an Indicative POE has been made. In terms of comprehensibility and depth, Investigative POE functions as the middle ground between Indicative and Diagnostic POE. It is more reliable and solves more issues than an Indicative POE but is not as in-depth as a Diagnostic POE. Investigative POE also makes use of interviews, questionnaires, and walk-through observations. This type of POE requires the Landscape Architect to evaluate and analyze the data and assist in coming up with solutions to resolve the issues found during the evaluation

process. A comprehensive evaluation report is the final step for the Investigative POE. Data is compiled and organized, analyzed, and results are used to propose further recommendations. This report may include synthesized data such as maps, graphs, and tables. Other synthesized data may include discussions on issues of use, nonconformities between what users want in a space and what is there; discussions on nonconformities between design intent and what is happening; discussions on how space is managed/staffed/perceived; and problems uncovered by the POE and proposed solutions.

The report ideally results in proposed design/management guidelines for future similar landscape developments (Marcus, n.d.).

Building or project turnover and acceptance

Coordination with property managers or owners

3.5. Project Documentation

For each Landscape Architectural Project Stage, specific documentation is required.

Below is a brief flow chart that shows what documents are required for each corresponding stage.

Site visit for post occupancy evaluation

Conduct interviews and other necessary POE research methods

Evaluate and analyze the data gathered

PREDESIGN SERVICES CONCEPTUAL DESIGN PHASE

SCHEMATIC DESIGN PHASE

DESIGN DEVELOPMENT PHASE

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION PHASE TENDERING / PROCUREMENT

Formulate new design guidelines and solutions based on the evaluation and analysis

of the POE Report

Figure 10. Post Occupancy Stage Process Figure 11. Design Stages Diagram

CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION

POST CONTRACT STAGE MAINTENANCE

POST OCCUPANCY EVALUATION

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

3.5.1. Pre-Contract Stage

Pre-contract Services

These include preliminary commissioned services offered by a Landscape Architect prior to the official start of a project (before the commencement of the first project stage). The following documentation required for these services are as follows:

• Technical Reports

This refers to the different types of studies or pre-evaluation services by the Landscape Architect before the Conceptual Design Stage.

•

Feasibility Study

1. The owner/client usually requires this type of report to evaluate the feasibility of the proposed development. The feasibility study depends on the project typology, initial timeline, location, and budget.

2. The feasibility study includes an overview of possible landscape opportunities and projected costs per area of the development. It serves as supplementary

information to other consultants.

3. The budgetary considerations for landscape work at this stage are finalized and coursed through the owner/client for internal “Approved Project Value” (APV), which means that it will be part of the project’s budget upon implementation.

4. The feasibility study can be used in published competitions for public developments or direct commissions by the owner/ client (Professional Regulation Commission, 2004).

• Other Services

1. Commissioned research work requiring the input and insights of a Landscape Architect

2. Commissioned investigative work requiring the input and insights of a Landscape Architect

3. Commissioned academic work requiring the input and insights of a Landscape Architect

4. Design competitions requiring the input and insights of a Landscape Architect as the lead consultant or as part of a Multi-disciplinary Team (MDT)

Pre-Design Stage

•

B. location client information design objectives

This document is provided by the project owner and includes details on the proposed development scope, timeline, budgetary allocation, and other relevant information.

Figure 12.

C.

Conceptual Design Stage

1. Graphic Plan

The format depends on the requirements stipulated in the scope of work but is usually produced in a large graphical format.

Provides content that reflects the proposed landscape design intent for the project, including rendered plans, sections, elevations, perspectives, hardscape and softscape design inspirations, mood boards, and concept imagery.

Figure 11 Contents of graphic plans and design reports vary depending on the scope and size of the project and its design intents

2. Design Report

The format depends on the requirements stipulated in the scope of work, but is usually produced in graphic, A3 size and can be supplemented by slide presentations, 3D animation, augmented or virtual reality, brochures, and other literature. Provides a more detailed and concise representation of the proposed landscape design intent for the project, including rendered plans, sections, elevations, perspectives, mood and concept boards, and any other content necessary to illustrate the project’s design intent.

3. Preliminary Cost Estimate

This is a tabulated budgetary costing for relevant landscaping works that includes hardscape and softscape costs and comparative costs of recent or similar projects.

4. Sign-off Document/ Correspondence

This document is required once the Landscape Architect and owner/ client have agreed on the final design concept to finalize approval and move on to the Schematic Design Stage. Completion of this process serves as a milestone for the landscape

consultancy services, and invoicing can be initiated.

D.

Schematic Design Stage

This stage requires a more detailed landscape design intent. It is usually comprised of the following documentation:

• Schematic Design Board

This shows a rough, graphic intent of the landscape design, typically in a functional bubble diagram where the relationship between functional areas is shown in the form of arrows and circles.

Figure 13. An example of a bubble diagram

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

•

Design Report

This provides detailed graphical information of the proposed landscape design, including hardscape and softscape images, a site inventory and analysis, and other diagrams that may help explain the feasibility of specific systems and programs.

VISION PROJECT SCOPE

•

Schematic Cost Estimate

This reflects a more detailed budgetary costing for hardscape and softscape works, irrigation, water feature works, landscape lighting, and other specialized landscape works.

E.

Design Development Stage

This stage requires detailed documentation of the proposed landscape design intent that must be coordinated and aligned with the entire project team in preparation for tendering and bidding. It is usually comprised of the following:

• Technical Drawings

Usually, in a large format that follows ISO/Construction Industry drawing standards, these drawings include hardscape and softscape works, irrigation, water feature works, landscape lighting, and any other specialized landscape works.

These serve as the basis for how bidders’ proposed landscape and specialty works are considered, understood, captured, and priced.

Figure 13 Landscape reports provide details and contents of landscape design intents

Figure 14 Technical Drawing samples

• Pre-Bidding Cost Estimate

This document reflects the final costing of all necessary works needed to implement the proposed landscape design intent. It is usually presented in a tabulated format showing the following information:

• Other Documents

TopographicSurveyPlan(withexisting trees on site)

Existing Services Plan

Local Master Plan

Figure 14 Landscape Cost Estimate Sheet Sample

This document should be done by a qualified surveyor and must include the specific location of existing trees. Trees are tagged with a number, and their corresponding scientific and common names, girth, crown or spread, and height dimensions must be indicated.

This plan is provided by the project owner and indicates any existing mechanical, electrical, and plumbing (MEP) services that may be affected by the development.

This document is typically available at the Local Government Unit (LGU) office and includes proposed local Master Plan development guidelines that may affect the development.

Figure 15 Topographic Survey Sample

Source: UP College of Engineering/ UP OCA

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

FH

FH

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)

An EIA may be a supplementary document provided by an EIA consultant that includes a detailed study on how the proposed development will affect existing habitats, biodiversity, microclimate, site hydrology, and other ecological aspects. Recommendations must be provided in consideration of minimizing the development’s overall environmental impact (Presidential Decree No. 1151, 1977; Presidential Decree No. 1586, 1978).

arborist or forester that assesses existing mature trees on site that will be affected by the development. Recommendations are provided for tree protection zones, felling or removal, or relocation of necessary trees.

F.

Tender and Bidding Documentation

Stage11

Bidding documents usually contain the following information:

- Instructions to Bidders (Refer to Local ISO Tender Procedures)

Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan (EMMP)

EMMP may be a supplementary document provided by the EIA or EMMP consultant that includes a proposed detailed methodology for implementing, managing, and monitoring the EIA (Presidential Decree No. 1151, 1977; Presidential Decree No. 1586, 1978).

- Tree Conservation Report

This report may be a supplementary document provided by a certified

This document comprises the necessary information and level of participation required from the bidders to qualify for the bidding prerequisites.

11 Tender and Bidding are distinct processes that go hand in hand. Although the two terms are commonly used inter changeably, the term “tender” is usually used by the owner/cli ent, while bidders use the term “bidding” or when dealing with bidders. It must be noted that the specific processes involved in tendering and bidding are different, e.g., the procurement en tity of the client/owner may issue “tenders” but administer the “bidding” process.

Figure 16 Sample Existing Utilities Plan of a Residence

-Tender/BidDrawings(RefertoLocal ISO Tender Procedures)

This document is a set of detailed technical landscape drawings that serve as the bidders’ reference for pricing their services.

- Technical Specifications

1. This set of documents show the required material or performance specifications that serve as a basis for how the bidder’s proposed landscape specialty works are considered, understood, captured, and priced.

2. These include specifications for hardscape and softscape works, irrigation, water feature works, landscape lighting, and other specialized landscape works12.

- Final Cost Estimate

This document reflects the final estimated costing of all necessary works needed to implement the proposed landscape design intent.

- Schedule of Works

This document reflects the breakdown and description of the necessary works with corresponding specifications and, depending on the type of bidding process, may include the following:

1. Bill of Quantities - This is a tabulation of the required landscape works with the quantities indicated.

2. Lump-Sum - This form is a tabulation of the required landscape works with no quantities indicated and requires the bidder to evaluate this based on the given Construction Documents.

- Schedule of Rates

This document shows a breakdown and description of the necessary works with corresponding specifications and reflects acceptable works or items with alternative specifications.

12 Refer to relevant industry standards discussed in Chapter 5 Materials and Chapter 6 Planting.

Figure 18 Sample BOQ Sheets

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

•

Summary of Works

This document provides a summary of the different activities included in the scope of work with corresponding sub-total and overall costs.

•

Bidding Contract

The type of bidding contract may affect the final cost estimate and bidding documents to be prepared.

• Bid

Publication

This document reflects the details, scope, timeline, and instruction to bidders via publication and invitation.

•

Bid Evaluation Documents

This form reflects the comparative tabulation of the submitted bids and highlights (1) the item and description of tender item/works, (2) the submitted price of each bidder, (3) an assessment by the Landscape Architect, and (4) a summary of the bid submissions and preliminary recommendations to the owner/client and Tender Evaluating Committee (TEC).

A Tender Recommendation is also provided, a document that reflects the final report and endorsement to the owner and TEC.

•

Bid Award/Project Contract

These documents include the official notice to the winning bidder for the landscape works, the timeline, details of the awarded project, and signed contract drawings.13

•

Letter of Acceptance

This letter reflects the formal acceptance and acknowledgment of the bidder and their agreement to all the stipulated conditions and scope of the project.

3.5.2. Post-Contract Stage Construction Administration Stage

A.

The services at this stage commence at the beginning of project implementation and end at closeout documentation. Required documentation includes the following:

• Pre-Construction Survey

Before demolition and site work, a pre-construction survey is conducted to evaluate the condition of existing

13 Contract drawings are large graphic illustrations of the physical form of the work to be performed; drawings are graphic representations of the work upon which the contract is based.

Figure 19 Sample Bid Publication

buildings and structures adjacent to or near the proposed project site.

• Progress Reports

These are regularly conducted reports (daily or weekly) submitted by the project manager, architect, construction manager (CM), or Landscape Architect that serve as a record for all project-related matters as discussed by the project team and contractors.

awarded contract; includes details, and time and cost implications

b. Additional Items/Works – Changes that add items/works to the awarded contract; includes details and time and cost implications.

d. Technical Drawings Submission

A. Minutes of Meetings

These reports are usually supplemented with regular photo updates conducted by the Resident Engineer (RE), Resident Technical Officer (RTO), and contractors.

• Request for Variation (RFV) / Request for Variation Order (RVO)

These are documents facilitated by project team members to address variation works that have time and cost implications to the project. Each form is collated by the Superintending Officer (SO) and submitted to the owner before implementation.

Types of RFV/RVO:

a. Omission Items/Works – Changes that omit items/works from the

• Construction Change Order Template

a. Site Instructions (SI) or Confirmation of Verbal Instruction (CVI)

These are supplementary documents issued by the consultants to the contractors in response to queries.

b. Request for Information (RFI)

This document is sent by contractors to consultants to clarify project information.

c. Request for Approval (RFA)

Contractors send this document to designated approving bodies requesting the approval of proposed methodologies, shop drawings 14 , material and finishes samples, and other construction materials that need approval.

This submission may include shop drawings for approval during construction and as-built drawings at project completion. Drawings may include special hardscape details, softscape or horticultural works, irrigation systems, water features and swimming pool systems, and other specialist landscape works.

e. Closeout Submittals

These are processed near or during the completion of the project and may include as-built drawings, operations and maintenance manuals (OMM), bonds and warranties, extra stock, and construction records (e.g., shop drawings and approvals, contract modifications or variation orders, site progress photos).

The minutes serve as official documentation for meetings where decisions, directions, and instructions about the project are finalized. This document is essential for matters that have time and cost implications. The project manager usually facilitates meeting minutes, but it is prudent for the Landscape Architect to document any landscape matters to better clarify the project’s landscape intent.

B. Transmittal Forms

This form is used to record any transfer of documents between the different project teams.

3.6. Understanding Landscape Cost Factors

14 Shop drawings refer to drawings, diagrams, illus trations, and schedules prepared explicitly by the Contractor to illustrate and depict some of the work more clearly.

3.5.3. Project Correspondence

This document may come either in hardcopy (e.g., printed letters and documents) or in softcopy format (e.g., electronic correspondence, data management systems, cloud systems). Other than these types of documents, the following key documents should be included:

Certain factors affect the cost of a landscape project. Some significant factors include but are not limited to the items listed below.

A. New Construction vs. Renovation New construction projects and renovation projects both have advantages and disadvantages when it comes to cost implications, as enumerated below:

1. New Construction - New projects can use current market rates to assess the project’s total cost and cleared sites ready for construction to allow straightforward logistics costing.

2. Renovation - Projects with existing structures, landscape features, and mature trees may require additional time and cost due to necessary reinstatement, demolition works, realignment of services, and the assessment and protection of existing trees.

B. Project Size and Scope

The size of a project directly affects its cost. A project that is larger in area requires more materials and equipment, labor, and a longer construction timeline and is thus more costly to develop than a project with a smaller area.

C. Project Location

Projects located in developed or urbanized areas cost less to construct than projects in remote areas (e.g., mountain or offshore islands) due to accessibility, logistical issues in transporting materials, equipment, and personnel, and availability of existing utilities.

D. Customized vs. Commercially Available Landscape Features

Customized landscape features (e.g., a customized water feature) always cost more than commercially available ones. It is the same for customized specifications for landscape elements, including finishes, colors, sizes, thickness, and shapes, which cost more than readily available options.

Introduce green roof systems and vertical green systems that may require special acces and automated irrigation. Some landscape projects require specialized maintenance because of their use. For example, golf courses require special lawn maintenance because of their use as a playing surface. Formal European gardens which are known for being manicured also need frequent maintenance.

The scope of a project depends on its use, whether it be a complex theme park or a simple residential development. Logistical issues such as the use of specialized equipment or the employment of trained personnel for specialized works also dictate the cost of a project.

E. Landscape Maintenance Projects requiring specialized landscape maintenance services and equipment entail additional project costs. Examples of costly landscape elements include exotic plant species, custom landscape lighting, specialized audio-visual equipment, and arboricultural services that may be required for tree conservation.

166 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

C H A P T E R 3.0

PROCESS

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS AND REFERENCES

A scene in a shopping plaza sketched by Efren Aurelio .

The Chapter Cover provide a glimpse on the possibility of landscape spaces within a shopping district, one that allow people to walk along shaded pathwalks, enjoy communal areas while viewing at shop frontages.

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figures and Tables Page

Figure 1. Community Streetscape design

Source: NACTO, Global Street Design Guide

Figure 2. Landscape perspective of a shopping plaza

By: Efren A. Aurelio

Figure 3. Pre-Design Services

Figure 4. Design Development Phase

Figure 5. Conceptual Design Phase Flow Chart

Figure 6. Schematic Design Phase Flow Chart

Figure 7. Construction Documentation Process

Figure 8. Conceptual Design Phase Flow Chart

Figure 9. Maintenance Stage Process

Figure 10. Post Occupancy Stage Process

Figure 11. Design Stages Diagram

Figure 12. Sample Design Brief Template

Figure 13. Sample of a Bubble Diagram

Figure 14. Landscape reports provide graphical representation of design intents

Figure 15. Technical drawing samples

Figure 16. Landscape Cost Estimate Sheet Sample

Figure 17. Topographic Survey with Existing Trees

Source: UP College of Engineering / UP OCA

Figure 18. Sample Landscape Master Plan

Figure 19. Sample BBQ Sheets

Figure 20. Sample Bid Application

Table 1. Landscape Architecture Project Stages in the Context of Project Phases

Table 2. Public Bid Vs. Private Bid

Table 3. DBB Vs. DNB

119 119 120 121 121 123 124 134 135 136 136 137 138 139 139 140 140 141 142 143 120 128 130

REFERENCES

CDM 2015. (n.d.). Designers: roles and responsibilities. Construction - Designers: roles and responsibilities. Retrieved from https://www. hse.gov.uk/construction/cdm/2015/designers.htm.

Chapter 5: Project Delivery Methods. (2019). Retrieved from https://www.umsystem.edu/ums/rules/fpm/5_professional_services

Clancey, J. (n.d.). How to Use GMP Contracts. Oracle NetSuite. Retrieved from https://www.netsuite.com/portal/resource/articles accounting/guaranteed-maximum-price-contract.shtml.

Construction Specifications Institute. (2011). The CSI Construction Contract Administration Practice Guide. Canada: John Wiley and Sons Inc.

Construction Specifications Institute. (n.d.). About Us. Retrieved from https://www.csiresources.org/institute/csi-history.

Corporate Finance Institute. (2020, May 12). Manufacturer - Definition, History of Manufacturing, Types. Retrieved from https:// corporatefinanceinstitute.com/resources/knowledge/other/manufacturer/.

Crozier & Hadjiri. (2009). Post Occupancy Evaluation: Purpose, Benefits, and Barriers. Retrieved from: https://www.researchgate.net/ publication/235263738_Post-occupancy_evaluation_Purpose_benefits_and_barriers.

Department of Finance Bureau of Local Government Finance. (n.d.). Retrieved from blgf.gov.ph.

Department of Public Works and Highways. (n.d.). Bidding Awards and Procedures. Retrieved from https://www.dpwh.gov.ph/dpwh/ business/procurement/goods_services/baprocedures

Design Workshop Inc. (2016). Landscape Architecture Documentation Standards: Principles, Guidelines, and Best Practices. Canada: John Wiley and Sons Inc.

Dictionary of Construction Terminology. (n.d.) Dictionary of Construction Terminology – Bid. Retrieved from https://www.completedesign. cc/client-resources/dictionary-of-construction-terminology/822-bid.

Environmental Protection Agency. (n.d.). Definition of Green Building. Retrieved from https://archive.epa.gov/greenbuilding/web/html/ about.html.

Farley, L. (2018, October 8). Construction 101: The Basics of Change Orders. Retrieved from https://www.americanbar.org/groups/ construction_industry/publications/under_construction/2018/fall/construction-101/

Garmory, Tennant, and Winsch. (2007). Professional Practice for Landscape Architects. (2nd Ed.). Oxford: Elsevier Ltd.

Holmes, D. (2017, August 7). Practice: Stages of a Landscape Architecture Design Project. Retrieved from https:/ worldlandscapearchitect.com/practice-stages-of-a-landscape-architecture-design-project/#.YMtYj2gzZPY.

Hopper, L.J. (2007). Landscape Architectural Graphic Standards. Canada: John Wiley and Sons Inc.

Instron. (n.d.). What is Compression Testing? Retrieved from https://www.instron.com/en-us/our-company/library/test-types/ compression-test.

Kenton, W. and Kindness, D. (2021, March 20). Definition of Tender. Retrieved from https://www.investopedia.com/terms/t/tender.asp.

Marcus, C.C. (n.d.).Practice of Landscape Architecture. Retrieved from: https://catalogimages.wiley.com/images/db/pdf/0471477559. excerpt.pdf.

Maximum Yield. (2017, March 15). What is Soil Test? Retrieved from https://www.maximumyield.com/definition/652/soil-test.

Menge, P. (2021, February 3). General Contractor Definition: What they Do, and How they Get Paid. Levelset. Retrieved from https://www. levelset.com/blog/general-contractor-definition/.

Pearson. (n.d.) An Overview of the Building Delivery Process (How Buildings Come into Being). Retrieved from: https://www. pearsonhighered.com/assets/samplechapter/0/1/3/4/0134454170.pdf.

REFERENCES

Riddel, T. (2017, June 14). What are as-built drawings, and how to make them. Retrieved from https://esub.com/construction-projectmanagement-software-blog/built-drawings-make/

Rogers, W. (2011). The Professional Practice of Landscape Architecture: A Complete Guide to Starting and Running your own Firm. (2nd Ed). Canada: John Wiley and Sons Inc.

Sharky, B. (2016). Thinking About Landscape Architecture: Principles of a Design Profession for the 21st Century. New York: Routledge.

University of Waterloo IST Project Management Office. (2017, February 10). Project team. Retrieved from https://uwaterloo.ca/ist projectmanagement-of fice/methodologies/roles-and-responsibilities/project-team.

Vaeth, C. (2019, Nov.19). Delivery Methods Analysis and Comparison: A deeper look at 4 Major Construction Delivery Methods. Retrieved from https://mccowngordon.com/delivery- methods-analysis-and-comparison/.

Wiley. (n.d.) Practice of Landscape Architecture. Retrieved from: https://catalogimages.wiley.com/images/db/pdf/0471477559.excerpt. pdf.

173 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

174 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

4.0 MATERIALS

176 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

The building materials industry is dynamic, and new products are introduced to the market every year. Likewise, existing standards are regularly updated by their technical committees and are sometimes entirely superseded by new standards. The reader is advised to periodically check the latest version of the references enumerated in each section as they are updated.

CONTENTS

4.1. Introduction 163

4.2. Definition of Terms 163

4.3. Soils 164

4.3.1. Material Properties 164

4.3.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis

4x.3.3. Soil as a Foundation for Landscape Structures

4.4. Asphalt 166

4.4.1. Material Properties 166

4.4.2. Design and Environmental Considerations 169

A . Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis

B. Environmental Considerations

4.4.3. Forms and Finishes 170

4.4.4. Landscape Applications 173

4.4.5. Green Alternatives 173

4.5. Concrete 173

4.5.1. Material Properties 173

4.5.2. Design and Environmental Considerations 174

A . Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis

B. Environmental Considerations

4.5.3. Forms and Finishes 175

4.5.4. Landscape Applications 177

4.5.5. Green Alternatives 177

4.6. Masonry 173

4.6.1. Material Properties 173

A. Stone B. Brick C. Concrete Masonry D. Concrete Tiles and Concrete Paver Bricks

4.6.2. Design and Environmental Considerations 174

A . Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Clay Masonry)

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Concrete Masonry) C. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Mortar and Grout)

4.6.3. Forms and Finishes 175

A . Stone Finishes B. Facing Brick C. Concrete Masonry D. Concrete Tiles and Concrete Paver Bricks

4.6.4. Landscape Applications 177

4.6.5. Green Alternatives 177 A . Recycled Content B. Reclaimed Materials C. Permeable Paving

4.7. Metals 178

4.7.1. Material Properties 179

A . Ferrous Metals: Wrought Iron

B. Ferrous Metals: Cast Iron C. Ferrous Metals: Mild Steel

D. Ferrous Metals: Stainless Steel E. Aluminum and Alloys

4.7.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

A . Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Ferrous Metals)

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Aluminum and Alloys)

4.7.3. Forms and Finishes 180

4.7.4. Landscape Applications 181

4.8. Wood 181

4.8.1. Material Properties 181

4.8.2. Classifications of Philippine Timber 182

4.8.3. Limitations of Wood as a Construction Material 184

4.8.4. Wood Protection Methods 184

4.8.5. Design and Environmental Considerations 184

A . Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis

B. Environmental Considerations

4.8.6. Forms and Finishes 184

4.8.7. Landscape Applications 185

4.8.8. Green Alternatives 185

4.9. Paint and Coatings 186

4.9.1. Material Properties 188

4.9.2. Design and Environmental Considerations 189

A . Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Paint and Coatings)

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Tools)

4.9.3. Types of Coatings

4.9.4. Landscape Applications

4.10. Plastics and Rubber 190

4.10.1. Material Properties 190

A. Plastics

B. Rubber

45.10.2. Design and Environmental Considerations 191

A . Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Rubber)

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (PVC)

4.10.3. Forms and Finishes 191

4.10.4. Landscape Applications 192

4.11. Composites

4.11.1. Material Properties

4.11.2. Types of Composites Used in Construction

4.11.3. Design and Environmental Considerations

A . Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Wood Composites)

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (GFRC and Fiberglass)

4.11.4. Forms and Finishes

4.11.5. Landscape Applications

4.12. Other Materials 194

4.12.1. Material Properties 194

A . Materials for Recreational Surfaces

B. Decorative Gravel and Rubble C. Bamboo and Rattan

D. Coconut-based Products

E. Water 195

4.12.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

A . Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Soft Fall)

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Indigenous Materials)

4.12.3. Landscape Applications 195

4.1 Introduction and Purpose

PHILIPPINE

This chapter presents an overview of hardscape construction materials used in the Philippines and their Landscape Architectural applications.

It describes their properties, lists down design and environmental considerations, and outlines common forms and finishes available in the market. These considerations include local and international technical standards that govern their specifications and use. Local standards are given preference over equivalent international standards and are listed where available. Towards the end of each section, environmentally sustainable alternatives are presented where applicable.

It must be noted that the building materials industry is dynamic, and new products are introduced to the market every year. Likewise, existing standards are regularly updated by their technical committees and are sometimes entirely superseded by new standards. The reader is advised to periodically check the latest version of the references enumerated in each section as they are updated.

The purpose of this chapter is to provide an overview of hardscape materials available to the designer for use in the landscape, but is not meant to be comprehensive. This chapter aims only to present a broad outline of applicable products classified according to their specific physical characteristics and makeup.

4.2. Definition of Terms

4.2.4. CS - CUGE Standard

4.2.5. ISO - International Standards Organization, a worldwide federation of national standards bodies where global experts agree upon standards published by the ISO.

4.2.6. PAES - Philippine Agricultural and Engineering Standards

4.2.7. PNS - Philippine National Standard

4.2.1. ASTM - A non-profit technical society (formerly known as the American Society for Testing and Materials) that develops and publishes standards, definitions of materials, methods for testing materials, recommended installation practices, and specifications for materials

4.2.2. BAFS - Bureau of Fisheries and Agricultural Standards (Philippines)

4.2.3 CUGE - Singapore Centre for Urban Greenery and Ecology

4.2.8. Specification - A written document describing in detail the scope of work, materials to be used, method of installation, and quality of workmanship for a parcel of work to be placed under contract; usually utilized in conjunction with working (contract) drawings in building construction. Under the uniform system, the specifications currently comprise 50 divisions.

4.2.9. Standard - A document prepared by a recognized standardsetting organization that prescribes methods and materials for the safe

use and consistent performance of specific technologies; usually a procedure that has been developed by consensus of the interested parties.

As used by governmental agencies, a Standard is a document that sets certain legally permissible limits and contains mandatory requirements indicated by the word “shall.”

4.3 Soils

Soil as a material has different properties that are of importance in the work of Landscape Architects.

Landscape Architects must know its engineering characteristics – how it behaves as a foundation material, its structural characteristics, resistance to loading, resistance to lateral displacement, and permeability. Landscape Architects must also be knowledgeable in its plant-growing ability, including its soil mineral components, water holding capacity, drainage, and workability1

4.3.1. Material Properties

The following properties of soil are taken into consideration when dealing with it as a construction material: Cohesion Cohesion is the internal molecular attraction that resists the rupture or shear of a material. Generally, soil cohesion decreases as moisture content increases. Well-compacted clays are more cohesive than most other soils.

1 The use of soil as a planting medium is dis cussed in Chapter 6 Planting.

Angle of Internal Friction

An important engineering consideration when working with soil is its angle of internal friction. The angle of internal friction measures the ability of a rock or soil mass to withstand shear stress and depends on the resistance of grain particles to sliding.

B. C.

enough for percolation to occur are termed pervious or permeable, while those that do not permit water passage are termed as impervious or impermeable.

Elasticity

Capillarity

Capillarity is the ability of soil to transmit moisture in all directions regardless of gravity. Water rises through soil pores due to capillary attraction. The maximum theoretical height of capillary rise depends on the pressure that forces the water into the soil, and this force increases as the size of the soil particles decreases.

E. F. D.

Permeability

Permeability is a property of soil mass and not of individual soil particles. The permeability of soil is the rate at which water flows through it under a hydraulic gradient. The passage of moisture through the pores of the soil is called percolation. Soils porous

A soil is elastic when it reduces in volume or is deformed when a load is applied but recovers its initial volume immediately when the load is removed. Truly elastic soil will not permanently deform no matter how many times load is applied, as long as it does not exceed the soil’s yield stress. Peat is a typical soil type that possesses this characteristic.

Compressibility

The compressibility of soil is defined as the decrease in volume per unit increase of pressure.

Moist clays and soils with organic components are compressible, while gravels, sands, and silts are not. Compressibility of sand and silt vary with density, while that of clay directly depends on water content and inversely with cohesive strength.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

4.3.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis

4.3.3. Soil as a Foundation for Landscape Structures

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS MATERIALS

When soil properties are not ideal for building, there are various ways to change or improve the site, such as creating drainage systems or reshaping the land to direct water away from the site.

ASTM D 2488

Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual –Manual Procedure)

ASTM D5268

Standard Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping and Construction Purposes

ASTM E2788

Standard Specification for the use of Expanded Shale, Clay and Slate (ESCS) as a Mineral Component in the Growing Media and the Drainage Layer for Vegetative (Green) Roof Systems

a. b. c. d.

CS A03

Specifications for Soil Mixture for General Landscaping Use

Figure 1. Soil serves as the ultimate foudation of landscape structures

Soil is essential in site construction as it supports all structures built above it. Often, the safety and practicality of site construction depend on the characteristics of the underlying soil. Good soil for landscape infrastructure has the following properties:

• Balanced chemistry and neutral pH so that building materials are not corroded

• Stability through wetting and drying cycles so that expanding soil does not crack pavements or foundations

• Strength under pressure so that the weight of the structures built over it does not cause them to sink into the ground

• Ability to capture precipitation so that runoff and erosion do not damage structures

Figure 2. Soil serves as as growing medium for planting.

(EAPA, n.d.).

ASPHALT

4.4. Asphalt

4.4.1.

Material Properties

Asphalt, also known as bitumen, is a sticky, black, and highly viscous liquid or semi-solid form of petroleum used in construction. Most asphalt is used for road construction, where it is used as the binder mixed with aggregate to create asphalt concrete. Its other main uses are for bituminous waterproofing products, including roofing felt and flat roof sealants.

Asphalt concrete is a mixture of aggregates, binder, and filler and is used to construct and maintain roads, parking areas, railway tracks, ports, airport runways, bicycle lanes, sidewalks, and play and sports areas

4.4.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

A. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis

a.

DPWH DO 66 2005

DPWH Standard Specification for Rock Asphalt Hot Laid

ASTM D226/D226M-17

Standard Specification for AsphaltSaturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

e. f. b. c

ASTM C981-20

Standard Guide for Design of Built-Up Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing Systems for Building Decks

NAPA IS 131

Porous Asphalt Pavements for Stormwater Management: Design, Construction, and Maintenance Guide

B. Environmental Considerations

of Research and Standards (DPWHBRS) has conducted trials on the use of low-density polyethylene (LDPE) waste as an additive/modifier in hot mix asphalt (Grecia, 2020).

4.4.3.

Forms and Finishes

The most common form of asphalt is asphalt concrete, laid hot and rolled level. However, the material can also be used in other forms. When used for roof waterproofing, asphalt can be applied as a hot melt, as a membrane, or as cold-applied, liquidapplied membrane (LAM).

ASTM D5360

Standard Practice for Design and Construction of Bituminous Surface Treatments   ASTM D6622/D6622M-20

d.

Standard Guide for Application of Fully Adhered Hot-Applied Reinforced Waterproofing Systems

Asphalt surfaces can be used in a day or less after their construction.

Asphalt is the more economical choice for preventive maintenance, costing up to 20% less than concrete. As asphalt expands and contracts under the weather, it requires more frequent maintenance through patching and sealing (Librorania, 2020).

a. b. c.

Asphalt is highly recyclable (Librorania, 2020). The Department of Public Works and Highways Bureau

4.4.4. Landscape Applications

A.

Asphalt is one of the most versatile construction materials used for roads, railway beds, airport runways, taxiways, running tracks, tennis courts, barn floors, greenhouse floors, ports, bridges, tunnels, and landfill caps, among others (EAPA, n.d.).

C.

Asphalt can also be used for the waterproofing membranes of green roofs, reservoirs, pools, and roofing; for soundproofing; and coating pipes and cables.

Figure

B. A.

Asphalt can be used for bicycle, pedestrian, and golf cart paths, and as base paving for tennis courts. It is also used for playgrounds and recreational areas.

Figure 5. Bituminous (asphalt) waterproofing

4.4.5. Green Alternatives

Foamed Asphalt

Foamed asphalt is an alternative to conventional hot-mix asphalt concrete and uses a mixture of stone and soil aggregates, and foamed bitumen. The bitumen is foamed by an innovative process that harnesses the reaction when hot bitumen is contaminated with water.

Figure 4. Colored asphalt used for recreational area

Foamed asphalt has the following advantages over conventional asphalt concrete: Increased shear strength and reduced moisture susceptibility of granular materials Usability with a wider range of aggregate types

a. c. d.

b.

Reduced binder, storage, and transportation costs Increased time savings

Reduced energy costs during laying

e. f. g. h.

Reduced environmental emissions from curing No binder runoff and leaching into the soil Good workability in adverse weather

Figure 3. Asphalt running track

6. Foamed asphalt

permanent

cooling coatings.

Porous Asphalt

Porous asphalt is an open-graded asphalt with interconnected voids that allow stormwater to flow through. Porous asphalt pavement reduces stormwater runoff through infiltration, thereby replenishing aquifers and protecting waterbodies from polluted stormwater.

D.

Warm Mix Asphalt

Warm mix asphalt is the generic term for various technologies that allow the production of asphalt pavement material at lower temperatures. It can:

C.

Light-colored Asphalt

Light-colored asphalt is made up of light-colored mineral aggregates, white pigment, and a transparent binder. It has better visibility, requiring minimum lighting requirements at night and thereby reducing carbon dioxide emissions. Light-colored asphalt also reduces the urban heat island effect2 through its higher solar reflectance index 3 .Conventional asphalt concrete pavements can also be coated with solar reflective

2 Urban heat island effect occurs when cities re place natural land cover with dense concentrations of pave ment, buildings, and other surfaces that absorb and retain heat, causing increased cooling energy costs, air pollution levels, and heat-related illnesses (EPA, 2021).

3 The Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) is a measure of a surface’s ability to reject solar heat. It is defined so that a standard black is 0 and a standard white is 100 (Heat Island Group, 2021).

a. Reduce energy use at the production stage and therefore reduce costs

b. Improve asphalt compaction

c. Allow asphalt mix to be hauled longer distances

d. Improve working conditions by reducing exposure to fuel emissions, fumes, and odors

Figure 8. Light - colored asphalt

4.5 Concrete

4.5.1. Material Properties

Concrete is a mixture of aggregate, cement, and water. In some cases, chemicals called admixtures are also added to impart certain desirable qualities. In its freshly mixed state, concrete is a workable plastic mixture formed into almost any desired shape.

Figure 9. Warm mix asphalt

When mixed, concrete starts to stiffen slowly but remains as a workable plastic mixture for several hours. This is a long enough period to allow it to be placed and finished. After it is initially set, concrete continues to gain strength if moisture continues to be present.

Figure 7. Porous asphalt

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS MATERIALS

Concrete is a readily available and low-cost material that is strong, durable, and chemically stable.

4.5.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

A. Applicable Codes and Standards /

Design Basis

ASTM C979

Specification of Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

ASTM C94

Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C173

ASTM C928

PNS 7:2005

Portland Cement – Specification[ Supersedes ASTM C150 Portland Cement Caltrain Standard Specifications PNS 63:2006 Pozzolan Cement – Specification

b.

c.

ASTM C33

Concrete Aggregates

a. d.

ASTM C39

Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C109

Test Method for Compressive Strengths of Hydraulic Cement Mortars  ASTM C138

Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete  ASTM C143

Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete

ASTM C171

Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

f. g. h. i. j.

Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method  ASTM C231

Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method  ASTM C260

Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete  ASTM C494

Chemical Admixtures for Concrete  ASTM C618 Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

l. m. n. o. p.

ASTM C827

e. k. k. l. m. n. 0. p.

Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures

Packaged, Dry, Rigid-Hardening Cementitious Materials for Concrete Repairs  ASTM C1017

Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete.

ASTM C1059

Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete  ASTM D1751

Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)  ASTM C1194

Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Architectural Cast Stone ASTM C1195

Standard Test Method for Absorption of Architectural Cast Stone

ASTM C1364

Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone

5.5.3. Forms and Finishes

Concrete may be finished in several ways to attain specific desirable characteristics such as slip resistance, chemical resistance, pattern, or color.

commercial projects and resembles a large fan with the blades directly against the concrete.

b.Stamped Finish

c.Exposed Aggregate Finish

ASTM C1319

Standard Specification for Concrete Grid Paving Units

r. s.

ASTM C1731

Standard Specification for Concrete Floor Tile

B. Environmental Considerations

Due to its versatility, concrete is the most widely used building and construction material in the world, second only to water. Twice as much concrete is used than all other construction materials combined. As a result, it is estimated that 4% to 5% of the world’s carbon emissions are caused by cement production (Worell, et.al., 2001).

Concrete is highly recyclable. Depending on the size of the pieces, broken concrete can be reused as rock or aggregate for new concrete.

a.Troweled Finish

Insert photo of Troweled finish. No Caption.Trowel finish is the most common concrete finish used for major types of applications. After the concrete is laid in the formwork and leveled, the trowel is used to smooth and fine-level the surface of the concrete.

Stamped concrete is a decorative finish that has been available since the 1950s but only grew in popularity in the Philippines in the late 1990s. It is obtained by imprinting patterns on freshly leveled concrete, usually after adding color to the surface. This is a versatile finish as the concrete can mimic the color and appearance of other materials such as natural stone or wood.

Trowels are available in both manual and mechanical types. A manual trowel consists of a flat steel blade with an attached handle pushed and pulled across the concrete surface. A mechanized trowel is used for large

Natural patterns can also be imprinted on the surface of the concrete such as leaves, branches, stone slabs, lumber and others.

The oldest method of exposing aggregate on placed concrete is by water blasting. With this method, water is applied after a specified time has elapsed to remove mortar and expose the aggregate, thereby ensuring the concrete has already gained enough strength to hold coarse aggregate.

A more modern method is the application of surface retardants. With this technique, chemicals are applied to the concrete surface to delay the hardening of the top layer, after which they are removed through water blasting or brushing, exposing the uppermost aggregate layer.

d. Colored

e. Polished

Color can be applied to concrete using several methods. The most common one is by applying and working pigment to the surface of newly placed concrete, usually in conjunction with stamping. Color can also be added before concrete placement, resulting in high-quality, homogeneously colored concrete known as “integral color concrete.” Dyes can also be applied to the concrete surface during placement, after the initial set, or to existing concrete.

Insert photo of polished concrete, or

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS MATERIALS

• Brooming – This is a roughtextured finish obtained by dragging a broom on a freshly troweled concrete surface. This finish is popular for paths, driveways, and wet areas where traction and slip-resistance are important.

• Icing Finish – This is a deeply textured finish created by pulling the trowel perpendicular to the surface of wet plaster, similar to cake icing.

Concrete can be polished by grinding and polishing using chemicals and specialized tools and equipment. Polished concrete is a durable, highquality finish that can be used for a wide variety of applications.

Terrazzo is a polished concrete finish that uses decorative aggregates such as marble chips, quartz, granite, glass, or other suitable material in the mix to give off a speckled appearance.

f.Textured Finishes

There are endless ways to impart texture to a concrete surface using tools and craftsmanship, and expert concrete workers have developed styles that have become popular in the Philippines over the years. Some of these include the following:

• Salting – This is another roughtextured finish made by rolling over coarse salt over newly placed concrete and then hosing it down after it has set.

• “Anay” Finish – This is a textured finish created by troweling over ‘Icing’ finish, creating a pattern similar to termite tunnels.

• “Stucco” or “Tyrolean” Finish – This is a rough concrete finish created by spraying concrete over rough plaster.

• “Tsinelas” or Swirl Finish – This is a circular patterned finish created by running a rubber tool or tsinelas (rubber slipper) over a fresh concrete surface in circular motion.

• Pick-axe Finish – A textured pattern created by tooling the concrete surface using a pick axe to expose underlying decorative aggregate.

• Sandblasted Finish – This is a textured pattern created by sandblasting a concrete surface.

• “Scallop” Finish – This finish has a decorative fish-scale pattern created by applying plaster to a surface in a semi-circular motion.

• “Corduroy” Finish – This is a ribbed pattern finish popularized in the Philippines in the 1970s to 1980s.

• Bush-hammered Finish – This is a rough-textured pattern created by tooling the concrete surface using a bush hammer.

• Textured Formwork – This finish enables concrete to have a sculptural appearance similar to stamped concrete by using textured formwork to leave imprints on the surface.

192 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

4.5.4. Landscape Applications

Concrete is commonly used in the following landscape applications:

A. Cast-in-place concrete

Precast concrete is used for various landscape applications, including site furniture (posts, bollards, benches, and planters), decorative elements (moldings, statues, and sculptures), and structural elements such as bridges and railings.

C. Sprayed concrete

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS MATERIALS

4.5.5. Green Alternatives

Recycling or reusing concrete is the process of breaking, removing, and crushing remaining concrete from a site to be created into a new material or reused in its existing form.

Old concrete can be recycled by combining it with virgin materials and turning it into aggregates for new installations. Reused concrete can be used as a subbase or backfill material for roads, parking lots, and driveways.

Cast-in-place concrete is poured and cured in forms on-site in its finished position.

Cast-in-place concrete is used for structural components, foundations, pavements, walls, steps, and other landscape applications that require material strength and durability.

B. Precast concrete

Precast concrete, also known as “prefabricated” concrete or architectural cast stone, is created by pouring and curing a cement mixture into a mold offsite then delivering the finished product to the site for final installation.

Sprayed concrete, also known as shot concrete, “shotcrete,” or “gunite,” is created by spraying concrete into place rather than pouring or placing it into formworks.

Applications for shot concrete include curved structures (shell roofs and domes and tunnel linings) and free-form structures. It can also be used for underground construction, retaining walls, and piled wall facings.

Figure 8. Sample concrete recycling process from mining machinery company

4.6. Masonry

4.6.1.

Material Properties

Masonry consists of building structures from single units that are laid and bound together with mortar. In the Philippines, the most common materials used in masonry are natural and manufactured stone, clay brick, and concrete blocks. Some of these examples are discussed in detail below.

A. Stone

Natural stone masonry is strong, durable, and aesthetically pleasing because of its natural look. It does not require frequent repair or maintenance because of the natural durability of the material. However, structures built with stone tend to be thick, thereby reducing the usable floor area, and extremely heavy. Stone masonry has low seismic resistance and must be installed carefully.

Figure 10. Stone masonry wall

B. Brick

C. Concrete Masonry

D. Concrete Tiles and Concrete Paver Bricks

4.6.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

A.Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Clay Masonry)

a. ASTM C62

Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)

b. ASTM C126

Bricks are easier to use for construction as compared to stone. Because the size, shape, and weight of the brick units are uniform, their installation does not require the same level of skill that is needed for stone installation. Brick walls can be designed thinner than stone walls and can be set in different types of mortar, depending on structural requirements. Brick, like stone, however, has low resistance to tension and torsion loads and is therefore susceptible to seismic damage.

Concrete masonry, more popularly known as concrete hollow blocks (CHB) in the Philippines, is the country’s most popular masonry construction material due to its availability and cost. It is resistant to weather, pests, mold, and fire, and is simple to produce and install.

However, CHB units need to be reinforced to meet code requirements and are not aesthetically pleasing. They are typically plastered over and painted, or covered with another material, thereby adding to construction costs.

Also known as precast pavers, concrete tiles and pavers are products that mimic clay or stone pavers. They are typically available in different colors, styles, and dimensions, making them suitable for various paving applications.

The main advantage of using precast pavers is the ease in installation, repair, and maintenance. They can also be manufactured with a high proportion of recycled material. Precast pavers do not require a concrete base, making them permeable to stormwater runoff.

Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units

c. ASTM C216

Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)

d. ASTM C652

Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)

e. ASTM C902

Furthermore, because CHB is made of concrete, it has a high thermal mass and tends to absorb, store and radiate unwanted heat inside the building.

Standard Specification for Pedestrian and Light Traffic Paving Brick

f. ASTM C1088

Standard Specification for Thin

Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale

g. ASTM C1272

Standard Specification for Heavy Vehicular Paving Brick

h. ASTM C1405

Standard Specification for Glazed Brick (Single Fired, Brick Units)

i. ASTM 1167-11

Standard Specification for Clay Roof Tiles

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Concrete Masonry)

a. PNS ASTM C90:2019 w/ Amd. 1:2019

Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units

b. PNS ASTM C129:2019 w/ Amd. 1:2019

Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units

c. PNS ASTM C140/C140M:2019

Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units

and Related Units

d. ASTM C55

Standard Specification for Concrete Brick

e. ASTM C744

Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units

f. ASTM C936

Standard Specification for Interlocking Pavers

g. ASTM C1634

Standard Specification for Concrete Facing Brick and Other Concrete Masonry Facing Units

h. ASTM C1791

Standard Guide for Reduction of Efflorescence Potential in New Unit Pavement Systems

i. ASTM C1492 – 03

Standard Specification for Concrete Roof Tile

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS MATERIALS

C. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Mortar and Grout)

a. ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

b. ASTM C 144 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

c. ASTM C579

Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes

d. ASTM C1107

Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrinkable)

e. ASTM C1496-18

Standard Guide for Assessment and Maintenance of Exterior Dimension Stone Masonry Walls and Facades

4.6.3. Forms and Finishes

A. Stone Finishes

Stone may be finished in several ways. Manufactured stone can also simulate the types of finishes listed below:

a. Natural Cleft – An uneven surface unique to slate and sandstone made by splitting the stone along its natural layers, or clefts, as they are quarried

f. ASTM C1586

Standard Guide for Quality Assurance of Mortars

b.SplitFace – A natural quarry texture achieved by splitting stone by hand or machine

c. Polished – A high-gloss surface on crystallized stones made by grinding, sanding, and buffing

f. Sandblasted – A rough look created by using high pressure sandblast

d. Honed – A smooth but not glossy finish made by grinding and sanding

g. Tooled – A number of textured finishes created by tooling the stone surface by hand or with a machine

e. Flamed – A deeply textured finish made by applying a high-temperature flame to the surface of the stone

B. Facing Brick

Facing brick is manufactured and sold for its aesthetically pleasing look. Common types of facing bricks are:

a.Extruded(Stiffmud,wirecut)brick

– A modern type of facing brick that is uniform in size and shape, comes

in various textures, and is sometimes glazed b.Stock brick (Soft mud) brick – Has different types of textures depending on whether it is manufactured by sand striking or water striking

c. Arch bricks – Used to form decorative arch units

Figure 11. Stiff mud bricks are extruded by machine though cast dies, resulting in uniform dimensions.

Figure 12. Sandblasted sandstone

C. Concrete Masonry

Concrete masonry is available in the Philippines in the following forms:

a. Concrete hollow block (CHB) –Available in 100mm, 125mm, and 150mm thicknesses, but standardized at 400mm length x 200mm width.

Figure 11. Soft mud bricks are maufactured using molds, resulting in a non-uniform, handmade appearance.

Figure 13. Concrete Hollow Block

196 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS MATERIALS

b.

Decorative

blocks – Available in various shapes and sizes; usually better cast than regular CHB units and ready to be received off the shelf

tiles that are used as wayfinding and navigation tools for the blind and sight-impaired, or as an anti-slip surface for pedestrians.

C. Landscape structures

E. Paving

D. Concrete Tiles and Concrete Paver Bricks

Concrete tiles and paver bricks are available in various colors, dimensions, finishes and profiles to suit specific applications. Some proprietary finishes involve specialized manufacturing and/or tooling processes (tumbling, shot blasting), or special aggregates such as glow-in-the dark glass pebbles.

4.6.4. Landscape Applications

A. Walls and retaining walls

Tactile pavers are specialized textured

B. Seat walls and plant boxes

D.Architectural facing and finishes

4.6.5. Green Alternatives

A. Recycled Content

Some materials used in masonry production can be recycled. Recycled materials, especially in concrete mixtures, reduce virgin materials usage and construction waste generation.

B. Reclaimed Materials

These are materials that have been previously used either in buildings, temporary works, or other uses and are reused as construction materials without reprocessing. Reclaimed materials may be adapted and cut to size, cleaned up, and refinished

but are fundamentally reused in their original form. Reclaimed stone and brick masonry are examples of materials that may be reused for new construction.

C. Permeable Paving

Permeable pavement is composed of porous pavers, concrete, or asphalt, with or without an underlying reservoir. Permeable pavement allows precipitation and surface runoff to infiltrate into the soil below. Permeable pavements help reestablish a more natural hydrologic balance and reduce runoff volume by trapping and slowly releasing precipitation into the ground instead of allowing it to flow into storm drains.

4.7. Metals

4.7.1. Material Properties

A. Ferrous Metals: Wrought Iron

B. Ferrous Metals: Cast Iron

Metals used in modern building construction can be broadly classified into the following categories:

• Ferrous metals (iron) and their alloys;

• Aluminum and its alloys;

• Copper and its alloys; and

METALS

• Other metals (such as lead, tin, zinc, magnesium, etc.) and their alloys. The majority of metals used in landscape construction consist of ferrous metals such as wrought and cast iron, steel, and stainless steel. Aluminum is also a commonly used metal because of its desirable qualities. However, the application of copper and its alloys is mainly limited to communication and power supply wires and cabling.

This chapter only discusses the first two categories: ferrous metals and alloys, and aluminum and alloys.

Figure 14. Wrought iron

Wrought iron is composed primarily of elemental iron with small amounts of added slag4.It is made by repeatedly heating the material and deforming it with tools.

Figure 15. Cast iron

Wrought iron is highly malleable. It can be heated, re-heated, and worked into various shapes, growing stronger the more it is worked and characterized by its fibrous appearance. Wrought iron contains less carbon than cast iron, making it softer and more pliable. It is also highly resistant to fatigue. If a large amount of pressure is applied, it will become highly deformed before failing.

4 Slag is the by-product of iron ore smelting, generally consisting of a mixture of silicon, sulfur, phosphorous, and aluminum oxides.

Cast iron can refer to a range of iron alloys but is most commonly known as gray iron. Despite being called an “iron,” it is an alloy composed of 2% to 4% carbon, plus small amounts of silicon and manganese. Other impurities, such as sulfur and phosphorus, are also common.

Cast iron is formed by smelting iron ore or by melting pig iron5and mixing it with scrap metals and other alloys. The liquid mixture is then poured into molds and allowed to cool and solidify.

The final result is strong but brittle. Due to its high carbon content, cast

5 Pig iron is an intermediate product of iron ore extraction.

198 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Insert photo of wrought iron fence.

iron solidifies as a heterogeneous alloy, containing multiple constituents or materials in different phases within its microstructure.

C. Ferrous Metals: Mild Steel

D. Ferrous Metals: Stainless Steel

E. Aluminum and Alloys

Insert

photo of Aluminum section.

4.7.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

A. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Ferrous Metals)

a. PNS 49:2020

Steel bars for concrete reinforcement – Specification

b. PNS 127:2004

Mild steel is a type of iron that contains a small percentage of carbon. It is the most common form of steel in the construction industry. Mild steel has approximately 0.05% to 0.30% carbon, making it more ductile, machinable, and weldable than high carbon and other steels.

Mild steel has relatively low tensile strength but is cheap and easy to form. The main disadvantage of mild steel is that the iron content is subject to oxidation if not properly coated because of the lack of alloying elements found in stainless steel.

This is a steel alloy with higher corrosion resistance as compared to carbon or alloy steel. Common alloying ingredients include chromium (usually at least 11%), nickel, or molybdenum. Alloy content is often around 15% to 30% by volume. Chromium is an agent added for corrosion resistance.

The most common grades of stainless steel available in the market today are the following:

Aluminum is a silver-colored, lowdensity metal that is light and very malleable. Like other nonferrous metals, it is highly resistant to corrosion.

Cold-reduced carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities: Specification

c. PNS 136:2000 Steel wire nails – Specification

• Grade 304 – The most commonly used type of stainless steel

• Grade 316L – Typically used in marine applications

Aluminum is much lighter than steel but with comparable strength. It can also be easily recycled. It is estimated that up to two-thirds of all aluminum produced since the beginning of the 20th century is still being used productively, with a significant amount being used in building applications (Aluminum Association, 2021).

d. PNS 67:2000

Galvanized steel sheets and coils –Specification

e. PNS 201:1990

Galvanized steel sheets & coils, pre-painted – Specification

f. PNS 1990:2004

Hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheets

g. PNS 1993:2004

Continuous hot-dip aluminum zinccoated steel sheets

Figure 16. Mild steel plate

Figure 17. Stainless steel (railing) Figure 18. Aluminum section

h. PNS 2003:2004

Continuous hot-dip zinc / 5% aluminum alloy coated steel sheets

i. ASTM A 29M

Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought

j. ASTM A992/A992M-20

Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes

k. ASTM A 513M

Standard Specification for Electric Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing

c. ASTM F1183-96(2017) Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Chain Link Fence Fabric

4.7.3.

Forms and Finishes

There are various metal finishes that are commonly used for exterior applications. Mild steel must be protected from corrosion with a rust-preventive surface coating. If exposed to air, both wrought and cast iron develop a patina6 that covers the surface and protects it from corrosion.

Stainless steel and aluminum can be finished in a variety of ways, including the following:

a. Mirror/ polished finish

d. Powder-coated

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Aluminum and Alloys)

a. ASTM B221M-13

Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)

b. ASTM B308/B308M-20

Standard Specification for AluminumAlloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles

Figure 19. Patina on ironwork

b. Brushed / hairline finish c. Matte

e. Hot dipped galvanized f. Anodized g. Painted

6 Patina is a green or brown film formed on the surface of metals due to oxidation and is valued for its aesthetic look.

4.7.4. Landscape Applications

A. Common Metal Products

a.

Structural steel and reinforcement, including welded wire mesh

Cable (braided wire)

Canopies and light structures such as pergolas and trellises

Nails, screws, and bolts

b. c.

Expanded metal and metal chain link

Safety railings, balustrades, gates, and fences

d. g. e. h. i. f.

Artwork, sculptures, and site furniture

Sunshades/ louvered panels

4.8. Wood

Decking, wall cladding, and landscape edging

Wood is the hard, fibrous structural tissue that is found in the stems and roots of trees. The term “timber” refers to wood after the tree has been felled. In the United States and Canada, “timber” refers to felled trees while “lumber” refers to sawn wood products. In the Philippines, the terms “timber” and “lumber” are often used interchangeably.

4.8.1. Material Properties

Wood is a versatile organic material and the only truly renewable construction material. It is also known to be durable and strong. With adequate fire-retardant treatment,

wood is a reliable and long-lasting construction material.

the stronger it is. ]

• Elasticity - Ability to go back to its original shape after removal of load; an essential consideration if the lumber will be used to make sporting goods

• Durability - Ability to resist fungal attacks, insect attacks, and atmospheric effects for an extended period

generally weak in strength

• Defect-free - Is free from sap, dead knots, shakes, and other similar defects

4.8.2. Classifications of Philippine Timber

Figure 20. Wood is a renewable building material that can contribute to construction sustainability

. Good lumber has the following qualities:

• Hardness - Ability to resist deterioration

• Strength - Ability to support heavy structural loads

• Toughness - Ability to resist shocks due to vibrations, breakage due to bending, and splitting[ The narrower the annual rings of the lumber are,

• Workability - Should be wellseasoned and easily workable using power or manual woodworking tools.

• Good lumber also has certain physical characteristics that must be considered:

• Shape – Can retain its shape during the seasoning process

• Weight – Heavier lumber tends to be stronger

• Fiber and Structure – Has straight and closed fibers and compact medullary rays, annual rings are uniform in shape and color, produces a clear ringing sound when struck 7Appearance and Color – Releases a sweet smell when freshly cut and has a gentle sheen; should have a dark color, as light-colored timber is

7 A heavy sound indicates internal decay

For commercial purposes, Philippine woods are classified into four groups, depending on their structural strength. The first group represents the strongest woods, while each succeeding group represents a decrease in structural strength. The Classification of Philippine Woods according to forest charges as stated in Revenue Regulation No. 3, s. 1972 is as follows:

A. First Group Afu Almaciga Almon Amugis Apitong Akle Ananga Bagtikan Bakan Balu Banaba Bansalangin

Batikulin Batitinan Betis Betenghol Bitaog Bulong Eta Gana-fistola Dagang Dangula (Sasalit) Dao Dungon Dungon Late Duyok-duyok Ebony Gisok Gisok-gisok Guijo Igem Ipil Kaburo Kalantas Kalamansi Kaliot Kamagong Kamuning Kulilisan Liusin Lumbayao Lijinai Lumbayao Bato Magasusu Malaanonang Makaasim

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Malabunga Malaguijo Malakadios Malakawayan Maluwai Manggachapui Nato Palosapis Manggasinoro Maranggo Margapali Matang Araw Mayapis Mahogany Molave Narak Narig Narra Pagatpat Pahutan Piagau Pine (Benguet) Red Lauan White Lauan Saplungan Sudiang Supa Tabau Tabigi Tindalo Teak Urung Yakal

B.Second Group Agoho Agoho Del Monte Alupag Alupag Amo Anubing Bagras Amamanit Balete Batino Bayok Binggas Bitanghol Dita Kamatog Katmon Katmon Kalabaw Kayu-galu Kubi Hagakhak Lanio Lanutan Malabatino Malabayabas Malakatmon Manggis Mangkas Mapilig Palomaria Del Monte Marag Pamitaogen Panau

Pili Philippine Chestnut Raintree (Acacia) Sangilo Taba Tamayuan Tangile Tanglin Tiga Tukang Kalaw Lanipau Loktob Toog C.Third Group Amayan Anislag Antipolo Api-api Bakawan Balakat Balikbikan Balobo Bangkal Batukanag Biyanti Binurang Bogo Bolon Bulala B ulog Basaing Baras

Bugas Kautuan Bangkal Kalingag Kalumpit Kansulud Kato Kayataw Luling Manok Dalinsi Gisihan Gubas Lago Lamog L anipau Langarsi Malakamias Mambingan Malapapaya Malasaging Malakoan Sau Malaanonang Malasantol Malatumbaga Matamata Miao Nangka Pototan Sakat Salakin Salingkugi Sandit Santol

Tanghas Talisay Talisay Gubat Taluto Tinsang Pintasi Tusi Unik D. Fourth Group

All species that do not belong to the first, second, or third groups are automatically classified under the fourth group.

4.8.3. Limitations of Wood as a Construction Material

Wood should be used in applications that take advantage of its benefits and where its limitations are not of significant concern. Though it has limitations as a building material, these can be easily fixed with the proper measures. Some of its limitations are listed below:

A.

Shrinkage and Swelling

Wood is hygroscopic, which means it absorbs moisture from the air. This causes wood to shrink and swell.

Deterioration

Since wood is an organic material, it is a source of food for some organisms. Biological deterioration can occur from fungal, termite, or other insect attacks. It can also deteriorate due to sun, wind, water, chemical, and fire exposure. The thicker the wood, the better it can resist deterioration.

loss of moisture, reduce shrinkage and swelling, and provide protection from ultraviolet rays. Fungicides can also be added to coatings.

c. PNS 2112:2016

Timber products – Veneer logs, sawlogs, and lumber from plantation species – Grading system

d. PNS ISO 22390

Preservatives

These are applied if the wood will constantly be subject to liquid, insect, and weather exposure.

Timber structures – Laminated veneer lumber –Structural properties.

B. Environmental Considerations

4.8.4. Wood Protection Methods

A. A.

D.

Selecting the correct type of wood to use in a project is the best way to ensure its best performance. In addition, the limitations of wood can be kept to a minimum by following these protection methods:

Drying

C. B.

Proper air or kiln-drying can prevent the degradation of wood. The kilndrying method is more effective because it kills fungi and insects while removing moisture more effectively. Coating

Coating with paints, varnishes, and other compounds protects both indoor and outdoor wood applications. Coatings prevent the rapid uptake and

Flame Retardants

Wood can also be treated for fire protection. The two types of retardants used for wood are coatings and water-soluble chemical salts. These retardants increase the material’s burning point, reduce the formation of flammable gases, and mitigate the spreading and penetration of flames.

4.8.5.

Design and Environmental Considerations

A. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis

a. PNS 194:1989

Sawn Timber (lumber) – Specification

b.PNS 196:2000

Plywood – Specification

Although wood is technically a renewable resource, the global demand for this material has caused unmanaged resource extraction that has led to deforestation problems.

Certified wood is a good alternative to conventionally sourced wood as it is sustainably sourced from managed forests8.Whenever applicable, wood is still the more sustainable material to use over concrete or steel due to the significant environmental impact they create during their production processes.

4.8.6. Forms and Finishes

Common timber used for exterior Landscape Architectural applications include the following9:

8 Certified wood is further discussed in section 5.8.8. Green Alternatives of this Chapter.

9 Composite wood products such as plywood and wood-plastic composites are discussed in Section 5.11 Com posites of this Chapter.

A.Certified Wood

Using certified wood ensures that only products sourced from responsibly managed forests are used in

The two major certifications worldwide are FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) and PEFC (Program for Endorsement for Forest Certification). In the Philippines, the Philippine Forest Certification System (PFCS) is currently developing Sustainable Forest Management and Chain Custody Standards to be followed by the wood industry (PCEPSDI, n.d.).

Certification is achieved by assessing forests and manufacturing companies that voluntarily undergo certifying assessment, guaranteeing legally and sustainably sourced raw materials. The process is carried out by a certifying body that audits wood production in its various stages, from the forest to the end product.

Forest Management certification is an audit conducted in the forest to be certified, after which its manager or owner is awarded the certification once all the requirements are met.

Recycled, repurposed, or upcycled wood reduces the demand for new timber, helping curb deforestation and reducing the burden on landfills. Most of these types of timber products are more durable than new timber products due to their prolonged seasoning and reduced moisture content.

C.Wood-Plastic Composites

Insert photo of Wood-plastic composites. Caption: Wood-plastic composites.

Chain of Custody certification is an audit conducted where the wood is transformed into a product. Timber sources for the product should come from forests certified by FSC or PEFC.

B. Recycled, Repurposed, and Upcycled Wood

Wood-plastic composites made from recycled plastics and vegetable fibers such as rice hulls, flax, hemp, or sawdust and other forestry product residue are viable alternatives to new timber. These products are low maintenance, pre-finished, and do not require oiling, painting, or staining.

Wood-plastic composites do not rot, crack, or warp, and are insect and salt resistant, and splinter-free.

4.9. Paints and Coatings

4.9.1.

Material Properties

Surface coatings are applied primarily to protect the surface of an object from damage. They are made of film-forming materials, pigments, solvents, and other additives, which yield a thin protective film once dried or cured on a surface. These products can also aesthetically enhance the surface of an object by accentuating desirable features or concealing unwanted properties. Surface coatings include paints, drying oils and varnishes, and clear synthetic coatings.

4.9.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

A. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Paints and Coatings)

a. ASTM D16-19

Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications

b. ASTM D823-18

Standard Practices for Producing Films of Uniform Thickness of Paint, Coatings and Related Products on Test Panels

c. ASTM D1876-08(2015)e1

Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test)

d. ASTM D2832-92(2016)

Standard Guide for Determining Volatile and Nonvolatile Content of Paint and Related Coatings

e. ASTM D7073-20

Standard Guide for Application and Evaluation of Brush and Roller Applied Paint Films

f. ASTM D5957-98(2013)

Standard Guide for Flood

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS MATERIALS

Testing Horizontal Waterproofing Installations

g. ASTM D5385/D5385M-20

Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes

h. ASTM D5683/D5683M-95(2017)

Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Roofing and Waterproofing Materials and Membranes

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Tools)

a. ASTM D7802-12(2016)

Standard Terminology for Paint Roller Application Tools

other structures. In addition to regular paint, architectural coatings also include wood coatings applied on-site, varnishes, polyurethane lacquers, and other specialized paints. Most of these coatings are waterbased products with very low or no VOC[ VOC refers to volatile organic compounds found in many humanmade chemicals that are used and produced in the manufacture of paints, pharmaceuticals, and refrigerants. They are emitted as gases from certain solids or liquids and may have short- and long-term adverse health effects (EPA, 2020).] emissions.

b. Adhesives

Adhesives are substances that stick to the surface of an object. If one or both surfaces of two separate objects are applied with adhesive, they are bonded together and resist separation.

d. Powder Coatings

Powder coatings are available in different compositions to provide protective and decorative finishes for various uses, especially metal, medium-density fiberboard (MDF), glass, and plastic. They do not contain solvents and emit no VOCs. Powder coatings also produce thicker layers without the risk of sagging and provide excellent paint finishes.

b. ASTM D7801-17

Standard Terminology for Paint Brush Application Tools

4.9.3.

Types of Coatings

Some of the coatings used in landscape construction are as follows:

a.Architectural Coatings (Paint)

Decorative paint is applied to exposed surfaces of houses and

Figure 21. Paint is available in an infinite number of colors and formulations.

Figure 20. Epoxy adhesives

c. Sealants

Sealants are used to block fluids through a material’s surface, joints, or openings. Sometimes called adhesive sealants or structural sealants, most of these products are waterproof and provide thermal and acoustic insulation.

Figure 23. Powder Coating

e. Protective Coatings

Protective coatings are used primarily for corrosion control of steel structures like bridges, platforms, viewing decks, and other structures subject to rusting.

Insert photo of Rust-inhibiting coating material. Caption: Rust-inhibiting metal primer.

Figure 22. Liquid applied waterproofing memberane

4.9.4. Landscape Applications

A. Surface paints

C. Roof deck and green roof waterproofing (built-up roofing, liquid-applied roofing, protected membrane roofing, spray-applied polyurethane foam roofing, etc.)

4.10. Plastics and Rubber

4.10.1.

Material Properties

A. Plastics

Plastic may be a natural or synthetic organic material prepared from resin, a substance capable of deformation when heat and pressure are applied. It has numerous uses and can be molded into customized shapes and sizes. It is tough, lightweight, and has good tensile strength.

Plastic has good resistance to chemicals and is dimensionally stable. Some plastics such as phenol-formaldehyde and ureaformaldehyde are fire-resistant and used in fire-fighting materials.

Plastic can be easily fixed, glued, drilled, bolted, and screwed into various positions. It does not need maintenance, nor does it need to be painted.

B. Cementitious, elastomeric, and other types of waterproofing

D.Special coatings

Figure 24. Plastic raw mateirial

B. Rubber Rubber is a strong, waterproof, elastic substance made naturally from the sap of a tree (also known as latex) or manufactured chemically. Natural rubber has high strength and good resistance to tearing and flexure. It is, however, easily affected by solvents.

Figure 25. Rubber raw mateirial

208 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Synthetic rubber is available as general-purpose synthetic rubber (usually Styrene-butadiene rubber or SBR) and special-purpose synthetic rubber (Neoprene).

B. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (PVC)

a. ASTM D1785-21

Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS MATERIALS

4.10.3. Forms and Finishes

A. Rubber Flooring and Soft Fall

Polymer latex is added to cement mortar to form a polymer-modified system, thereby improving adhesion, tensile strength, compressive and flexural strength, water resistance, and chemical resistance.

4.10.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

A.Applicable Codesand Standards / Design Basis (Rubber)

a. ASTM D4637/D4637M-15

Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane

b. ASTM D6134/D6134M-07(2019)e1

Standard Specification for Vulcanized Rubber Sheets Used in Waterproofing Systems

c. ASTM F1292-18e1

Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surfacing Materials Within the Use Zone of Playground Equipment

b.ASTM F1732-12(2018)

Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer and Drain Pipe Containing Recycled PVC Material

c. ASTM D2729-17

Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

d. ASTM D4216-17

Standard Specification for Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and related PVC and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Building Products Compounds

e.ASTM D4434/D4434M-21

Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sheet Roofing

Rubber flooring is made from both virgin and recycled materials (e.g. old rubber tires). It is categorized as a type of resilient flooring since it exhibits elasticity characteristics or “bounce”, making it suitable for play areas, athletic surfaces, and other high traffic areas where soft fall is required.

C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

B. Polymer Concrete

PVC is extensively used in construction products because of its strength, durability, and lightness. Furthermore, it is also known for its flexibility, flameretardant, and electrical insulation properties.

Examples of PVC construction products include window and door profiles, pipes and fittings, wires and cables, cladding, roofing membranes, and flooring systems.

4.10.4. Landscape Applications

4.11. Composites

4.11.1. Material Properties

Composites are materials consisting of two or more chemically distinct constituents separated by an interface. It has specific properties which cannot be obtained by any constituent working individually.

There are two categories of constituent materials: matrix and reinforcement. The reinforcement imparts special mechanical and physical properties to enhance the matrix properties. Due to the wide variety of matrix and reinforcement materials available, the design potentials are almost unlimited.

4.11.2. Types of Composites Used in Construction (based on Constituent Forms)

A.ParticulateReinforcedComposites

Particulate reinforced composites are composed of hard particle constituents which are arbitrarily scattered in a softer matrix. An example of this is metallic particles dispersed in metallic, polymeric, or ceramic matrices. A widely used particulate composite is concrete with gravel embedded in the cement paste.

B.Flake Composites

This type of composite is produced by blending matrix material and thin flakes. Even though flakes dispersion in the matrix is random, the flakes can align with one another to form a more orderly structure than

particulate composites.

C.Fiber Reinforced Composites (Fibrous Composites)

This composite is composed of strong and stiff fibers held together by a matrix. Fibers act as the primary load-carrying constituent due to their strong characteristics. The matrix serves as an agent to redistribute the load from a broken fiber to adjacent fibers should it fail under excessive load.

4.11.3. Design and Environmental Considerations

A. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Wood Composites)

a. PNS ISO 1096 Plywood

– Classification

b. PNS PAES 320

Engineering Materials – Wood-based Panels – Specifications

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS MATERIALS

Wood-plastic composite (WPC) is a water-resistant panel or lumber product made from recycled plastic and small wood particles or fibers. Wood composite plastics are lowmaintenance and cost less than solid wood.

C.EngineeredWood:MediumDensity Fiberboard

B. Engineered Wood: Particle Board

Reinforcement composites usually come in the form of glass fibers, carbon fibers, and aramid fibers. Fibers are generally high-strength, low-density materials that are easy to handle and are resistant to heat and corrosion.

D.Laminated Composites

Laminated composites are made from completely bonded thin elementary layers. These layers can be composites in themselves, such as fibrous composite layers. This type of composite is the most common laminated composite material used in high-performance structures.

B.ApplicableCodesandStandards/ Design Basis (GFRC and Fiberglass)

a. ASTM C 1666M

Standard Specification for Alkali Resistant (AR) Glass Fiber for GFRC and Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Cement

4.11.4. Forms and Finishes

A. Wood-plastic Composite

Particleboard is a waste-wood product made by heat pressing wood chips, sawmill shavings or sawdust, and resin together. To make the finished product water-resistant, fireproof, and insect-proof, chemicals including wax, dyes, wetting agents, and release agents are applied.

Medium-density fiberboard (MDF) is another engineered wood composite made of wood fibers. Because the MDF comprises small wood fibers, there is no visible wood grain, rings, or knots. The fibers, glue, and heat used to make this composite create a tight bonding board.

Generally denser than plywood, the composition of MDF creates a strong building material.

D. Engineered Wood: Plywood

Plywood is made of wood veneer sheets pressed and bonded together to create one solid piece. This manufacturing process is called cross-graining and reduces shrinkage and expansion while improving panel strength consistency. Different grades of plywood are used for various purposes. Plywood grades are affected by many variables, including the type of wood ply, thickness, adhesive, and manufacturing/ compaction process.

E. Engineered Wood: Mass Timber

significantly lighter in weight.

Mass timber products come in various sizes and functions, such as gluelaminated (glulam) beams, laminated veneer lumber (LVL), nail-laminated timber (NLT), and dowel-laminated timber (DLT). The most common form of mass timber is cross-laminated timber (CLT).

F. Glass-fiber Reinforced Concrete

transfers load among the fibers. Both fibers and matrices can retain their physical and chemical identities while combining their properties to create a high-performance composite.

GFRC panels are often used as a lightweight cladding system and can be made to look almost identical to natural stone.

G.Glass-Reinforced Plastic (Fiberglass)

polyester resin. The glass fibers can be used as random, shortchopped strands formed into a mat or gathered together into “rovings” (bundled rope) or woven into a fabric. The composite properties of highstrength glass fiber and highly resilient plastic make GRP a strong, lightweight, weather-resistant, and corrosion-resistant material. It can also be manufactured to be fire retardant. As a result, it is suitable for an extensive range of applications.

4.11.5. Landscape Applications

Modern composites have a wide range of applications in landscape construction, including the following:

A. Architectural moldings

Mass timber, short for “massive timber,” or structural timber, involves the process of binding pieces of wood together through lamination, fasteners, or adhesives to form larger, structural load-bearing elements. It is engineered for high strength ratings like concrete and steel but is

Glass-fiber reinforced concrete (GFRC) is commonly used to create exterior cladding panels. It is known for its ability to be formed into all sizes, shapes, or profiles. GFRC is composed of highstrength, alkali-resistant glass fibers embedded in a concrete matrix. The fibers act as the principal load-carrying component, while the surrounding matrix keeps them in position and

Glass reinforced plastic (GRP) is sometimes referred to as glassreinforced polyester, fiberglass, glass-fiber reinforced plastic (GFRP), fiber-reinforced plastic (FRP), or fiber-reinforced polymer (FRP).

It is a composite, laminate material first developed in the 1930s and consists of glass fibers used to reinforce a plastic, typically a

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

4.12. Other Materials

Other hardscape materials not included in the preceding sections are discussed in this section. These include:

• Materials for recreational surfaces

• Decorative gravel and rubble

• Bamboo and rattan

• Coconut-based products

• Water

5.12.1. Material Properties

A. Materials for Recreational Surfaces

Playground surfacing materials can be grouped into two major categories: loose-fill and unitary.

• Loose-fill material is typically installed by hand to create a level area over the entire playground. Examples of loose-fill materials include rubber mulch, engineered wood fiber (EWF), playground sand, pea gravel, and other bulk materials.

• Unitary materials are usually used for playgrounds or outdoor

fitness areas and refer to energyabsorbing materials held in place by a binder poured and cured on-site to form a unitary, shock-absorbing surface. These surfaces include poured-in-place rubber, bond-in-place rubber, interlocking resilient tiles, and synthetic turf or grass with protective under-padding. These materials are available in various colors and shapes to make playgrounds more attractive to children.

B. Decorative Gravel and Rubble

Decorative gravel and rubble consist of any natural rocks, gravel, or crushed stone used primarily for their color, texture, and general appearance. These materials are usually byproducts of quarrying and dimension stone production and are generally regarded as waste. There is a wide range of decorative gravel and rubble available in the Philippines, including river gravel, scoria, and cinder.

used for exteriors such as patios and decks.

This material is a cheap, alternative timber harvested from plantation trees considered to have reached the end of their economic life and felled to make way for future crops. It is used as a viable substitute for hardwood after processing and adequate treatment.

•

Coco Peat

C. Bamboo and Rattan

Bamboo and rattan are materials indigenous to the Philippines. Both are used to produce cane and wicker furniture and screens, commonly

Both plant species have a fast growth rate and are renewable resources.

Bamboo may be sold as whole, split, or slatted, while rattan is generally sold as poles.

D. Coconut-based Products

• Coco Lumber

This is a multi-purpose growing medium made from the fibers of coconut husks which are washed, machine dried, sieved, and freed from sand and other contaminants such as animal and plant residue. It is an excellent alternative to traditional peat moss and rock wool.

Coco peat is an ideal growing medium for plant crops due to its porosity and water retention capacity.

• Coco Coir

adversely affect its application in a construction process. For example, impure water may affect the properties of concrete if it is used for mixing and curing.

4.1.2. Design and Environmental Considerations

Coco coir is drawn from coconut husks and spun into biodegradable ropes, twine, and yarns. It is naturally resistant to rot, mold, and moisture and thus needs no chemical treatment.

A. Applicable Codes and Standards / Design Basis (Soft Fall)

a.ASTM F1292-18e1

Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surfacing Materials Within the Use Zone of Playground Equipment

d. PNS ISO 22157

Bamboo structures – Determination of physical and mechanical properties of bamboo culms – Test methods

e. PNS ISO 21625:2021

– Vocabulary related to bamboo and bamboo products (ISO published 2020) ICS 79.040; 01.040.79

f. PNS ISO 21626-1:2021

– Bamboo charcoal — Part 1: Generalities (ISO published 2020) ICS 27.190; 75.160.40

g. PNS ISO 21626-2:2021

It is strong and durable enough for many civil engineering applications.

E. Water

As a general standard, the quality of water for construction works should be the same as drinking water. Water used for construction must always be clean and free from sewage, oils, and other organic substances. This ensures that the water is reasonably free from impurities such as suspended solids, organic matter, and dissolved salts, all of which may

B.ApplicableCodesandStandards/ Design Basis (Indigenous Materials)

a. PNS/BAFS 21:2018

Coconut fiber (coir) – Grading and Classification

b. PNS/BAFS 74:2018

Coconut peat – Grading and Classification

c. PNS CTP 08 Specification for Sawn Coco lumber

– Bamboo charcoal — Part 2: Fuel applications (ISO published 2020) ICS 27.190; 75.160.40

h. PNS ISO 21626-3:2021

– Bamboo charcoal — Part 3: Purification applications (ISO published 2020) ICS 13.040.20; 75.160.40

i. PNS ISO 23066:2021

– Vocabulary related to rattan materials and products (ISO published 2021) ICS 79.040; 01.040.79

5.12.3. Landscape Applications

A. Materials for Recreational Surfaces

a.Softfallforplaygroundsandother recreational areas B. Decorative Gravels

a. Decorative mulching

b. Loose pavement material

218 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

C H A P T E R 4.0

MATERIALS

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS AND REFERENCES

Choosing the right elements and finishes to fulfill a landscape design intent dramatically impacts the character of a space. In turn, every user’s memory of the space is highly influenced by the tactile and visual experiences in the landscape.

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figures and Tables Page

Figure 1. Soil serves as the ultimate foudation of landscape structures

Retrieved from: https://citylocal101.com/cl02041-deck-footings-lenexa-ks#Intro

Figure 2. Soil serves as as growing medium for planting.

Retrieved from: https://www.nytimes.com/2020/05/08/smarter-living/how-to-start-yourown-garden.html

Figure 3. Asphalt running track

Figure 4. Colored asphalt used for recreational area Retrieved from: https://hubss.com/projects/heat-island-pavement-solutions/

Figure 5. Bituminous (asphalt) waterproofing Retrieved from: https://lt.earthgeology.com/category/bituminous

Figure 6. Foamed asphalt

Figure 7. Porous asphalt Retrieved from: https://pavementinteractive.org/porous-on-purpose-permeable-pavements/

Figure 8. Light - colored asphalt Retrieved from: https://www.coolseal.com/

Figure 9. Warm mix asphalt Retrieved from: https://www.thebalancesmb.com/warm-mix-asphalt-cost-and-benefits-844772

Figure 10. Stone masonry wall

Retrieved from: https://masonryhardscapeinc.com/about/

Figure 11. Stiff mud bricks are extruded by machine though cast dies, resulting in uniform dimensions. Retrieved from: https://www.philippmolter.com/climate-active-bricks

Figure 12. Sandblasted sandstone

Retrieved from: https://www.stoneply.com/en/info/textures-and-finishes/

119 119 120 121 121 123 124 134 135 136 136 137 138 139 139 140 140 141 142 143 120 128 130

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figures and Tables Page

Figure 13. Concrete Hollow Block

Retrieved from: https://www.newthorpeservices73.top/ProductDetail.aspx?iid=152067196&pr=40.88

Figure 14. Wrought iron Retrieved from: https://www.oldhouseonline.com/gardens-and-exteriors/good-fences-by-design/

Figure 15. Cast iron

Figure 16. Mild steel plate

Figure 17. Stainless steel (railing)

Retrieved from: https://www.sadecor.co.za/interior-design-blog/hardware-decorative/balustrades-rail ings-staircases/why-a-stainless-steel-balustrade-is-the-smart-choice-for-your-new-home/

Figure 18. Aluminum section

Figure 19. Patina on ironwork

Figure 20 Wood is a renewable building material that can contribute to construction sustainability

Figure 21. Paint is available in an infinite number of colors and formulations.

Figure 22. Liquid applied waterproofing memberane

Retrieved: https://thewowdecor.com/the-most-popular-waterproofing-methods-in-the-market/

Figure 23. Powder Coating

Figure 24. Plastic raw material

Figure 25. Rubber raw material

119 119 120 121 121 123 124 134 135 136 136 137 138 139 139 140 140 141 142 143 120 128 130

REFERENCES

Aluminum Association. (n.d.) Global metal flow. Retrieved from https://recycling.world-aluminium.org/review/global-metalflow.html.

American Geological Institute. (1997) Dictionary of Mining, Minerals and Related Terms. Alexandria, VA. American Geological Institute.

Canadian Paints and Coatings Association. (2020). TypesofPaintsandCoatings.Retrieved from: https://canpaint.com/industry/ types-of-paint-and-coatings.

Christensen, A. (2005). Dictionary of Landscape Architecture and Construction (1st ed.). McGraw-Hill Education.

Comparing Building Materials: Particle Board, MDF & Plywood. (2019, July 25). Retrieved from htttps://www.displays2go.com/ Guide/Comparing-Building-Materials-Particle-Board-MDF-Plywood-17.

Davis, A.P. (2005). Green engineering principles promote low-impact development: Environmental Science and Technology, A-pages, v. 39, no. 16.

Different types of composites and their uses. (2021) Retrieved from htttps://theconstructor.org/composite/compositesconstruction-uses/1570/

Dolom, P.C., Bugayong, L.A., Casin, M.C.S., Tolentino, N.L., Palacpac, A.B., Villanueva, M.M.B., Corpuz, E.B., Camacho, S.C., Pulhin, F.B., Donoso, L.A., Aguilon, B.C., Capinpin, H.L.L., Nicmic, J.C., Punzalan, B.A., & Cabrera, R.V.C. (2016 October). Forest certification a tool for ensuring sustainable management of forests in the Philippines: Prospects and Challenges. Ecosystems & Development Journal.

European Asphalt and Pavement Association. (n.d.). Warm mix asphalt. Retrieved from httpss:///eapa.org/warm-mix-asphalt.

Eslit, N. (2016, August 25). Coconut wood a viable substitute for hardwood. Retrieved from: httpss://wsimag.com/economyand-politics/20935-coconut-wood

REFERENCES

Gagg, C. R. (2014). Cement and concrete as an engineering material: A historic appraisal and case study analysis, Engineering Failure Analysis, Volume 40 (pdf)

Grecia, L. (2020, February 3). A portion of Taft Avenue has been paved using asphalt mixed with plastic. Https://Www.Topgear. Com.Ph. Retrieved from httpss://www.topgear.com.ph/news/motoring-news/dpwh-plastic-built-road-a4354-20200203

Greenspec. (2021) The environmental impacts of concrete. Retrieved from: https://www.greenspec.co.uk/building-design/ environmental-impacts-of-concrete/

Harris, C. W. & Dines, N.T. (2017). Time-Saver Standards for Landscape Architecture (2nd ed.). McGraw Hill Publishing Company

Heat Island Group. (2020). Definitions and Terms – Solar Reflectance Index. Retrieved from https://heatisland.lbl.gov/resources/ definitions-and-terms

Hiziroglu, Salim. (2016, July). Whatiswoodplasticcomposite? Retrieved from htttps://extension.okstate.edu/fact-sheets/whatis-wood-plastic-composite.html

Holz, Wesley G. (1974). Report no 17. Soil as an Engineering Material – A Water Resources Technical Publication. Bureau of Reclamation, United States Department of the Interior

Houle, K., Roseen, R., Ballestero, T., Briggs, J., & Houle, J. (2009) ExaminationsofPerviousConcreteandPorousAsphaltPavements

Performance for Stormwater Management in Northern Climates: World Environmental and Water Resources Congress 2009.

Librorania, L. (2020, March 25). Asphalt vs. Concrete: Which surface is superior for PH roads? Rockbird Media. Retrieved from https:/rockbirdmedia.com/asphalt-vs-concrete-which-surface-is-superior-for-ph-roads/

REFERENCES

Lockhart, V. (2020, February 24). MetalsinLandscapeProjects.AstroMetalCraft. Retrieved from https://astrometalcraft.com/ metals-landscape-projects.

Mishra, Gopal (2021). Quality of water for construction and its specification. Retrieved from: htttps://theconstructor.org/ practical-guide/construction-water-qualityspecification/6012/

Muthen, K. M. (1998, December). Foamed Asphalt Mixes. Mix Design Procedure. SABITA Ltd. and CSIR Transportek. Retrieved from http://asphalt.csir.co.za/foamasph? (pdf)

National Asphalt Pavement Association (2020). PS33-PorousAsphaltPavementsBrochure. Retrieved from https:/www.ilasphalt.org/files/8014/4890/0484/NAPA-PS33-PorousAsphaltPavementsBrochure.pdf

New York Engineers (2021, June 25). Wood: A sustainable construction material. Retrieved from: htttps://www.ny-engineers. com/blog/wood-a-sustainable-construction-material.

Philippine Center for Environmental Protection and Sustainable Development, Inc. (n.d.) Philippine Forest Certification System. Retrieved from httpps://pcepsdi.org.ph/programme/philippine-forest-certification-system/

Suryakanta, Padhi (2015). Seven Steps Comprising Visual Classification of Soil on Site. Retrieved from httpss:////civilblog. org/2015/11/29/7-steps-comprising-visual-classification-of-soil-on-site/

Suryakanta, Padhi (2019). Anintroductiontocementconcreteforbeginners. Retrieved from httpps://civilblog.org/2019/02/12/ an-introduction-to-cement-concrete-for-beginners/

REFERENCES

United States Geological Survey. (n.d.) Evaluating potential benefits of permeable pavements. Retrieved from: https:// www.usgs.gov/science/evaluating-potential-benefits-permeable-pavement-quantity-and-qualit+y-stormwaterrunoff?qt-science_center_objects=0#qt-science_center_objects

US Department of Transportation – Federal Highway Administration. (2016, Nov 14) Warm mix asphalt. Retrieved from https:/// www.fhwa.dot.gov/innovation/everyda ycounts/edc-1/wma.cfm

United States Environmental Protection Agency. (2021). Reduce Urban Heat Island Effect. Retrieved from https://www.epa.gov/ green-infrastructure/reduce-urban-heat-island-effect

What is Cocopeat (n.d.) Retireved from: httpp://www.ecopeat.com/cocopeat.html

227 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

5.0 PLANTING

this page is intentionally left blank

232 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

5.0

PLANTING

Planting design, also known as softscape design, is presented as more than a tool for aesthetic enhancement. Its use for biodiversity conservation and ecological restoration is showcased through various planting strategies.

A number of special landscapes and their strategies are discussed in-depth in this chapter, highlighting that appropriate planting design and selection are crucial in creating safe and environmentally sound landscapes.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

5.1. Introduction 217

5.2. Definition of Terms 217

5.3. Planting Design 215

5.3.1. Process 219 5.3.2. Plant Selection 219

5.3.3. Native vs. Exotic Species 220 5.3.4. Planting Composition 222

5.4. Special Planting Considerations

5.4.1. Ecologically Sensitive Areas 224

5.4.2. Urban Forestry 228

5.4.3. Coastal Landscapes 229

5.4.4. Roadsides and Utility Corridors

5.4.5. Waterways and Waterbodies (Riparian areas and lakeshores, rain gardens, bioswales, and detention ponds)

5.4.5. Constructed wetlands 239

5.4.7. Botanic Gardens 241

5.4.8. Habitat Planting: Zoos and Butterfly Gardens

5.4.9. Permaculture and Productive Gardens 245

5.4.10. Vertical Greenery: Green Facades and Green Walls 248

5.4.11. Rooftop Greenery: Podiums and Green Roofs 251

5.4.12. Interior Landscapes

5.5. Planting Design Practice

5.5.1. Applicable Codes and Standards 255

5.5.2. Plant Identification 256

5.5.3. Specifying Plant Materials 256

5.5.4. Technical Specifications 257

5.6. Planting Installation

5.6.1. Applicable Codes and Standards 258

5.6.2. Site and Soil Preparation 260

5.6.3. Planting Installation Process 261

5.6.4. Planting installation Details 262

5.7.

Post-planting Care and Maintenance

5.7.1. Applicable Codes and Standards 275

5.7.2. Pruning 275

5.7.3. Fertilization 276

5.7.4. Pesticides and Weed Control 277

5.7.5. Special Considerations: Bamboos 277

5.7.5. Special Considerations: Water Plants 277

5.1 Introduction and Purpose

This chapter discusses the social and ecological aspects of planting design, emphasizing its importance in enhancing the sustainability and livability of the natural ecosystems, the built environment, and the community it serves.

and workmanship of Landscape Architects, landscape contractors, and suppliers.

5.2 Definition of Terms

5.2.1. Arboriculture

Planting design, also known as softscape design, is presented as more than a tool for aesthetic enhancement. Its use for biodiversity conservation and ecological restoration is showcased through various planting strategies.

Planting design, also known as softscape design, is presented as more than a tool for aesthetic enhancement. Its use for biodiversity conservation and ecological restoration is showcased through various planting strategies. A number of special landscapes and their strategies are discussed indepth in this chapter, highlighting that appropriate planting design and selection are crucial in creating safe and environmentally sound landscapes.

International codes and standards that are applicable to the Philippine setting are provided for various planting design, installation, and maintenance practices. These codes and standards set acceptable guidelines and minimum baseline requirements for the local landscaping industry, thereby safeguarding the quality of materials

International codes and standards that are applicable to the Philippine setting are provided for various planting design, installation, and maintenance practices.

– from the Latin arbor (tree) and cultura (tending or caring), is tree cultivation based on tree biology. The term arboriculture is often loosely used to include the care of other woody plants such as vines (in the United States), wall shrubs (in England), and climbing shrubs (in Australia).

5.2.2. Botanical Name

– a formal scientific name conforming to the International Codeof Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants (ICN) and, if it concerns aplant cultigen, the additional cultivar or Group epithets conforming tothe International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants (ICNCP)

5.2.3. Common Name

– The local name given to a particular plant species, as opposed to the scientific Latin or Greek name, which is used universally.

5.2.4.

Endemic Plant Species

– A subset of native plant species category, plants that can only be found in a particular area

or region. All endemic plants are native to the country in which they are found.

5.2.5.

Exotic Plant

– A plant that is not native to the country where it is located. Forexample, plants from Japan are considered exotic if they are located in thePhilippines; plants from the Philippines are considered exotic if they are located in Australia)

architecture, as its fourth division.

5.2.7.

Indigenous Plant

– See Native Plant

5.2.8.

Invasive Plant

– A non-native plant that is able to establish in many sites, grow quickly and spread to the point of disrupting plant communities or ecosystems.

naturalized plants. It should be noted that even though the offspring of naturalized plants reproduce and spread naturally without human intervention, they will not, over time, become native members of the local plant community. Many naturalized plants are found primarily near humandominated areas.

5.2.9.

5.2.5.

Horticulture

– A term derived from the Latin words hortus (garden) and cultura(cultivation), literally meaning garden cultivation. It is the branch of plantagriculture concerned with the intense cultivation of garden crops produced forfood, medicine, enjoyment, and recreation. The three general divisions ofhorticulture are olericulture or vegetable production, pomology or fruit production,and ornamental horticulture. Ornamental horticulture includes floriculture, theculture of cut flowers, potted flowers, and foliage plants; nursery plants; andlandscape horticulture (design and construction). Acquaah (2009)consideredlandscape

Mangrove Forests

– Tree growths composed of mangrove species found in the water nearer the mouths of the rivers where freshwater meets saltwater. These forests serve as a vital carbon sink.

5.2.10.

Native Plant

– A plant that is a part of the balance of nature that has developed over hundreds or thousands of years in a particular region or ecosystem. Theword native should always be used with a geographic qualifier (e.g., a plant that is native to Palawan).

5.2.11.

Naturalized Plant

– A plant that does not need human intervention to reproduce and maintain itself over time in an area where it is not native. Invasive plants areconsidered a sub-category of

5.2.12.

Non-Native Plant

– A plant introduced with human intervention, whether intentionally or accidentally, to a new place or new type of habitat where it was not previously found. All non-native plants are considered invasive. Some non-native ornamentals cannot reproduce or spread readily without continued propagation when introduced to new areas.

5.2.13.

Opportunistic Native Plant

– A native plant that is able to take advantage of disturbance to the soil or existing vegetation to spread quickly and out-compete the other plants on the disturbed site.

5.2.14.

Softscape

– Refers to vegetation (such as lawns, shrubs, trees, and the like) as

a landscape design element, distinct from constructed features such as walls, paths, outdoor structures, and others.

5.2.15. Weed

- A plant (native or non-native) that is not valued in the place where it is growing. A weed can be considered as any plant that poses a significant threat to agriculture or natural ecosystems (APHIS, n.d.). A noxious weed is any plant or plant product that can directly or indirectly injure or cause damage to crops (including nursery stock or plant products), livestock, poultry, or other interests of agriculture, irrigation, navigation, natural resources, the public health, or the environment.

5.2.15. Vegetation

- plants considered collectively, especially those found in a particular area or habitat.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

5.3. Planting Design

5.3.1. Process

The following diagram outlines the planting design process that Landscape Architects typically follow. Insert flowchart diagram of the planting design process below.

Site Assessment Stage

Listing of notable plant materials and habitats on site

Site Analysis and Report

Conceptual Design Stage

Drawing a Functional/ Concept Plan

Creating a Plant Master List

Schematic Design Stage

Developing a Preliminary Planting Plan

Locating and Drawing Planting Beds

Locating Structural Plants

Locating Focal and Anchor Plants

Design Development Stage

Select Plants and Drawing on Plan with Labels

Preliminary Plant Schedule

Construction Development

Nursery Visits and Materials Procurement

Installation and Maintenance

Post-project maintenance, maturity, and project evaluation

Figure 1 The Planting Design Process

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS PLANTING

Other disciplines provide valuable input to the Landscape Architect’s work throughout the planting design process and should be actively sought and considered.

Choosing the “right plant for the right spot” is important in landscaping.

Horticulturists and botanists, in particular, can provide the Landscape Architect with valuable advice when selecting and locating plant materials and during the plant maintenance stages. Specialized planting design projects such as botanic gardens and those located in ecologically sensitive sites require close coordination between the designer and allied disciplines. Structural engineers must also work closely with the Landscape Architect for rooftop landscapes.

It is important for selected plants to match the existing growing conditions of the site in addition to their ornamental value (University of Massachusetts, 2021). Careful planning and site evaluation help the Landscape Architect create a healthy, thriving landscape that does not need extensive maintenance.

In selecting plants for a particular design, the following site conditions must be considered:

a. Availability, intensity, and duration of light for photosynthetic processes (full sun, partial shade, to deep shade)

5.3.2. Plant Selection

Selecting plants to be used in landscape design should not be focused only on aesthetics. Plant selection is also governed by suitability in terms of climate and location, availability, and understanding of a particular site’s social and ecological context. Plants are viewed differently, both in beauty and function, in various environments.

b. Availability of water for irrigation

c. Exposure to wind and extreme temperatures

d. Type of soil, drainage, and compaction

e. Competition with existing vegetation on site

f.Below ground conditions such as the presence of obstructions, and

g.Above ground utilities or obstructions

In addition to the considerations mentioned earlier, it is also important to consider the mature dimensions of the selected plants to provide sufficient space to grow.

5.3.3.

Native vs. Exotic Species

Planting design is constantly evolving. As the need for ecologically driven landscape design has become increasingly more apparent in the last few decades, Landscape Architects are now departing from their role as “curators of gardens” (where plant species are selected and placed according to a theme in a created setting without regard to how that species may be predisposed to behave), they are now taking on the role of “stewards,” allowing natural processes and native vegetation to control the development of plant communities (Fleming, 2017).

are being re-examined, and the prioritization of the use of native plant species for landscape design has been growing. According to Garland (2020), the use of native plants – and in some cases exotic plants – have significant ecological benefits. These benefits are listed in the following section.

urban-adapted plants are becoming progressively dominant in towns and cities across the world. While nonnative plant species may diversify local biodiversity, global biodiversity is said to be reduced by these species as they outcompete more uncommon localized plant species.

c. Disproportionate cost

– There is an argument that suggests that the estimated eradication and containment costs for non-natives are greatly exaggerated (too expensive for the supposed benefit) and that such programs are sometimes unjustified.

d. Low Extinction Risk

As a result of this trend, traditional approaches to planting design

Benefits of Native Species

a. Increase in faunal diversity

– native plants generally support greater faunal diversity and biomass than non-native planting, especially insects and birds.

A. B.

d. Replication of natural habitats

– Native plantings in urban areas can be effective copies of more valuable semi-natural or natural habitats outside urban areas.

Benefits of Exotic Species

b. Limitation of non-native flora invasion

– non-native species have the potential to become invasive, dramatically transforming native biodiversity and “the balance of nature” by crowding out natives and starving fauna dependent on them or encouraging other species to become dominant.

c. Reduction in biological homogenization

– The proliferation of invasive nonnatives is said to be causing ‘biological homogenization,’ wherein the same

a.Enhanced opportunities for insects

– Some studies have found that some non-native planting can attract a greater abundance of pollinators than many native species due to their large flowers and extended flowering seasons.

– It is argued that non-native plants generally pose a negligible risk to native species extinction. Although this might be true for continental areas, mega-diverse island ecosystems with high numbers of endemic species like the Philippines may be more at risk to native species extinction with the proliferation of non-natives.

b.Climate change adaptation

– Some proponents of exotic flora assert that non-natives may be “nature’s saviors” as climate change renders conditions unsuitable for many native species.

5.3.4. Planting Composition

The following are the basic principles of planting composition:

a. Line – Rows of trees, hedges, or other types of plants arranged in straight, curved, or intersecting lines create patterns, control movement, or direct attention.

to grow in their natural form, such as columnar, upright, pyramidal, round, vase-shaped, vertical-oval, horizontal-oval, and flat spreading, is ideal for reducing maintenance costs in sculpting plants (Walker,1991).

of space.

d. Color – Leaves, flowers, and fruits provide an endless variety of colors. However, the intensity of plant colors usually fades if it is placed under shade. Likewise, most plants do not

Figure 2. Two rows of trees form lines paral lel to the lines in of the Academic Oval in UP Diliman.

b. Form – The overall plant mass composition viewed at a distance against the border of the sky creates form. Plants with horizontal forms typically have low and spreading characteristics. Tall and slendergrowing plants create vertical forms but become horizontal forms when grouped as hedges. Allowing plants

Figure 3. Massing of plants create horizontal forms, enframed by vertical forms of adjacent trees and other elements in the landscape.

c. Texture – Plant textures, primarily based on leaf textures, range from fine, to medium, to coarse. A planting design with mostly fine texture creates spaciousness, while a mix of coarser textures evokes a dynamic feeling and creates a more restricted sense

flower under shade. Sometimes, even leaf variegation in plant varieties reverts to their original green color in shaded environments.

Figure 5. Fine planting texture at the perimeter make the space feel larger

Figure 6. Examples of foliage colors

Figure 4. Coarse planting at the perimeter make the space feel smaller fine

medium medium coarse

e. Variety – Variety in lines, forms, texture, and color makes a planting design composition visually exciting and less monotonous. A tasteful composition of various plants avoids disorder and lack of unity.

g. Balance – In a formal landscape design, balance is created by mirroring the same planting design on the opposite side of the axis. In an informal landscape design, however, balance can be based on equivalence.

For example, a big plant on one side of the axis is equivalent to a group of smaller plants on the other side of the axis.

design which creates a personal effect or impression on the user. This principle is best used for small landscapes.

a b

f. Repetition – In contrast to variety, repetition creates a sense of order and unity. Similar plant species are usually grouped and arranged in masses, often repeated in various parts of the landscape when necessary. The plant quantity used for massing depends on the size of the planting area and the level of variety in the design.

Figure 8 The repetition of palms in this space, create a sense of enclosure and balance.

Figure 9 Formal or symmetrical balance is shown in plaza (a) while an assymterical balance in composition of a multi-level plaza is shown in (b).

h. Emphasis – Planting desin can create emphasis by leading the viewer’s eyes to a feature element or another dramatic plant arrangement. A specimen tree or a group of unique shrubs can emphasize a non-planting element such as a fountain or sculpture or be the feature element themselves.

i. Perception – Perception involves engaging the senses through planting

j. Massing – The most typically used plant massing technique is the “descending pyramidal effect,” where small plant masses are placed in front of larger plants. The size of plant masses should be appropriate to the scale of the planting area, and there should be a gradual transition in texture. Seasonal color changes and blooms should also be considered when designing plant masses.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 7 Variety of plant materials in a tropical hospitality setting

k. Scale – A small-scale planting design uses more variety and less repetition of planting materials, while a large-scale planting design uses less variety and more plant massing and repetition.

Figure 10 Palms at the center of this arcaded plaza act as the focal point of the space, giving emphasis to the planting area

Figure 12 Various massing strategies were incorporated in this pocket seating area

REVIEW NOTES:

BENEFITS OF USING NATIVE PLANTING SPECIES

• Increase in Faunal Diversity

• LImitation of non-native flora invasion

• Reduction in biological homogenization

• Replication of natural habitats

BENEFITS OF EXOSTIC SPECIES

• Enhanced opportunities for insects

• Climate change adaptation

• Disproportionate cost

• Low Extinction Risk

PLANTING COMPOSITION

• Line

• Form

• Color

• Texture • Variety • Repetition • Balance • Emphasis • Perception • Massing • Scale

Figure 11 Planting composition create persoonal effect or impression on the user

Figure 13 More variety and less repetition is desirable in small spaces

5.4. Special Planting Considerations

Ecologically sensitive areas have historically rich biodiversity and cultural importance, which may be subject to reforestation, rehabilitation or are earmarked for development.

nature provides to humans. These ecosystem services can be seen in the diagram below.

Ecologically sensitive areas such as forests found in Protected Areas (PAs) and Key Biodiversity Areas (KBAs) provide multiple environmental, economic, and social services, collectively known as ecosystem services or natural benefits that

Constructed wetlands, ecotourism sites, and rehabilitated/reforested mining sites are also considered ecologically sensitive areas. Special planting considerations for these areas are enumerated in the following sub-sections.

Use of Native Planting

A critical feature of planting in ecologically sensitive areas is the use of native species. Exotic planting species may alter the biodiversity in the area and, therefore, may have detrimental effects on the larger ecosystem.

A. B.

Prior to the selection of native plant species, a thorough study of site factors must be made. (Carandang and Lasco, 1998). The basic premise for selecting appropriate planting species is that no two sites are the same, so plant selection must always be sitespecific.

The use of native species in ecologically sensitive areas have the following benefits (FFP, 2015):

a. Recovery and expansion of threatened native flora and fauna habitats

b. Protection of watershed and freshwater resources

Protection of Native Habitats

Planting design should be able to support native habitats and maintain the surrounding natural vegetation. For ecotourism facilities, aside from using endemic, native, or previously existing plant communities in the area, the following considerations must also be made (Mehta, Baez, and O’Loughlin, 2002):

c. Improvement of the local natural landscape

d. Linking of disconnected forest fragments

e. Secure livelihood for the local community

f. Networking of protected areas and natural forests

a.When pruning is conducted to open up views where required, it must be ensured that the natural landscape is not altered.

b.High maintenance planting such as lawns should be avoided.

c.Introduced or non-native planting should only be concentrated adjacent

Figure 15 Ecosystem services (Living Planet Report, WWF 2016)

to structures and near entrances.

d.Simple plant massing should be used in the design.

e.Plants with forms and colors from outside the area or region should be avoided.

f.Fire precautions must always be taken into consideration.

practices the following guidelines in mangrove reforestation (2013):

a.Planting should mimic the natural growth of adjacent areas to ensure that appropriate species are planted for the specific location (e.g., muddy, sandy, or rocky).

FOREST TYPE

Beach Forests

SAMPLE REFORESTATION TREE SPECIES LIST

Barringtonia asiatica (BOTONG)

Calophyllum inophyllum (BITAOG)

Terminalia catappa (TALISAY)

Cocos nucifera (NIYOG)

Casuarina equisetifolia (AGOHO)

Mangrove Forests

Rhizophora apiculata (BAKAUAN)

Rhizophora mucronata (BAKAUAN BABAI)

Bruguiera cylindrica (POTOTAN LALAKI)

Bruguiera gymnorrhiza (BUSAIN)

Bruguiera parviflora (LANGARAI)

Use of Keystone Species1

For reforestation projects, using a two-step keystone species approach is recommended. Local, full sunrequiring tree species are planted first as “pioneers,” followed by the climax, shade-loving tree species or dipterocarps planted under the established pioneers. Although this method is both time and resourceconsuming, it provides a higher chance of success by attaining a better approximate of natural forest growth and ensuring the provision of full ecosystem services (PTFCF, 2013).

b.Planting is done landward (from the sea towards land).

c.Abandoned fishponds are targeted for mangrove reforestation.

For reforestation planting to be successful, plant species selection should be limited to what is already existing in the specific site.

Tropical Lowland Evergreen Rainforests

Bruguiera sexangula (POTOTAN)

Ceriops tagal (TANGAL LIGASEN)

Ceriops zippeliana (MALATANGAL)

Avicennia marina (BUNGALON)

Avicennia officinalis (API-API)

Sonneratia alba (PAGATPAT)

Sonneratia caseolaris (PEDADA)

Dipterocarpaceae (LAUAN)

Dipterocarpus validus (LAUAN-HAGAKHAK)

Shorea astylosa (YAKAL-LAUAN) (PHILIPPINE-NATIVE RATTAN)

Tropical Semi-Evergreen Forests Shorea contorta (WHITE LAUAN)

Dipterocarpus grandiflorus (APITONG)

Dipterocarpus gracilis (PANAU) Shorea guiso (GUIJO)

Anisoptera thurifera (PALOSAPIS)

Strombosia philippinensis (TAMAYUAN)

Sample Plant Species for Ecologically Sensitive Areas (asterisk* indicates non-native species)

Mangrove Revegetation

The Philippine Tropical Forest Conservation Foundation (PTPCF)

1 A k eystone species is an organism that helps define an entire ecosystem (National Geographic, 2019).

Source: Fernando et al. (2008); cited by Philippine Tropical Forest Conservation Foundation, Inc. (2013)

a. Reforestation Species

Diospyros pilosanthera (BOLONG-ETA)

Palaquium luzoniense (NATO)

Cleistanthus angustifolius (ANIATAM-KITID)

Tropical Moist Deciduous Forests Vitex parviflora (MOLAVE)

Intsia bijuga (IPIL)

Heritiera sylvatica (DUNGON)

Pterocarpus indicus (NARRA)

Tropical Lower Montane Forests Shorea polysperma (TANGUILE)

Lithocarpus (OAKS)

Elaeocarpus (OIL FRUITS)

Litsea, Neolitsea (LAURELS)

Syzygium (MAKAASIM)

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

FOREST TYPE

Tropical Upper Montane Forests

SAMPLE REFORESTATION TREE SPECIES LIST

Leptospermum flavescens (MALASULASI)

Dacrycarpus imbricatus (IGEM)

Syzygium acrophilum (BALTIK)

Taxus sumatrana (MOUNTAIN YEW)

Neolitsea megacarpa (BALAKAUIN)

b. Mangrove Reforestation Species

FOREST TYPE

Specify Naturally Occurring Species on Site)

Native Trees

Tropical Subalpine Rainforests

Podocarpus glaucus (HALCON IGEM)

Falcatifolium gruezoi (BINATON)

Phyllocladus hypophyllus (DALUNG)

Dacrycarpus cumingii (CUMING IGEM)

Leptospermum flavescens (MALASULASI)

Native Shrubs

Freshwater Swamp Forests

Peat Swamp Forests

Terminalia copelandii (YANIPO)

Metroxylon sagu (PALM SAGO)

Tristaniopsis

Calophyllum

Syzygium

Mangifera caesia (BANUYO)

Garcinia rubra (KAMANDIIS)

Fagraea racemosa (BALAT BUAIA)

Forests over Limestone

Afzelia rhomboidea (TINDALO)

Intsia bijuga (IPIL)

Albizia acle (AKLE)

Pterocarpus indicus (NARRA)

Kingiodendron alternifolium (BATETE)

Vitex parviflora (MOLAVE)

Pterocymbium tinctorium (TALUTO)

Toona calantas (KALANTAS)

Mimusops elengi (BANSALANGIN)

Maranthes corymbosa (LIUSIN)

Diospyros ferrea (BATULINAU)

Pterospermum diversifolium (BAYOK)

Mallotus floribundus (TULA-TULA)

Table 1 Reforestation Species

SAMPLE MANGROVE REFORESTATION SPECIES LIST (Specify Naturally Occurring Species on Site)

Cordia subcordata Lam. (BANAGO)

Dolichandrone spathacea (TIWI)

Ilex cymosa (TUA)

Nypa fruticans (NYPA)

Thespesia populnea (BANAGO)

Acrostichum aureum Linn. (GOLDEN MANGROVE FERN)

Acrostichum speciosum Willd. (PAKU-PAKUAN/MANGROVE FERN)

Brownlowia tersa (Linn.) Kosterm. (MARAGOMON)

Clerodendron inerme (Linn.) Gaertn. (WILD JASMINE)

Native Groundcover Caesalpinia crista Linn. (DALAGDAG)

Tristellateia australasiae (BAUING)

Table 2 Mangrove Reforestation Species

c.Terrestrial Protected Areas (PAs) and Key Biodiversity Areas (KBAs) Species

FOREST TYPE

Native Trees

TERRESTRIAL PAs and KBAs LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT

PLANTING SAMPLE NATIVE SPECIES LIST (It is Recommended to Specify Species that are Naturally Occurring on Site)

Eucalyptus deglupta (BAGRAS)

Dillenia philippinensis Rolfe (KATMON)

Lagerstroemia speciosa (BANABA)

Macaranga tanarius (Linn.) Muell.-Arg (BINUNGA)

Macaranga grandifolia (TAKIP -ASIN)

Polyscias nodosa (MALAPAPAYA)

Vitex parviflora (MOLAUIN)

Native Shrubs Aglaia odorata Lour. (SINAMOMONG)

Dicranopteris linearis (Burm. f.) Underw. (KILOB)

Leea guineensis G. Don (ABANG-ABANG)

Medinilla cordata (MEDINILLA)

Nephrolepis biserrata (MACHO-FERN)

Osmoxylon lineare (Merr.) Philipson (GREEN ARALIA/MIAGOS)

Pseuderanthemum bicolor (LIMANG-SUGAT)

Schefflera odorata (Blanco) Merr. & Rolfe (LIMA-LIMA)

Tabernaemontana pandacaqui Poir. (PANDAKAKI)

Native Groundcover Chrysopogon aciculatus (Retz.) Trin. (AMOR-SECO)

Desmodium triflorum (L.) DC. (CREEPING TICK TREFOIL)

Table 3 Sample Native Species for PAs and KBAs

5.4.2. Urban Forestry

Figure 16 Urban Forest A.

Urban Forestry is an interdisciplinary approach to the planning and management of all woody and associated vegetation in and around dense human settlements. It is an approach that integrates vegetation and green spaces to develop inclusive, safe, resilient, and sustainable cities. It involves all trees in urban and peri-urban areas, from trees in private gardens to trees in parks and remaining woodlands, viewed in connection with associated vegetation, such as shrubs and groundcovers. (Ferrini, F., Konijnendijk

van den Bosch, C., & Fini, A., 2017)

The following should be taken into consideration when selecting plant species for urban forestry projects:

vegetation was recently brought to light, decades of urban development saw the use of exotic plant species for urban landscaping, leading to the acceleration of plant biodiversity reduction.

B.

Root Space

5.4.3. Coastal Landscapes Salt Tolerance

Biodiversity

According to McKinney (2008), a critical concern in urban green spaces is the reduction of biodiversity, where native species are widely replaced by non-native species (Padoa-Schioppa & Canedoli, 2017). Until the ecological importance of planting native

Sufficient root space or soil volume in urban areas should be accompanied by high-quality soil. Poor soil typically found in urban areas can be ameliorated, amended, and improved. If the volume of soil is insufficient, the tree’s capture of water and nutrients will be inadequate, and anchorage will be compromised (Ibid, n.d.).

Based mainly on moisture requirements, the minimum soil volume rule-of-thumb is 0.3-0.6 cubic meters for 1 square meter crown projection area (Lindsey & Bassuk, 1991; cited by Jim, 2017). Thus, for a tree with a 1-meter crown diameter, at least a 1.8 cubic meter of soil volume is needed.

Many plants cannot survive the harsh conditions of coastal areas. Careful selection of plant species and proper site preparation are required for the successful landscape design of areas exposed to salt spray or saltwater overwash. Plants that are native or naturalized to the site are welladapted to these conditions and serve as a good basis in plant design selection. Exotic plants that thrive under these conditions may be added to the plant palette, but they must be used carefully to ensure that the environmental risks they pose to the area are well-managed.

A. B.

Wind Tolerance

Coastal locations are constantly exposed to wind. The Landscape Architect must consider plants whose leaves and stems are not easily dried out and damaged by constantly shifting winds during plant

selection. Plant screen buffers can be used to decrease the intensity of wind coming into the landscape and provide protection for less windtolerant plants. Plant screen buffers generally use low planting materials on the windward side and increase in height as they move further inward away from the wind.

C.

Soil Conditions

porous, and lack nutrients and organic matter. When preparing the soil for coastal landscapes, organic material should be added to the soil mix.

E.

Erosion Control

Good soil is critical to planting in coastal areas, not only for waterfront locations but also for inland areas adjacent to the coast. In addition to salt and wind, the sandy soil conditions of coastal areas may be a threat to plant survival. Sandy soils are dry,

Drought Tolerance

Coastal areas are subject to dry conditions, and therefore, plants that can adapt to such conditions must be chosen. To help plants establish quickly, planting holes should be 3-5 times the diameter of the root ball and no deeper than the distance of the trunk flare to the bottom of the root ball. Deep planting should be avoided. Adding compost, composted manure, or peat moss increases the ability of sandy soil to hold water and nutrients. A layer of organic material with a minimum thickness of 75mm is recommended for the whole planting area.

Plants help control erosion in coastal areas, especially in high-risk areas such as steep embankments. For barren banks, mulches, netting, and erosion, control blankets should be placed over various grass seeds to aid the establishment of vegetation. Planting trees on the bank face should be avoided. Shrubs should be integrated into the planting design, as they are more effective in intercepting rainfall than grasses (Clark, 2011).

D. F. G.

Plants must be watered adequately as per their water requirements.

Native or Naturalized Species

The selection of native or naturalized plants that are already well-adapted to dry, sandy conditions is crucial in suitable plant selection as they require less maintenance once established. Sample Plant Species for Coastal Areas (asterisk* indicates non-native species)

A 50mm-75mm mulch layer helps reduce the loss of moisture in the soil.

Figure 17 Coastal Landscape illustration

TREES

SHRUBS

Cycas edentata de Laubenfels (PITOGO)

Caesalpinia sappan Linn. (SAPANG)

Erythrina variegata var. orientalis (DAPDAP)

Cerbera manghas Linn. (BARIBAI)

Ficus septica (HAWILI)

Dillenia sibuyanensis (Elmer) Merr. (SHRUB DILLENIA)

Intsia bijuga (IPIL)

Vitex ovata (BEACH VITEX)

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

5.4.4.Roadsides and Utility Corridors

TREES

Ipomoea pes-caprae (L.) R.Br. (BEACH MORNING GLORY)

Canavalia maritima (aublet) Thouars (BEACH BEAN/PATANING DAGAT)

Fimbristylis cymosa R.Br. (BUTTON SEDGE)

Vigna marina (BEACH PEA)

A.Traffic Safety

Planting must be located in areas that do not interfere with vehicular, bicycle, or pedestrian traffic to not cause any hazards or safety risks to users. Frangible plants or those that break easily are ideal to use along roadways as they have less impact on vehicles in the event of a collision.

the surface of the road. On the other hand, required sightline distances are site-specific and must be determined on-site due to varying topography, road alignments, grading, and traffic volume.

C.Vertical Clearance

B.Visibility and sightlines

Plants must not obstruct sightlines between 60mm and 1800mm above

To avoid traffic obstruction, roadside trees must maintain a minimum clearance of 4.9 meters from the road’s surface up to the lowest point of the tree canopy. Sidewalks and pedestrian spaces must maintain a

Figure 18. Illustrative landscape of Roadsides and Utility Corridors

minimum clearance of 2.1 meters from the walkway’s surface up to the lowest point of the tree canopy.

D. Underground and Overhead Utilities

Tall-growing trees should not be planted beneath utility lines. Wide-spreading trees should not be planted adjacent to utility lines unless the planting area is wide enough to minimize the need for constant pruning. Guidelines for acceptable landscaping below power line corridors are regulated by the Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) of the Anti-Obstruction of Power Lines Act (R.A. No. 11361). The effect of tree roots on underground services such as drainage and water supply must also be considered.

E. Sufficient Planting Space and Soil Volume for Trees

If the volume of soil is insufficient, a tree’s capture of water and nutrients will be inadequate, and anchorage will be compromised. Based on moisture requirements, the minimum soil volume rule-of-thumb is 0.30.6 cubic meters for 1 square meter

crown projection area (Lindsey & Bassuk, 1991; cited by Jim, 2017).

F. Maintenance Requirements

Often, maintenance is costly for urban tree planting and greening programs. Selecting appropriate plants that will adapt well to the specific site is crucial in creating a sustainable, lowmaintenance landscape design.

G. Microclimate

Aside from being aesthetically pleasing, plants should be able to improve a site’s microclimate. Trees can reduce wind velocity, redirect breezes to improve ventilation, provide shade, and improve air quality by intercepting air pollution. It must be noted that additional air pollution control systems must be put in place to ensure that deposited pollutants are either taken out of the environment or immobilized (Sæbø, et al., 2017).

H. Crime Prevention through Environmental Design (CPTED)

Planting design can also be a crime prevention strategy. To discourage deviant behavior and criminality,

some of the principles employed by CPTED include maximizing “natural surveillance” through unobstructed sightlines, natural accessibility control, and natural territorial reinforcement of public or semipublic spaces.

I. Sample Plant Species for Roadsides and Utility Corridors (asterisk* indicates non-native species)

TREES

Alstonia scholaris (L.) R. Br. (DITA)

Casuarina equisetifolia L. (AGOHO)

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Brachychiton acerifolius (A. Cunn. ex G. Don) Macarthur (AUSTRALIAN FLAME TREE) *

Cassia fistula L. (GOLDEN SHOWER)*

Pandanus tectorius Soland. (PANDAN)

Cassia javanica subsp. nodosa (PINK CASSIA)*

SHRUBS

Melastoma malabathricum L. (MALATUNGAW)

Pseudomussaenda flava Verdc. (DWARF MUSSAENDA)*

Heliconia ‘Dwarf Jamaican’ (DWARF JAMAICAN)*

Syzygium myrtifolium (Roxb.) Walp. (EUGENIA)

Caesalpinia pulcherrima (L.) (CABALLERO)*

Cheilocostus speciosus (J. Koenig) C. Specht (COSTUS)

Phyllanthus cochinchinensis (VIETNAM LEAF-FLOWER)*

Clerodendrum paniculatum (PAGODA FLOWER)

Pterocarpus indicus Willd. (NARRA)

Terminalia mantaly H. Perrier (AFRICAN TALISAY)*

GROUNDCOVER

Dicranopteris linearis (Burm. f.) Underw. (LINEAR FORK-FERN)

Ophiopogon

Other planting materials that can be considered are the following:

TREES

Acacia confusa (AYANGILI)

Adenanthera intermedia Merr. (TANGLIN)

Agathis philippinensis (ALMACIGA)

Alstonia macrophylla (BATINO)

Alstonia scholaris (DITA)

Ardisia confertiflora Merr. (APAIN)

Artocarpus blancoi (ANTIPOLO)

Bauhinia malabarica (ALIBANGBANG)

Crateva religiosa (BALAI LAMOK)

Cynometra ramiflora (BALITBITAN)

Decaspermum blancoi Vidal (PATALSIK PULA)

Diospyros blancoi (KAMAGONG)

Dipterocarpus grandiflorus (APITONG)

Eucalyptus deglupta (BAGRAS)

Erythrina fusca Lour. (ANII)

Intsia bijuga (IPIL)

Koordersiodendron pinnatum (AMUGIS)

Lagerstroemia speciosa (BANABA)

Madhuca betis (BETIS)

Memecylon lanceolatum Blanco (DIGEG)

Millettia pinnata (BANI)

Nauclea orientalis (BANGKAL)

Palaquium philippense (MALAK-MALAK)

Peltophorum pterocarpum (SIAR)

Pterocarpus indicus (NARRA)

Reutealis trisperma (BAGUILUMBANG)

Shorea contorta (WHITE LAUAN)

Sterculia ceramica R. Br. (MALA-KALUMPANG)

Sterculia foetida (KALUMPANG)

Tectona philippinensis (PHILIPPINE TEAK)

Thespesia populnea (L.) Soland. Ex Corr. (BANAGO)

Trema orientalis (ANIABONG)

Vitex parviflora (MOLAUIN)

SHRUBS

Murraya paniculata (KAMUNING)

Carmona retusa (FUKIEN TI)

Tabernaemontana pandacaqui (PANDAKAKI)

254 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Lantana montevidensis (CREEPING LANTANA)*

jaburan ‘Vittatus’ (VARIEGATED MONDO GRASS)*

Desmodium triflorum (L.) DC.(KALISKIS-DALAG)

Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers. (KAWAD-KAWARAN/BERMUDA GRASS)

Arachis pintoi (PEANUT PLANT)*

Pandanus pygmaeus Thouars (DWARF PANDAN)*

Pteris ensiformis (PAKONG-PARANG)

5.4.5.

Waterways

and Waterbodies (Riparian areas and lakeshores, rain gardens, bioswales, and detention ponds)

conditions and dry conditions, especially if they are planted in locations where water is not always present.

C. Maintenance – Hardy perennials that require less maintenance should ideally be selected for these kinds of sites. Plants that prefer drier soils should be placed at the higher parts of the slope or berm, and water-loving plants at the lower areas closer to the water. Accessways must be provided for maintenance purposes.

D. Sample Plant Species for Waterways and Waterbodies (asterisk* indicates non-native species)

This section discusses specific planting strategies for stream or riparian restoration and development and lakeshore or pond management within a watershed.

The following are important considerations when selecting planting materials for these areas:

A. Potential invasiveness –

Planting materials used for natural stormwater treatment should not be

invasive as they are more difficult to control unless systems are designed to prevent them from spreading uncontrollably. The landscape design should be seen as part of a greater whole and not an isolated area, where it must connect with the overall planting design of the site.

B. Wet conditions – In general, planting materials used for these developments should be able to tolerate both wet or water-logged

Insert individual photos of each plant indicated below

TREES

Aegiceras corniculatum (L.) Blanco (RIVER MANGROVE)

Dillenia philippinensis Rolfe (KATMON)

Eucalyptus deglupta Blume (BAGRAS)

Hibiscus tiliaceus Linn. (MALABAGO)

Figure 19. Waterways and Waterbodies Illustrative landscape

Metroxylon sagu Rottb. (SAGO PALM)

SHRUBS

Pandanus tectorius Soland. (PANDAN)

Acrostichum aureum L. (LAGOLO)

Cheilocostus speciosus (J. Koenig) C. Specht (COSTUS)

Osmoxylon lineare (Merr.) Philipson (GREEN ARALIA/MIAGOS)

Podocarpus polystachyus R. Br. ex Endl. (PODOCARPUS)

Acrostichum speciosum Willd. (MANGROVE FERN)

Licuala spinosa Wurmb. (SPINY LICUALA)

Colocasia esculenta ‘Coffee Cup’ (COFFEE CUP GABI)*

Alocasia macrorrhiza (L.) Schott (BIGA/BADYANG)

Melastoma malabathricum L. (MALATUNGAW)

Colocasia esculenta ‘Black Magic’ (BLACK TARO)*

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Pandanus amaryllifolius Roxb. (PANDAN MABANGO)*

Cyperus papyrus (PAPYRUS)*

Thaumatococcus daniellii (Benn.)

Benth. ex B. D. Jacks. (SWEET PRAYER PLANT)*

GROUNDCOVERS

Typhonodorum lindleyanum Schott (WATER BANANA) *

Pontederia vaginalis Burm.f. (GABING UAK)

Bacopa caroliniana (Walter) B.L. Rob. (WATER HYSSOP) *

Ruellia simplex ‘Colobe Pink’ (DWARF PINK RUELLIA)*

Dipteris lobbiana (Hook.) T. Moore (FERN)

Cuphea hyssopifolia (CUPHEA)*

Ruellia simplex ‘Katie’ (DWARF MEXICAN PETUNIA)*

Stenochlaena palustris (Burm. f.)

Bedd. (CLIMBING SWAMP FERN)

Pandanus pygmaeus Thouars (DWARF PANDAN)*

Zephyranthes candida (Lindl.) Herb. (RAIN LILY)*

5.4.5. Constructed Wetlands

TREES

microbial biofilm on stems

free floating plants floating plants submerged plants

Figure 20. Illustration of a constructed wetland

A. Technical Performance

The technical performance of plants in nutrient uptake and filtering pollution is the primary purpose of engineered systems such as constructed wetlands. This must, however, be balanced with other design considerations such as installation cost and maintenance requirements. Non-native plant species can be mixed into the planting design to improve a wetland’s technical

emergent planting

rooted floating leaf plants

Buchanania arborescens (Bl.) Bl (BALINGHASAI)

Ficus minahassae (Teijsm. & de Vr.) Miq. (HAGIMIT)

performance, but they must be managed and maintained properly. Planting techniques such as putting patches of a single species rather than mixing species randomly have been observed to yield a more stable mixedspecies design. (Austin & Yu, 2016)

B. Sample Plant Species for

Constructed Wetlands (asterisk* indicates non-native species)

Cratoxylum formosum (Jack) Dyer (SALINGOGON)

Ficus nota (TIBIG)

Cynometra ramiflora Linn. (BALITBITAN)

Metroxylon sagu Rottb. (SAGO PALM)

GROUNDCOVERS

5.4.7. Botanic Gardens

The following are some of the general considerations in selecting planting materials for botanic gardens (Houston, 2009):

A. Presentation of Native Habitats

As much as possible, existing native vegetation in a site should be preserved and be used as the planning and organizational foundation of planting design.

Where the existing vegetation is non-native, additional conservation principles must be supplemented, and native plant communities can be recreated by designing simplified natural patterns based on authentic regional ecological communities. The creation of these simplified ecological communities can become biodiversity networks or corridors in themselves.

Selaginella tamariscina (PAKONG-TULOG)

Neptunia oleracea Lour. (WATER MIMOSA)

Ruellia simplex ‘Katie’ (DWARF MEXICAN PETUNIA)*

Phalaris arundinacea (CANARY GRASS)*

Thalia geniculata ‘Red-stemmed’ (RED THALIA)*

Typha latifolia (CATTAIL)*

Figure 21 Illustrative landscape (Botanic Gardens)

B. Sustainable Practices

Using sustainable design principles and operational practices are key to successful biodiversity conservation in botanical gardens. The selection of non-chemical pesticides and fertilizers is one example. In terms of operational practices, maximizing manual labor, reducing the use of power equipment, and converting organic wastes into compost are also good strategies to sustainable maintenance principles (Sustainable Sites Initiative 2007).

C. Educational Component

A conservation storyline should be integrated into the overall plan and design of the botanic garden. Plant species to be displayed should be well selected to ensure they convey their conservation significance, and informational signage should be wellwritten, designed, and located.

D. Garden Programs

Plants should be selected to fit into the specific design program of the botanic garden. For instance, amenity gardens typically showcase attractive, low-maintenance plants and demonstrate horticultural

excellence and conservation significance. Natural gardens, on the other hand, can include native forest and revegetation planting species. Waterways and water bodies within the garden can showcase plants that have natural stormwater treatment applications.

Nursery and breeding areas typically house plants used for reproduction or revegetation, while research areas house plant collections that undergo trials for various purposes, including documentation for future publications and further studies.

Key considerations in the selection of plants for designed animal habitats are listed in the following subsections.

A. Replication of Natural Habitats

B. Toxicity

Care should be taken to ensure that plants accessible to the animals are not toxic for that particular species.

5.4.8. Habitat Planting: Zoos and Butterfly Gardens

In animal enclosures, plants help replicate or recreate the natural habitat of the animal species it houses. Plants also help elicit a behavioral response from the animal. They can create a feeling of safety and an illusion of distance from threatening elements, act as posts for scent markings, provide diversions, screen off incompatible species, create private spaces, and support behaviors formed within that curated habitat.

C. Exhibit Immersion

While the main purpose of plants in zoos is to beautify the site, it is also important that the plants create an illusion that the visitors are sharing a natural habitat with the animals they have come to see.

D. Browse/Food

Browse includes leaves and twigs from shrubs, trees, and flowers. The benefits of browse include supplementing an animal’s diet with additional nutrients and fiber. A wide range of exhibit animals benefit from the provision of plants as a food source, including hoofstock, primates, pachyderms, marsupials, and even avian species. Butterfly gardens should also have a wide range of flowering plants to provide browsing opportunities for the species being displayed.

E. Education

The main goal of butterfly gardens or pollinator gardens is to educate the public on the importance of Figure 22. Illustrative landscape (Zoo and Butterfly Gardens)

pollinators, including bees and birds, and create habitats for these species. It is important for the public to be educated on specific plants that attract these insects and other pollinators for them to be able to incorporate these plants in their gardens.

Zoos can also create educational programs that explain the importance of plants in wildlife conservation. They are a source of food and provide habitats, which are both essential to species survival.

F. Sample Plant Species for Butterfly and Pollinator Gardens (asterisk* indicates non-native species)

TREES

Alstonia scholaris (L.) R. Br. (DITA)

Antidesma pentandum (BIGNAY-PUGO)

Dillenia excelsa (Jack) Gilg (YELLOW KATMON)

Premna serratifolia L. (ALAGAU-GUBAT)

Cananga odorata (Lam.) Hook.f. & Thomson (ILANG-ILANG)

Dillenia philippinensis Rolfe (KATMON)

Saribus rotundifolius (Lam.) Blume (ANAHAW)

Clerodendrum quadriloculare (BAGAWAK)

Hibiscus tiliaceus Linn. (MALABAGO)

Sterculia parviflora Roxb. (KALUMPANG)

Syzygium lineatum (DC.) Merr. & L.M. Perry (LUBEG)

Xanthostemon verdugonianus Naves (MANGKONO)

SHRUBS

Syzygium myrtifolium (Roxb.) Walp. (EUGENIA)

Vitex trifolia (LAGUNDI)

Ardisia crenata Sims (CORAL BERRY)

Leea guineensis G. Don (ABANG-ABANG)

Aloysia virgata (Ruiz & Pav.) Juss. (WHITE ALMOND BUSH)*

Cheilocostus speciosus (J. Koenig) C. Specht (COSTUS)

Melastoma malabathricum L. (MALATUNGAW)

Cestrum leucocarpa (LADY OF THE NIGHT)*

Murraya paniculata (KAMUNING)

Tabernaemontana pandacaqui Poir. (PANDAKAKI)

Duranta erecta ‘Sheena’s Gold’ (GOLDEN DURANTA)* Lantana camara (LANTANA)*

Stachytarpheta frantzii (PURPLE PORTERWEED)*

GROUNDCOVERS

5.4.9. Permaculture and Productive Gardens

Desmodium triflorum (L.) DC. (CREEPING TICK TREFOIL)

Tecoma stans (L.) Juss. ex Kunth (GOLDEN BELL)*

Turnera subulata (WHITE ALDER)*

Sphagneticola trilobata (L.) Pruski (WEDELIA)*

Permaculture is an innovative framework for sustainable living wherein agricultural practices are integrated with natural ecosystems, and interrelationships among systems are used to develop ecological harmony. It is the holistic utilization of a piece of land, wherein all the natural ecosystems within the site are combined with the social structures designed for long-lasting and nondamaging agricultural practices. A.Permaculture Guidelines

To keep permaculture and productive gardens sustainable, the following guidelines are recommended (Mehta, Baez, and O’Loughlin, 2002):

Tridax procumbens (COAT BUTTONS)*

1.The slope and orientation of the site to the sun must be considered in order togrowadiverseselectionofplanting materials.

2.Trees can be used as windbreaks or shelterbelts in windy areas and hot climates.

3.Non-invasive and native plant

Lespedeza bicolor (BUSH CLOVER)*

Nerium oleander (ADELFA)*

Pseudomussaenda flava Verdc. (DWARF MUSSAENDA)*

Stachytarpheta indica (L.) Vahl (SNAKE WEED)*

Figure 23. Illustrative landscape

species should be selected to encourage a symbiotic relationship between chosen plants and the existing environmental conditions and locations.

8.A comprehensive planting design should be applied to ensure soil regeneration.

4.Planting materials and design elements should have multiple roles toupholdandimprovetheecosystem.

5.Selectedplantingmaterialsshould be able to prevent erosion (e.g., contourplantingwillhelpsoilerosion on open slopes).

5.The creation of natural fertilizer can be done by using animal and green manure.

9.Simple, renewable, and natural methodsshouldbeemployedforplant maintenance.

B. Sample Plant Species for Permaculture (asterisk* indicates non-native species)

TREES

7.Complementarynativetreesshould be planted to speed up natural succession for restoration projects.

266 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Carica papaya (PAPAYA) *

SHRUBS

Moringa oleifera (MALUNGGAY) *

Alocasia macrorrhiza (L.) Schott (BIGA/BADYANG)

Abelmoschus esculentus (OKRA) *

Solanum lycopersicum (KAMATIS) *

Chrysophyllum cainito (CAIMITO) *

Calocasia esculenta (TARO)

Capsicum frutescens (SILI) *

Solanum melongena (TALONG) *

Alpinia galanga (LANGKAWAS)

Origanum vulgare (OREGANO) *

Kolowratia elegans (TAGBAK)

Ocimum basilicum (BASIL) *

GROUNDCOVERS

5.4.10. Vertical Greenery: Green Facades and Green Walls

In general, vertical greenery can be divided into two types: green facades and green walls. Green facades are created by growing climbing plants up and across the face of a building. The plants can either be rooted in the ground or grown from containers installed at different levels on the building’s vertical surface. The plants can attach directly to the surface of a building or be supported by a vertical structure independent of the building. Green walls are made up of plants growing in individual containers that incorporate the growing medium, irrigation, and drainage system (BCC, 2015).

Figure 24. Illustrative landscape

They can be installed in both building interiors or exteriors. In green walls, planting systems are placed across the entire vertical structure to cover the surface with greenery. On the other hand, Green facades have their planting medium coming from a base point and allow the climbing plant to grow both vertically and horizontally to cover the surface with greenery.

The following considerations influence the selection of planting materials for vertical greenery systems.

A. Design Purpose

The planting selection for a green wall or green facade depends on the purpose of the design. Different types of vertical greenery are used to cool building interiors, create privacy screens, improve energy efficiency, or increase visual appeal, among others. The planting palette must address the primary objective of the vertical greenery system.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Amaranthus viridis L. (KULITIS)

Diplazium esculentum Retz. Swartz (PAKO FERN)

Ipomoea aquatica (KANGKONG) *

Ipomoea batatas (TALBOS NG KAMOTE) *

Portulaca oleracea (PIGWEED) *

B. Support Structure

Plant selection depends on the type of vertical greenery system to be installed, whether a green façade or a green wall or a combination of both types.

Support structures suitable for green facades include vertical steel cables or ropes that can assist climbing plants such as vines to grow upwards. Other examples include cable lattice or mesh structures, which allow spreading plants such as leaf-stem climbers, tendrils, or scramblers to grow up and across the entire green façade.

Support structures for green walls include frameworks or rack systems used to anchor plant containers into place. Irrigation and drainage systems are also factored into this type of support structure.

C. Loads and Engineering

Factors that need to be considered in vertical greenery installation include the following:

• Additional transient loads

including movement, wind, and rain. Plants can add substantial transient loads due to wind friction and water retention.

• Design dead loads or the final weight of all the elements, including plants, substrate, and the accompanying supporting structure

• Some plant species may require special engineering requirements, such as specially engineered support cables or wire mesh systems.

D. Maintenance

Vertical greenery systems require the same attention and care as any type of garden – including weeding, plant replacement, pruning, and fertilizing.

Proper plant selection minimizes maintenance requirements, and thus lowers total maintenance costs throughout the life of a vertical greenery structure.

Ophiopogon jaburan (GREEN MONDO)*

Tinospora crispa (L.) Miers ex Hook. f. & Thomson (MAKABUHAI)

Callisia repens (Jacq.) L. (TURTLE VINE)*

Epipremnum ‘NJOY’ (NJOY)*

Pandanus pygmaeus (DWARF PANDAN)*

TRAILING AND CLIMBING

Tristellateia australasiae (BAUING)

Clitoria ternatea (TERNATEA)*

Epipremnum aureum ‘Neon’ (GOLDEN POTHOS)*

Epipremnum pinnatum (L.) Engl. (TIBATIB)

Bauhinia kockiana (ORANGE BAUHINIA VINE)*

Trachelospermum jasminoides (STAR JASMINE)*

5.4.11. Rooftop Greenery: Landscape Podiums and Green Roofs

A. Structural Considerations

By being located on top of a building, the Landscape Architect must design podium landscapes and green roofs in collaboration with the structural engineer to ensure structural integrity. Landscaping elements create additional loads that the structure must be able to support, and thus, these need to be considered during the building’s design stage. Some of these additional loads include the following:

c.Plant growth – As the plant grows into maturity, its weight also increases.

d.Wind loads – Trees and large shrubs may subject the building to additional wind loads due to drag.

e. Equipment – The moving weight of the equipment used during planting installation and maintenance, if any, should likewise not be overlooked.

materials for rooftop greenery. Drainpipes must be adequately sized and provided to accommodate runoff from excess irrigation water or heavy rainfall, as well as expected foreign debris such as fallen leaves. The irrigation requirements of selected plants must be carefully considered to ensure that the building’s water system can adequately provide water supply.

B. Exposure

D. Safety

Tradescantia

a. Pot/planter weights – This includes the weight of the pot itself, the planting medium, and the planting medium’s saturated weight when it is filled with water. Lightweight soil mixes such as vermiculite can be used to reduce landscape weights.

b. Plant weight – A generally accepted rule of thumb is that every 25mm of caliper translates to about 45 kg of tree green weight, or biomass above ground, including trunk, branches, and leaves (Weiler & Scholz-Barth, 2009).

Rooftop greenery, especially those located on very high floors, may be subject to harsh environmental conditions due to strong winds, high temperatures, and drought-like conditions caused by direct exposure to sunlight. Care must be taken to ensure that plant materials selected for these types of rooftop greenery can adapt well to such conditions or are protected with windbreaks and supplemented with adequate irrigation requirements.

C. Drainage and Waterproofing

The planting areas’ drainage and waterproofing limitations must be considered in selecting plant

Trees/palms should be located where they can be safely accessed, including the canopy. Canopies that spread beyond roof edges cannot be easily reached for pruning and maintenance; therefore, placing them right at the roof edge should be avoided.

Whenever possible, the trees/palms should be sited at a safe distance (equal to or greater than the expected mature height) away from the roof edge to create a buffer zone if unforeseen winds uproot it.

Rooftop trees/palms and tall vegetation (such as large shrubs exceeding 2m in height) should be

Sphagneticola trilobata (WEDELIA)*

pallida (PURPLE HEART)*

located such that these can be stabilized on the rooftop using staking, guying, support frames, or rootball anchors. The selected tree anchoring methods should complement the conditions of 1) the relevant tree/palm species, 2) the rooftop microclimate, and 3) the roof garden design intent.

F. Sample Plant Species (asterisk* indicates non-native species)

TREES

Koordersiodendron pinnatum (Blanco) Merr. (AMUGIS)

Plumeria obtusa (WHITE KALACHUCHI) *

Saribus rotundifolius (Lam.) Blume (ANAHAW)

Caesalpinia ferrea Mart. ex Tul. (LEOPARD TREE) *

SHRUBS

Ficus lyrata Warb. (FIDDLE-LEAF FIG)

Alocasia portei Schott (WRINKLY NATIVE BADIANG)

*

Syzygium myrtifolium (Roxb.) Walp. (EUGENIA)

Furcraea foetida ‘Striata’ (VARIEGATED FURCRAEA) *

272 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Veitchia merrillii (MANILA PALM)

Costus woodsonii (BUTTON COSTUS)

GROUNDCOVERS

5.4.12. Interior Landscapes

B.Water

Irrigation points for interior plantscapes must be considered before plant selection. This consideration, along with the appropriate irrigation system, is crucial in ensuring proper plant care and maintenance for interior plants. For interior spaces that do not have easily accessible irrigation points, plants with low water requirements may be used.

C.Temperature

Figure 24 Illustrative rendition of interior landscape

Designing interior landscapes have a number of factors that need to be considered to ensure plant survival (Dierlich, D. 2019):

A. Lighting

Lighting for interior planting has three components: intensity, duration, and quality.

Lighting intensity and the duration of availability primarily determine what plant materials are appropriate for the space. As a rule-of-thumb, at least 12-

14 hours of continuous lighting seven days a week should be available to prevent a plant’s decline.

Artificial light should be utilized for interior landscapes in addition to natural light. Uplighting should not be used as the sole lighting source, as it is only partially effective for lighting the upper surface of leaves where most of the plant’s photosynthesis takes place.

Most interior plants are able to thrive in temperatures between 21-25 degrees Celsius. This range is also comfortable for humans located in air-conditioned interior spaces. Excessively hot or cold temperatures or rapid temperature swings of 1-5 degrees can damage plants. It is important to select plant materials that can withstand changes in environmental temperatures, especially as temperatures increase if airconditioning systems are turned off when a building is closed or not operational.

D. Ventilation

Good ventilation for interior plants

Cynodon dactylon Linn. (KAWAD-KAWARAN/BERMUDA GRASS)

Zoysia matrella (L.) Merr. (MANILA LAWN GRASS) -non native Dianella caerulea (FLAX LILY) *

Asystasia gangetica ‘Ivory Ribbons’ (VARIEGATED PRIMROSE)

is required to prevent heat buildup around foliage in high light (the greenhouse effect) and possible foliar burn.

The location of plants in the direct path of air discharge, especially evaporators, must also be considered

F. Relative Humidity

E. Pollution

Plants can be sensitive to the relative humidity of building interiors. Air conditioning can reduce humidity to 30-50 percent, which may become a problem for delicate plants. Electric humidifiers and water fountains can counteract these conditions and may be installed near planting areas.

TREES

SHRUBS

Although interior plants are not subject to exterior pollutants such as vehicular exhaust emissions, they may be subject to other types of pollutants such as indoor cleansing agents, including soaps, bleach, and ammonia, which can accidentally spill into or be sprayed on planting areas and cause severe harm to plants. Heavy concentrations of VOCs as well as cigarette smoke in enclosed spaces also affect plant well-being. Repeated exposure to chlorine can also affect the health of plants located beside swimming pools. Minimizing the exposure of indoor plants to these types of pollutants ensures their health and well-being.

G. Access

A key design consideration for installing interior plant materials is how to transport them to their designated locations. This typically becomes a logistical issue, especially if the plant is a tree or large shrub that has considerable size and weight.

Most of the time, the allowable size of a plant is dictated by the size of possible access points, includes doorway and elevators. Large trees can be installed using machinery before a building is completed. However, construction dust, debris, and machinery must be managed after the tree has been planted into place to prevent any damage to it.

274 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

H. Sample Plant Species for Interiors (asterisk* indicates non-native species)

Ficus lyrata Warb. (FIDDLE-LEAF FIG)

Veitchia merrillii (MANILA PALM)

Cycas revoluta (SAGO PALM) *

Ravenala madagascariensis Sonn. (TRAVELLER’S PALM) *

Aglaonema commutatum Schott (COMMON AGLAONEMA)

Asplenium nidus (BIRD’S NEST FERN)

GROUNDCOVERS

5.5. Planting Design Practice

5.5.1.

Applicable Codes and Standards

Unlike construction materials used for hard landscaping, universally accepted and enforceable commercial softscape standards do not exist. There is a need to standardize horticultural practices and planting standards in the Philippines to ensure quality control.

When it comes to the supply and installation of softscape materials, local practices vary widely among nursery growers, contractors, and suppliers. Ideally, all stakeholders across the local landscaping industry are provided with a governmentmandated code of practice and product standards to provide a common language that facilitates communication and avoids confusion. Until the Philippine government enforces such standards, the following references may serve as guidelines to govern the local practice of softscape planting design, supply, construction, and maintenance. Applicable Philippine National

Standards listed in this section can be used as references for design and environmental considerations.

A. Standard Nomenclature (Botanical Names)

a.Co’s Digital Flora of the Philippines – This is a free, online resource that is continuously updated. Website: https://www.philippineplants. org.

Edited by Pelser, P.B., J.F. Barcelona & D.L. Nickrent. Copyright 2011 onwards.

B. Standards for commercial plant classification, quality, grading, and supply

a.ANSI Z60.1 American Standards for Nursery Stock

C. Design and Environmental Considerations Standards

a.ISO 11091:1994 Construction drawings. Landscape drawing practice (currently being reviewed)

b.ISO 7519 Technical drawings. Construction drawings. General principles of presentation for general arrangement and assembly drawings

Rhapis excelsa (RHAPIS) *

Sansevieria trifasciata ‘Laurentii’ (VARIEGATED SNAKE PLANT) *

Davallia denticulata (Burm.) Mett. (RABBIT’S FOOT FERN)

Piper brevicaule (WILD BETEL)

Chlorophytum capense (SPIDER PLANT LOURDES) *

Dissotis rotundifolia (Sm.) Triana (SPANISH SHAWL) *

c.PNS/BAFS 203 Good agricultural practices for Non-food agricultural commodities

d.PNS/BAFS/PAES 217 Determination of irrigation water requirements

e.PNS/BAFS/PAES 223 Design of a pressurized irrigation system – Part A: Sprinkler Irrigation

Architectural Planting Plans, where the designated quantity and location of specific plant species are identified on the drawing. The plant’s common name usually supplements this to assist the local supplier in identifying the plant.

On the other hand, common names are how people in a specific locality identify or call a plant or plant groups. Laypersons – or those not strictly in the landscaping or plant industry – use common names for plant identification.

additional cultivars, or Group epithets.

5.5.3. Specifying Planting Materials

A. ANSI Plant Specifications

f.PNS/BAFS/PAES 224 Design of a pressurized irrigation system – Part B: Drip Irrigation

g.PNS/BAFS/PAES 231 Groundwater irrigation – Shallow tubewell

h.PNS/BAFS/PAES 232 Wastewater re-use for irrigation

5.5.2. Plant Identification

In softscape design, it is important to identify plants by using both their botanical and common names.

Scilla hispanica var. campanulata ‘ Rose Queen’

1 2 3 4

Figure 25. Example of a four-part botanical name

A plant’s botanical name is a formal scientific name that may be one, two, three, or four parts. A twopart botanical name is usually the minimum requirement for Landscape

Botanical names are assigned to provide a single, universally accepted name for a plant or plant group (Turland, N., et al., 2018). Ficus pseudopalma, for example, is a small tree known by several common names, such as niyog-niyugan in Tagalog, and lubi-lubi in Visayan. Its botanical name ensures correct identification of the tree regardless of location and the local language used.

However, this method is not reliable for design and construction purposes as the names vary in different regions.

ANSI Z60.1 – The American Standards for Nursery Stock standardizes the specification of plant materials to include the following information (American Horticulture Industry Association, 2020):

a.Plant identification – botanical and common names

The International Code of Nomenclature (ICN) for algae, fungi, and plants governs the standards for botanical names. In contrast, the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants (ICNCP) is the standard for plant cultigens,

b.Plant sizes by caliper, height, or width as appropriate to plant type, except for certain perennials c.Plant size intervals d.Container class specification

e.Shearing (cutting) specifications for evergreens

It also prescribes standard methods of plant stock measurement, including: a.How and when to measure using a caliper

b.How and when to measure using height and spread

c.How and when to measure using height only

Some practitioners also include the following to ensure their design intent is clearly understood and followed:

a. Container type and size

document describing in detail the scope of work, materials to be used, method of installation, and quality of workmanship for a parcel of work to be placed under contract.”

Furthermore, it standardizes minimum plant quality requirements that suppliers should meet for different plant classes, whether nursery-grown, plantation-grown, or collected from the wild. These requirements include plant health, stem designations, pruning, habit, rootball size, and growing containers.

B. Common Practices

One common practice in specifying softscape materials is to call out plants individually in the Landscape Architectural drawings known as the Planting Plan, and subsequently list them once more in a Consolidated

Plants List or Planting Schedule with the following information:

b. Form and pruning requirements, especially for trees and specimen planting

c. Plant photos

It is common for the Landscape Architect to compute and indicate plant quantities, both in the Planting Plan call-outs and in the Planting Schedule. Although generally accepted in practice, this is redundant and unnecessary, as the Bill of Quantities already contains this information. Furthermore, the responsibility for determining actual quantities lies with the quantity surveyor or the landscaping contractor, not the Landscape Architect.

It is “usually utilized in conjunction with working (contract) drawings in building construction.”

32 – Exterior Improvements. Planting is assigned under sub-Division 329000, while Planting Maintenance is assigned under sub-Division 320100 (also known as Operation and Maintenance of Exterior Improvements). Wetlands are assigned to 327000, and Irrigation to 328000.

a. Plant name – botanical and common names

b. Planting interval

c. Plant dimensions (height, or height and width)

5.5.4.

Technical Specifications

The term “specifications” is defined by the Dictionary of Landscape Architecture and Construction (Christensen, 2005) as “a written

The most common technical specifications format used in the Philippines is the “MasterFormat,” created by the US Construction Specifications Institute and Construction Specifications Canada. It is comprised of fifty (50) Divisions (CSI & CSC, 2016). Each section of the MasterFormat Specifications is divided into three parts: a. General – delineating the scope of the section, general requirements, reference standards, and crossreferences to other sections; b. Products – description of materials requirements, delivery, storage, special requirements, and others; and c.Execution – setting out workmanship requirements, methods of application/ installation, tools, duration, etc. Plant-related specifications are generally classified under Division

Below is the comprehensive list of plant-related subsections under Sections 320100 and 329000, as of April 2016: 320180 OperationandMaintenanceof Irrigation 320190 OperationandMaintenanceof Planting

320190.13 Fertilizing 320190.16 Amending Soils 320190.19 Mowing 320190.23 Pruning 320190.26 Watering 320190.29 Topsoil Preservation 320190.33 Tree and Shrub Preservation 329100 Planting Preparation 329113 Soil Preparation 329116 Planting Soil Stabilization 329119 Landscape Grading

329200 Turf and Grasses

329213 Hydro-Mulching 329216 Plugging 329219 Seeding 329223 Sodding 329226 Sprigging 329300 Plants 329313 Ground Covers 329323 Plants and Bulbs 239333 Shrubs 329343 Trees 329400 Planting Accessories 329500 Exterior Planting Support Structures 329600 Transplanting 329613 Ground Cover Transplanting 329623 Plant and Bulb Transplanting 329633 Shrub Transplanting 329643 Tree Transplanting

5.6. Planting Installation

5.6.1.

Applicable Codes and Standards

The following standards govern preplanting and planting installation operations:

1.ANSI A300 Pt 1 Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Management-Standard Practices (Pruning)

2.ANSI A300 Pt 3 Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant Management -Standard Practices (Supplemental Support Systems)

5.6.2. Site and Soil Preparation

A. Existing Vegetation

a.Protection

Existing vegetation to be preserved must be marked with temporary fencing. Appropriate fence posts must be placed at adequate spacing and depth to support the fence in an upright position completely.

Disturbance to existing vegetation should be minimized by locating temporary roadways and pathways at an adequate distance and ensuring they follow existing contours to avoid unnecessary grading.

B. Planting Media

a. Soil (Topsoil)

Other locally used international technical specifications include the National Building Specifications (NBS) by the UK Royal Institute of Building Architects, and NatSpec (Australia).

3.ANSI A300 Pt 5 Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Management-Standard Practices (Management of Trees and Shrubs During Site Planning, Site Development, and Construction)

4.ANSI A300 Pt 6 Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Management-Standard Practices (Planting and Transplanting)

Materials staging and chemical storage areas should likewise be located away from existing vegetation and trees.

Soil is a blend of minerals, organic matter, air, water, and soil organisms that produce nourishment plants rely on for growth. It is often overlooked at a construction site, but if damaged, whether by grading, compaction, or trenching, it may disrupt its ability to provide nourishment to plants (Sauter, 2011). Care should thereby be taken to ensure that the soil prepared in any landscape development creates suitable living conditions for the plants that will be installed.

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

b. Soil Mixes (potting soil)

c. Peat Moss

d. Lightweight Expanded Clay

e. Compost

Soil mixes, also known as potting soil, or potting mix, comprise various ingredients that provide a healthy environment for potted plants to grow. These mixes are designed to keep the soil from becoming too compacted, suffocating roots, and impeding the flow of water and nutrients. A high-quality potting mix is lightweight, fluffy, and has good moisture retention.

This medium is made of decomposed Sphagnum species and has excellent water retention but does not last long due to its organic nature.

It is commonly used in growing orchids and carnivorous plants like the Venus Fly Trap and Sundews. It is not a renewable resource.

This material is made by heating clay to high temperatures to create large pores. The material is shaped in rounded pellets, making it easier to handle. It has good porosity but little to no nutrients.

This medium is a result of decomposed plant or animal material. It is rich in nutrients and has good moisture retention.

f. Perlite

g. Pumice

h. Washed Sand

i.Vermiculite

This material is made by heating silica at a high temperature and is highly porous. It is typically added to soil to improve drainage. It lasts for a long time due to its inorganic nature but crumbles when pressure is applied.

This mix is made of light-colored, porous volcanic rocks. It is often used as a soil ameliorant to improve drainage. It is also lightweight, making it a popular choice for vertical greenery.

A complex mixture of small, inorganic mineral particles is used to improve soil texture and drainage. It is also suitable for seed germination and rooting plants as it provides good aeration.

This light material is made from mica and does not crumble. It is added to soil to improve drainage and nutrientholding capacity. It also facilitates the consistent release of nutrients for plant uptake.

j.Charcoal

k.Coco Peat

5.6.3. Planting Installation Process

A. Pre-planting

After delivery to the site and prior to installation, plant stocks should be inspected to ensure they conform to required specifications, including species and cultivar, height and spread, correct pot size, and form. Their overall condition and appearance should also be checked to ensure optimum health and the absence of pests, disease, and damage.

B. Planting Layout

This medium is made from burnt plant materials. Large pieces of this are usually used for growing orchids, while smaller pieces are mixed with soil to improve drainage.

This material is made from coconut husks. It is granular, making it loose and light and suitable for improving soil drainage and texture. It is generally inexpensive.

Plant installation begins with identifying the softscape locations. Different layout methods may be used, the simplest by setting down the plants in their designated locations while still in their containers. This layout method allows the designer to identify any problems and adjust plant locations before setting them in their permanent planting medium. Softscape areas may also be laid out by marking designated areas with the use of string or paint (Sauter, 2011).

The spacing of plants is often specified on the Planting Plan or Plant Schedule. Typical spacing dimensions use the

abbreviation “O.C.,” which stands for “on-center,” and specifies the distance between the centers of adjacent plants of the same kind. Two types of spacing may be used: grid or triangular. Grid spacing is used to uniformly space plants into equidistant rows and columns. In contrast, triangular spacing is used to position plants to avoid significant gaps, typical of grid spacing. In triangular spacing, rows are placed slightly closer together than the plant’s diameter, and every other row is offset halfway, such that if the centers of the three closest plants located in adjacent rows are connected with a line, a triangle is formed (Ibid., 2011).

C. Soil Excavation and Installation

Excavating a good planting hole is as essential to plant survival as selecting a quality plant. A plant often fails to survive because it is installed too high or low, or the planting hole is undersized or not adequately prepared (Ibid, 2011). After proper hole excavation has been done, plant installation follows. The following illustrations provide details for the proper installation of plants, depending on how they are delivered to the site.

a. Installing bare-root plants a b c d

d. Installing boxed plants c. Installing balled and burlapped plants b. Installing container plants

a b c d

a b c d

a b c d

HIGHLIGHTS

Unlike construction materials used for hard landscaping, universally accepted and enforceable commercial softscape standards do not exist. There is a need to standardize horticultural practices and planting standards in the Philippines to ensure quality control. Botanical names are assigned to provide a single, universally accepted name for a plant or plant group (Turland, N., et al., 2018).

A.On-grade Planting a. Deciduous Tree On- grade

PLANTING DETAILS

Planting on Grade

tree fabrics with grommets

locate anchor stakes (3) 18” away from tree trunk. t-rail iron stake or acceptable wooden substitute, anchor firmly tree wrap - 30% overlap to second branches, remove in spring. (omit tree wrap on aspen) mulch 3” thk

ropes @ top of ball shall be cut. remove top 1/3 of burlap. remove top 1/3 of basket & all twine.

firmly formed saucer (use topsoil). angle of repose varies with steepness of slope and soil type (where directed only).

undisturbed soil - dig pit to proper depth.

b. Shrub On- grade b. Coniferous Tree On- grade

remove from container and loosen roots slightly by scratching sides of rootball before planting & freeing girdling roots.

create saucer on downhill side - (3” max.)

planting soil mulch - 3” thk.

undisturbed soil - dig pit to proper depth. roughen sides of pit when planting in undisturbed soil

(planting area should not be less than 2x the ball diamater)

remove from container and loosen roots slightly by scratching sides of rootball before planting & freeing girdling roots.

create saucer on downhill side - (3” max.)

planting soil

(planting area should not be less than 2x the ball diamater)

mulch - 3” thk.

undisturbed soil - dig pit to proper depth. roughen sides of pit when planting in undisturbed soil

stakes (3 per) see specs. for size and material

guy wires (3), white flag on each to increase visibility; (remove after 1 full season)

tree fabrics w/ grommets

4

1 2 3 5 6 PLANTING

7

tree fabrics with grommets

locate anchor stakes (3) 18” away from tree trunk. t-rail iron stake or acceptable wooden substitute, anchor firmly

tree wrap - 30% overlap to second branches, remove in spring. (omit tree wrap on aspen) mulch 3” thk

ropes @ top of ball shall be cut. remove top 1/3 of burlap. remove top 1/3 of basket & all twine.

firmly formed saucer (use topsoil). angle of repose varies with steepness of slope and soil type (where directed only).

b. Shrub On Slope Grade

b. Conifer Tree On Slope Grade

remove from container and loosen roots slightly by scratching sides of rootball before planting & freeing girdling roots.

create saucer on downhill side - (3” max.) planting soil mulch - 3” thk.

undisturbed soil - dig pit to proper depth. roughen sides of pit when planting in undisturbed soil

(planting area should not be less than 2x the ball diamater)

remove from container and loosen roots slightly by scratching sides of rootball before planting & freeing girdling roots.

create saucer on downhill side - (3” max.) planting soil (planting area should not be less than 2x the ball diamater) mulch - 3” thk.

undisturbed soil - dig pit to proper depth. roughen sides of pit when planting in undisturbed soil

stakes (3 per) see specs. for size and material tree fabrics w/ grommets

b. Groundcover On Slab

c. Lawn On Slab

prune (to suit species) to remove damaged branches following proper horticultural practices soil separator structural slab to engineer’s details top mulch as specified modular drain cell wrap in geotextile fabric

modular drain cell wrap in geo textile fabric growing medium as specified remove shrubs from pot 3 4 5

1 4 5 6 2

planting as specified refer to planting plan soil mix as specified 30mm thk. modular drain cell

filter fabric waterproofing membrance structural slab to engineer’s details 3

Planting in Ponds

a.

Marginal Planting -

Island common reed rhysome clumps placed as top layer in a gabion set at normal water level gabion held in place with a stake water level

b. Marginal Planting - Outside Pond

c. Marginal Planting - Inside Pond

precast concrete slab thick mortar layer to secure capping water level

solid bockwork with lean concrete mix liner underlay sharp sand 50mm

precast concrete slab thick mortar layer to secure capping water level solid bockwork with lean concrete mix liner underlay sharp sand 50mm planting ledge concrete slab support for ledge

PLANTING DETAILS

Planting in Ponds

common reed rhysome (clumps placed as top layer in a gabion set at normal water level) gabion held in place with a stake water level plants set in basket

3

1 1 1 2 3 4

5

e. 3 4

Submerged water plants f. Other Configurations 4 5

F. Root Barriers

G. Staking

H. Tree Collar Protector

Root barriers are installed to protect hardscapes and softscapes from damage caused by the root intrusion of an existing or newly installed plant. They are versatile and made of extremely tough but pliable polyethylene that can be formed into any shape and size.

They are typically used around building foundations for structural protection and golf courses to separate the greens from invasive grass and clay soils. By preventing root damage to sensitive areas, root barriers ultimately help reduce a development’s maintenance costs.

When a tree or palm is newly installed, staking is necessary to support it until it is fully established. All tree saplings, instant trees, or single stem palms must be staked to ensure survival. The two types of staking methods are as follows:

Tree collar protectors are provided for tree saplings, instant trees, and single stem palms. A tree collar protector is usually made of PVC tube with dimensions 200mm length x 75mm diameter x 2mm thickness and has a slit cut along the entire length of the tube.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 26. Linear Application

Figure 27. Circular Application

Figure 28. Methods of Tree Staking (Single, Double, Triple)

I. Mulching

Mulching must be done shortly after plant installation. It is a necessary procedure to retain soil moisture, reduce weed growth, and improve the overall fertility and health of the soil. Mulch usually contains composted organic materials such as wood chips, palm husks, and other compost materials. The mix must have a range of 5.5 - 7.0 pH.

5.7. Post-planting Care

5.7.1.

Applicable Codes and Standards

The following international reference standards are commonly used locally to govern post-installation planting maintenance operations. Some materials from these standards have been reproduced in the succeeding subsections to provide pertinent information for this section.

Management)

e.ANSI Z133 Safety Requirements for Arboricultural Operations

5.7.2. Pruning

Trees may be pruned for a number of reasons. These include human safety, tree health and growth management, structural safety or improvement, views and sightlines, and aesthetics.

A.

Pruning Methods

a.ANSI A300 Pt 1 Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Management-Standard Practices (Pruning)

b.ANSI A300 Pt 2 Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Management-Standard Practices (Soil Management: a. Assessment, b. Modification, c. Fertilization, and d. Drainage)

c.ANSI A300 Pt 3 Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Management-Standard Practices (Supplement Support Systems)

d.ANSI A300 Pt 7 Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Management-Standard Practices (Integrated Vegetation

a.Cleaning – To remove dead, diseased, or broken branches

b.Raising – To provide vertical clearance

c.Reducing – To reduce tree height or spread

d.Thinning – To reduce the density of live branches (no more than 25% of the crown should be removed within a growing season)

B. Pruning Cuts

A pruning cut that removes a branch at its point of origin shall be made close to the trunk or parent branch without

Figure 29. Vertical Mulching Figure 30. Radial Mulching

cutting into the branch bark ridge or branch collar or leaving a stub.

Insert Illustration of pruning cuts (Figs 5.3.2.a, 5.3.3, and 5.3.8 of ANSI A300 (Part 1)

C.Palm pruning

Palms must be pruned when fronds, fruits, or loose petioles become safety hazards. Live, healthy fronds above 45 degrees should not be removed, except when encroaching on power lines.

Insert Illustration of pruning cuts (Figs 8.3.a and 8.3.b of ANSI A300 (Part 1)

D. Utility Pruning

The purpose of utility pruning is to prevent loss of service (e.g., telecommunication, electrical, water services, etc.), but it must be conducted in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A300 (Part 1). It may be necessary to deviate from the required techniques for special circumstances or emergencies when services need to be restored as quickly as possible. However, corrective pruning should be done immediately following the emergency.

5.7.3. Fertilization

Fertilization is a necessary maintenance process to supply nutrients to plants to achieve a defined plant management objective. It should be done in a safe, sustainable manner beneficial for the plant itself and the environment.

d.Soil pH

e. Plant conditions such as disease, insect infestation, herbicide damage f. Soil modification – If nutrient uptake needs to be improved, this should be considered prior to selecting a fertilizer.

d. Fertilizers with a salt index of less than 50 are preferred.

D. Fertilization Application Area

a.For most trees and shrubs, the fertilization area should be applied from near the trunk to just beyond the drip line.

A. Safety Fertilization operations shall comply with applicable Occupational Safety and Health standards and other regulations. Fertilizer safety precautions shall be followed for all products.

B.Considerations for Fertilizer Application

a. Site’s proximity to water bodies, slope, and irrigation – This is an important consideration in the event that surface runoff from irrigation or rainfall transports fertilizers into nearby waterbodies.

b. Types and rate of fertilizer to be used

c. Soil or foliar analysis

C. Types and rates of fertilizer a. In the absence of soil and foliar nutrient analysis, fertilizers with higher ratios of P2O5 (phosphorus pentoxide) and K2O (potassium oxide) should be avoided. Ratios should be adjusted based on local knowledge, site conditions, species, age, or plant conditions.

E. Surface Application

a. Fertilizers should be distributed uniformly within the defined fertilization area.

b. Where turf or groundcovers exist, subsurface application should be the preferred method.

b. Slow-release fertilizers should be applied at rates between 1 and 2 kg of actual nitrogen per 100 sqm and should not exceed 2.9 kg of actual nitrogen per 100 sqm within 12 months.

c. Quick-release fertilizers should be applied at rates between 0.5 and 1 kg of actual nitrogen per 100 sqm per application and shall not exceed 2 kg actual nitrogen per 100 sqm every 12 months.

c. Surface application should not be made where runoff is likely to occur.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

F. Subsurface Application (Dry and Liquid)

a. For dry application, holes 100-200 mm deep and 300-900 mm apart should be dug within the fertilization area, avoiding damage to buttress roots2.

Fertilizer should not be less than 50mm to the soil surface.

A. Pesticide Application

a. Pesticide applications should only be made after monitoring and confirming the presence of pests and only after the failure of cultural or nonchemical pest remedies.

C. Disease Management

b.For liquid injection, locate injection sites 300-900mm apart, avoiding damage to buttress roots.

5.7.4. Pesticides and Weed Control

Pesticides include all herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, and other various substances used to control pests. Application is only made to achieve a defined plant management objective that is most beneficial to the plant and least harmful to the environment.

b. The use of combination products (“weed and feed,” weed control + fertilizer, insect control + fertilizer, etc.) and their “blanket” applications are harmful to the environment and are discouraged.

c. All pesticides must be FDA.[ Food and Drug Administration of the Philippines] approved and applied by an experienced applicator per the label directions.

a. Cultural disease control should be the primary management tool to avoid plant disease. Cultural disease control focuses on appropriate mowing heights (the higher, the better), fertilization programs, irrigation and drainage, soil pH, microenvironments, use of disease-resistant cultivars, cleaning of equipment, record keeping, and disease prevention and management.

b. Only after failure of the above shall chemical management of plant disease be considered.

be managed by creating access to the center of the clump for maintenance purposes by using either the tunnel or the horseshoe technique:

a.Tunnel – A path passing through the center of the clump is created by clearing poles from one end to the other b. Horseshoe – A path from the periphery to the center of the clump is created

5.7.6.

Special Considerations: Water plants

2 Buttress roots are aerial extensions of lateral surface roots and form only in certain species. Buttress roots stabilize the tree, especially in shallow saturated soils, resisting toppling (Britannica, n.d.).

B. Weed control

a. Weed control measures include hand-pulling or herbicide spot treatment before the weeds flower. Hoeing requires care, skill, and close supervision to avoid damage to plants. Digging between transplants is discouraged. Where necessary, the mulch layer should be topped up to its original depth (Thoday, 2016).

5.7.5.

Special Considerations: Bamboos

A. Culm Maintenance

The growth of invasive bamboos should be restricted by using a solid underground barrier. Rhizomes growing out at the edge should be cut off at soil level, together with the older culms, as needed.

B. Clump Management

Congested or clustered bamboos can

Wetland plant communities are self-maintaining and will grow, die, and regrow each year. The primary objective in vegetation management is to maintain the desired plant communities within the wetland. This is achieved through changes in the water levels and harvesting undesired plants, like weeds, when and where necessary. Where plant cover is deficient, management activities to improve cover may include water level adjustment, reduced loadings, pesticide application, and replanting (UN-HABITAT, 2008).

298 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

C H A P T E R 5.0

PLANTING

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS AND REFERENCES

Planting selection always play a role in creating the perfect ambience and setting for every kind of project a Landscape Architect is involved in.

Sketch by Ian Reimon Buyco

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figures and Tables Page

Figure 1. The Planting Design Process

Figure 2. Photo of Academic Oval, UP Diliman

By : Mic Caldo

Figure 3. Massing of plants create horizontal forms, enframed by vertical forms of adjacent trees and other elements in the landscape.

Figure 4. Coarse planting at the perimeter make the space feel smaller

Figure 5. Fine planting texture at the perimeter make the space feel larger

Figure 6. Examples of foliage colors

Figure 7. Variety of plant materials in a tropical hospitality setting

Figure 8. The repetition of palms in this space, create a sense of enclosure and balance.

Figure 9. Formal or symmetrical balance is shown in plaza and an assymterical balance in composition of a multi-level plaza

Figure 10. Palms at the center of an arcaded plaza act as the focal point of the space, giving emphasis to the planting area

Figure 11. Planting composition create persoonal ef fect or impression on the user

Figure 12. Various massing strategies were incorporated in this pocket seating area

Figure 13. More variety and less repetition is desirable in small spaces

Figure 14. Ecological areas in the landscape

Figure 15. Ecosystem services (Living Planet Report, WWF 2016)

Figure 16. Urban Forest

Figure 17. Coastal Landscape illustration

Figure 18. Illustrative landscape of Roadsides and Utility Corridors

Figure 19. Waterways and Waterbodies Illustrative landscape

Figure 20. Illustration of a constructed wetland

Figure 21 Illustrative landscape (Botanic Gardens)

Figure 22. Illustrative landscape (Zoo and Butterfly Gardens)

219 221 221 221 221 221 222 222 222 223 223 223 223 223 223 224 225 228 229 231 235 239 241 242

SUMMARY OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figures and Tables Page

Figure 23. Illustrative landscape of Permaculture Gardens

Figure 24. Illustrative rendition of interior landscape

Figure 25. Example of a four-part botanical name

Figure 26. Root Barrier - Linear Application

Figure 27. Root Barrier - Circular Application

Figure 28. Methods of Tree Staking (Single, Double, Triple)

Figure 29. Vertical Mulching

Figure 30. Radial Mulching

246 253 256 274 274 274 275 275

REFERENCES

Acquaah, George (2009). Horticulture: Principles and Practices (4th ed.). New Jersey, USA: Pearson Education, Inc.

Akinlabi, E., Anane-Fenin, K. & Akwada, D. (2017). Bamboo: The Multipurpose Plant. Springer International Publishing AG American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (2011). Roadside Design Guide (4th edition). AASHTO.

Ambal, R., et al. (2012). Key biodiversity areas in the Philippines: priorities for conservation. Journal of Threatened Taxa 4(8): 2788–2795. Retrieved from https://threatenedtaxa.org/index.php/JoTT/article/view/784/1403

Aruninta, A. (2016). Landscape Architectural Design and Construction Technology. Chulalongkorn University Press/Alpha Science International Ltd.

Austin, R.L. (2002). Elements of Planting Design. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Austin, G. & Yu, K. (2016). Constructed wetlands and sustainable development. Routledge. Oxon.

Auckland Council (2021). Managing our plants and gardens. Auckland Botanic Gardens Plant Collections Guidelines 2021. Retrieved from https://www.aucklandbotanicgardens.co.nz/media/3955/combined-pcg-for-website.pdf

Barrie, F. R., Greuter, W., Hawksworth, D. L., Herendeen, P. S., Knapp, S., Kusber, W.-H., Li, D.-Z., Marhold, K., May, T. W., McNeill, J., Monro,A.M.,Prado,J.,Price,M.J.,Smith,G.F.,Turland,N.J.,Wiersema,J.H.(eds.)(2018). International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants (Shenzhen Code) adopted by the Nineteenth International Botanical Congress Shenzhen, China, July 2017. Regnum Vegetabile 159. Glashütten: Koeltz Botanical Books. DOI httpps://doi.org/10.12705/Code.2018

Bassuk, N. (2017). Site assessment: the key to sustainable urban landscape establishment. Routledge Handbook of Urban Forestry: Chapter 20. Routledge. Oxon.

Bayside City Council. (2015). Green Roofs, Walls and Facades: Building design for a sustainable future. Retrieved from https:// www.bayside.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/ sustainability _and_environment/imap_08-1_green_roofwallfacade_v3_ nov_2015_gen.pdf

REFERENCES

Beechie, T., Roni, P. (2013). Stream and Watershed Restoration: A Guide to Restoring Riverine Processes and Habitats. WileyBlackwell/John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., Publications.

Biodiversity Management Bureau (2015). Guidebook to protected areas of the Philippines. Biodiversity Management Bureau – Department of Environment and Natural Resources. Philippines. Retrieved from https://www.denr.gov.ph/images/ DENR_Publications/PA_Guidebook_Complete.pdf

Botanic Gardens Conservation International. (n.d.) Role of Botanic Gardens. Retrieved from https://www.bgci.org/about/ about-botanic-garden/

Brickell, C. (2019). Encyclopedia of Plants and Flowers. DK.

Buot, I., Jr., Flores, J. (2021). The structure of permaculture landscapes in the Philippines. Biodiversitas, Volume 22, No. 4. DOI: 10.13057/biodiv/d220452.

Carandang, W., Lasco, R. (1998). Successful Reforestation in the Philippines: Technical Considerations. University of the Philppines Los Baños-Institute of Renewable Natural Resources. Retrieved from https://www.nast.ph/images/pdf%20 files/Publications/Other%20Publications%20of%20NAST/Mega%20Issues%20in%20Philippine%20Forestry%20Key/ Mega%202%20Successful%20Reforestation%20in%20the%20Philippines.pdf

Center for Food, Agriculture and the Environment, University of Massachusetts Amherst (CAFE). (2021). Selection and maintenance of plant materials for coastal landscapes. Retrieved from httpps://ag.umass.edu/landscape/factsheets/ selection-maintenance-of-plant-materials-for-coastal-landscapes

Chave, J. (2005). Tree allometry and improved estimation of carbon stocks and balance in tropical forests. Oecologia.

Christians, N., Patton, A., Law, Q. (2017). Fundamentals of Turfgrass Management (5th Edition). John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

REFERENCES

Clark, R. (2011). Selection and maintenance of plant materials for coastal landscapes. University of Massachusetts Amherrst. Extension Landscape, Nursery and Urban Forestry Program. Retrieved from https://ag.umass.edu/landscape/fact-sheets/ selection-maintenance-of-plant-materials-for-coastal-landscapes

CPTED Security. (2005). Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design. Retrieved from htttp://cptedsecurity.com/cpted_ design_guidelines.htm

Decoteau, D.R. (2005). PrinciplesofPlantScience:EnvironmentalFactorsandTechnologyinGrowingPlants. New Jersey, USA: Pearson Education, Inc.

DelPrince, J. (2013). Interior plantscaping: principles and practices. Delmar, CENGAGE Learning. New York.

Department of Energy. (2020). ImplementingRulesandRegulationsofPD11361. Retrieved from https://www.doe.gov.ph/sites/ default/files/pdf/issuances/dc2020-02-0002.pdf

Department of Environment and Primary Industries. (2014). Growing Green Guide: A Guide to Green Roofs, Walls and Facades in Melbourne and Victoria, Australia. State of Victoria.

Department of Public Works and Highways. (2020). Guidelines on the Design of Bicycle Facilities along National Roads.

Department of Public Works and Highways. (2012). Highway Safety Design Standards Part 1: Road Safety Design Manual. Philippines: DPWH.

Dierlich, D. (August 2019). Designconsiderationsforinteriorscapesinairports. Retrieved from httpps://www.aviationpros.com/ airports/consultants/architecture/article/21089853/design-considerations-for-interior-plantscapes-in-airports

Durai, J. & Long, T. (2019). Manual for Sustainable Management of Clumping Bamboo Forest. The International Bamboo and Rattan Organization.

REFERENCES

Eslamian, S., Okhravi, S., Eslamian, F. (2020). Constructed Wetlands: Hydraulic Design. CRC Press/Taylor & Francis Group.

Feming, K. (August 2019). The evolving practice of ecological landscape design. Retrieved from: httpps://thefield.asla. org/2017/08/01/the-evolving-practice-of-ecological-landscape-design/

Ferrini, F., Fini, A., Konijnendijk van den Bosch, C. (2017). Routledge handbook of urban forestry. Routledge. Oxon. Forest Foundation Philippines. (2015). Importance of using native trees in reforestation. Retrieved from https://www. forestfoundation.ph/24native-trees-in-reforestation/

Forrest, M. (2006). Landscape Trees and Shrubs: Selection Use and Management. OX: CABI.

Frediani, K. (2008). The Ethical Use of Plants in Zoos: Informing Selection Choices, Uses and Management Strategies. International Zoo Yearbook: December 2008 DOI: 10.1111/j.1748-1090.2008.00067.x

Garland, L., (May 2020). Native versus non-native: which plants are best for biodiversity? Retrieved from: httpps://www. thenatureofcities.com/2020/05/18/native-versus-non-native-which-plants-are-best-for-biodiversity/

Germany FLL. (n.d.). Guidelines for the Planning, Construction, and Maintenance of Green Roofing – Green Roofing Guidelines 2008 edition.

Global Designing Cities Initiative & National Association of City Transportation Officials. (2016). Global Street Design Guide. Island Press.

Hack, G. (2018). Site Planning: International Practice (Vol. 1, 2 & 3). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

Hartman, J., Pirone, T., Sall, M. (2000). Pirone’s Tree Maintenance (7th ed.). Oxford University Press, Inc.

Hitchmough, J., Fieldhouse K. (2004). Plant User Handbook: A Guide to Effective Specifying. UK: Blackwell Science Ltd.

REFERENCES

Holmgren, D. (2011). Permaculture:principlesandpathwaysbeyondsustainability. Holmgren Design Services. Victoria, Australia.

Houston, C. Craig. (2009). “Conservation Design Guidelines for Botanic Gardens.” All Graduate Theses and Dissertations. 529. https://digitalcommons.usu.edu/etd/529

ISDM. (2016). Green Roofs and Living Walls for Architects. ISDM.

Jim, C. (2017). Constraints to urban trees and their remedies in the built environment. Routledge Handbook of Urban Forestry: Chapter 19. Routledge. Oxon.

Kennen, K. & Kirkwood, N. (2015). Phyto:PrinciplesandResourcesforSiteRemediationandLandscapeDesign. UK: Routledge. Kohl, M., Liese, W. (2015). Bamboo: The Plant and its Uses. Springer International Publishing

Konijnendijik, C., et. al. (2005). Urban Forests and Trees: A Reference Book. The Netherlands: Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg. Landis, T., Riley, L., Riley, S., Steinfield, D., Wilkinson, K. (2007). Roadside Revegetation: An Integrated Approach to Establishing Native Plants. US: Federal Highway Administration U.S. Department of Transportation.

Lexico. (2021). Definition of Softscape. Retrieved from htttps://www.lexico.com/en/definition/softscape

Littlewood, M. (2001). Landscape Detailing Volume 4: Water. Routledge / Taylor & Francis Group.

Lyytimäki, J. (2017). Disservices of urban trees. Routledge Handbook of Urban Forestry: Chapter 12. Routledge. Oxon. Mehta, H., Baez, A. & O’Loughlin, P. (Eds.). (2002). International Ecolodge Guidelines. Burlington, Vermont: The International Ecotourism Society.

Mehta, R. & Singh, D.N. (2018). Design Guidelines for Zoos. Central Zoo Authority. Retrieved from https://biaza.org.uk/plantcare-management accessed 8/21/2021

REFERENCES

McComas, S. (2003). Lake and Pond Management Guidebook. Lewis Publishers.

National Parks Board. (2019). Guidelines on Greenery Provisions & Tree Conservation for Developments.

National Parks Board. (2012). CUGEStandards:GuidelinesonPlantingofTrees,Palms,andTallShrubsforRooftop CS E09.2012.

Padoa-Schioppa, E. & Canedoli, C. (2017). Urban forests and biodiversity. Routledge Handbook of Urban Forestry: Chapter 9. Routledge. Oxon.

Philippine Tropical Forest Conservation Foundation, Inc. (2013). Connecting forests, people and development. Makati City. Poh Choon Hock. (March, 2014). Research Technical Note: Parapets to mitigate wind loads on green roofs.

Primavera, J. & Sabada, R. (2012). Beach forest species and mangrove associates in the Philippines. SEAFDEC Aquaculture Department. Ilo-ilo, Philippines.

Recht, C. & Wetterwald, M. (2001). Bamboos. Chrysalis Books Group

Robinson, N. (2016). The Planting design handbook, 3rd Edition. Routledge. New York.

Roloff, A. (2016). Urban Tree Management for the Sustainable Development of Green Cities. John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.

Sæbø, A. et al. (2017). Urbanforestryandpollutionmitigation. Routledge Handbook of Urban Forestry: Chapter 8. Routledge. Oxon.

Salbitano et al., (2017). Urbanforestbenefitsindevelopingandindustrializingcountries. Routledge Handbook of Urban Forestry: Chapter 10. Routledge. Oxon.

Sauter, D. (2011). Landscape Construction (3rd ed.). NY: Delmar Cengage Learning.

REFERENCES

Scholz-Barth, K., Weiler, S.K. (2009) Green roof systems: a guide to the planning, design and construction of landscapes over structure. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New Jersey.

Sipes, J. & Sipes, M. (2013). Creating green roadways: integrating cultural, natural, and visual resources into transportation. Island Press. Washington D.C.

Speichert, G. & Speichert, S. (2004). Encyclopedia of Water Garden Plants. Timber Press.

Sustainable Sites Initiative. (2007). The Sustainable Sites Initiative, Standards and Guidelines: Preliminary Report. Retrieved from http://www.sustainablesites.org.

Tensile Design and Construct. (n.d.). Fivedesignconsiderationsforlivingwalls. Retrieved from https://www.tensile.com.au/5design-considerations-for-living-walls/

Thoday, P.R. (2016). Plants and Planting on Landscape Sites: Selection and Supervision. OX: CABI.

USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service. Native, invasive, and other plant-related definitions (n.d.). Retrieved from httpps://www.nrcs.usda.gov/wps/portal/nrcs/detail/ct/technical/ecoscience/invasive/?cid=nrcs142p2_011124

US Forest Service. (n.d.) Native gardening – Why garden with native flowers? Retrieved from httpps://www.fs.fed.us/wildflowers/ Native_Plant_Materials/Native_Gardening/index.shtml

UMassCenterforAgriculture,FoodandtheEnvironment. (2021.) Right plant, right place – a plant selection guide for managed landscapes. Retrieved from httpps://ag.umass.edu/landscape/fact-sheets/right-plant-right-place-plant-selection-guidefor-managed-landscapes. UMass Extension Landscape, Nursery and Urban Forestry Program

UN-HABITAT. (2008). Constructed Wetland Manual. UN-HABITAT Water for Asian Cities Programme Nepal, Kathmandu. USC School of Architecture, Fine Arts and Design. (2020). Green 2020: Ridge to Reef: International Conference on Watershed Management and Coastal Conservation. Cebu: University of San Carlos Press.

Walker, T.D. (1991). Planting Design (2nd ed.). New Jersey, USA: New Jersey, USA: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Wyman, Donald. (1960). How to establish an arboretum or botanical garden. Arnoldia: A continuation of the Bulletin of popular information of the Arnold Arboretum, Harvard University Vol. 20, Nos 11-12. Massachusetts.

page is intentionally left blank

312 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

6.0 DETAILS

316 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

This chapter prescribes the minimum requirements for hardscape and softscape construction elements, details, and typical systems that apply when executing landscape projects. In general, these requirements are based on both Philippine and international code standards and guidelines, and best practices observed for landscape projects.

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 7

LANDSCAPE DETAILS

6.1. Introduction

6.2. Definition of Terms

6.3. Hardscape

6.3.1. Scope and Application

6.3.2. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

6.3.3. Paving Applications

6.3.4. Wall Applications

6.3.5. Special Applications

6.4. Site Elements

6.4.1. Scope and Application

6.4.2. Pedestrian Walkways and Facilities A . Typical Walkways B. Ramps C. Steps D. Tactile Walking Surface Indicators (TWSIs) E. Handrails/Guards F. Walls or Guards G. Edge Protection

6.4.3. Streetscape and Vehicular Thoroughfares

A . Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements B. Basic Vehicular Metrics C. Parking D. Curbs and Related Interfaces

E. Curb Ramps

F. Sidewalks and Walkways

G. Raised Medians

H. Traffic Calming Devices

I. Hostile Vehicle Mitigation (HVM)

6.5. Public Realm Elements

6.5.1. Pedestrian Seating

6.5.2. Light Canopy or Shade Structures

6.5.3. Boardwalks and Timber Decks

6.5.4. Fencing and Walls

6.5.5. Playgrounds and Outdoor Fitness Areas

6.5.6. Recreational Sports Facilities

A . Track and Field B. Field Sports C. Typical Court Games

6.5.6. Outdoor Trails

6.5.8. Dog Parks

6.5.9. Site Furniture

A . Trash Bins B. Flagpoles

6.6. Swimming Pools

6.6.1. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

A . Pool Depth Criteria

B. Swimming Pool Design and Construction C. Swimming Pool Capacity

D. Safety for Public Swimming Pools

E. Swimming Pool Components

6.7. Water Features

6.7.1. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

6.7.2. Water Feature Typologies

6.7.3. Underwater Lighting

6.8. Landscape Lighting

6.8.1. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

6.8.2. Outdoor Lighting Typologies

6.9. Signage and Wayfinding for Parks and Open Spaces

6.9.1. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

6.9.2. Signage Graphics

6.10. Softscape Structure Details

6.10.1. Scope and Application

6.10.2. Rooftop Greenery Systems

A . Rooftop Greenery Typologies

B. Design Criteria and Considerations

6.10.3. Vertical Greenery Systems

A . Vertical Greenery Typologies

B. Design Criteria and Considerations

6.11. Landscape Engineering

6.11.1. Landscape Drainage

A . Minimum Requirements

B. Drainage System Typologies

a. Typical Drains Systems

b. Nature-based Drainage Systems

6.11.2. Slope Retention and Erosion Control Systems

A . Minimum Requirements

B. Slope Retention and Erosion Control Typologies

this page is intentionally left blank

6.1 Introduction and Purpose

The goal is to ensure that the development of landscape details enhances the quality of any landscape project and complies with all applicable codes and standards

This chapter prescribes the minimum requirements for hardscape and softscape construction elements, details, and typical systems that apply when executing landscape projects. In general, these requirements are based on both Philippine and international code standards and guidelines, and best practices observed for landscape projects. Applicable local laws, building codes, and ordinances for each topic are cited for reference.

Reading the Detail Drawings

Railing across full width of ramp

More than 200mm rise 1800mmmin

Street Roadway/ Carriageway

It should be noted that specific topics for Design, Materials, and Planting are discussed herein parallel but go into further detail in their respective chapters.

The purpose of this chapter is to provide an initial set of guidelines when developing the landscape details, especially with regard to hardscape, site elements, softscape details, and landscape engineering. The goal is to ensure that the development of landscape details enhances the quality of any landscape project and complies with all applicable codes and standards.

TYPE 1 - Layout

Callouts are directly placed on the illustration

F TOP DIAMETER HALYARD, STAINLESS STEEL WIRE AIRCRAFT CABLE

TYPE 2 - Layout

LEGEND

Ornament

ORNAMENT CAST ALUMINUM REVOLVING TRUCK ASSEMBLY WITH ALUMINUM SPINDLE, STAINLESS STEEL BALL BEARINGS (SEALED BEARINGS ON FLAGPOLES 50° AND OVER), BRASS BUSHING, AND REMOVABLE HOOD

Cast aluminum revolving truck assembly with aluminum spindle, stainless steel ball bearings (sealed bearings on flagpoles 50° and over), brass bushing, and removable hood

Halyard, stainless steel wire aircraft cable

TWO (2) STAINLESS STEEL SWIVEL SNAP HOOKS WITH NEOPRENE COVERS

4 5

COUNTERWEIGHT AND BEADED RETAINER SLING G

Callouts are referred to a legend

WALL THICKNESS ALLOY 6063-T6 TAPERED ALUMINUM TUBE

Two (2) stainless steel swivel snap hooks with neoprene covers

Counterweight and beaded retainer sling

NOTE: FOUNDATION DESIGN FOUNDATION DIMENSIONS DETERMINED BY A QUALIFIED FAMILIAR WITH SITE

6.2. Definition of Terms

6.2.1.

Hardscape

Structures incorporated into a landscape, such as fountains, benches, or gazebos

6.2.2.

Landscape Engineering

The application of mathematics and science to shape land and waterscapes; manipulating soil through grading, drainage, and other land-form processes.

6.2.3. Persons with Disability (PWD)

6.2.5.

Softscape

Vegetation that is incorporated into a landscape, such as shrubs and flowers (Merriam-Webster, 2021)

6.2.6.

SUDS (Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems)

a “SUDS” compliant surface is any surface in which water is allowed to drain through the natural ground or directed directly into an installed soakaway or drainage swale. (Sustainable Drainage, n.d.)

6.3. Hardscape

Includes those who have longterm physical, mental, intellectual, or sensory impairments which in interaction with various barriers may hinder their full and effective participation in society on an equal basis with others (DOH, n.d.)

This section provides an overview of requirements for horizontal and vertical hardscape surfaces, commonly used materials, and basic criteria for selecting the appropriate material for each application.

government agency requirements are provided to guide in the selection of appropriate materials.

6.3.2. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

A. Design Criteria

The use of appropriately selected materials and finishes contribute to the functionality, longevity, and aesthetics of the landscape development. Design criteria considered for materials selection include the following:

6.3.1.

6.2.4.Presidential Decree (P.D.) No. 1096 – Also known as the National Building Code, this law was created to provide the minimum standards and guidelines for all buildings in the Philippines.

Scope and Application

This section describes some of the most common, locally used landscape construction materials 1. Industry references, and local code and

1 Refer to Chapter 5 Materials for detailed descrip tions of hardscape materials

Figure 1. Design Criteria for Landscape Details

Usage – The intended use and activity of a space must be considered to ensure that the material will be durable and suitable to the location. The porosity of the material should match the location’s drainage intent. Impermeable materials are best for surface drainage, while permeable materials are more suited for subsurface drainage. Ideally, both types should comply with Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems (SUDS) guidelines.

a. b. c.

Aesthetics – The aesthetic appeal of a material must add value to the surrounding environment, giving the space a distinct character. Safety – The texture of the material must be considered for surface regularity, slip or skid resistance, and tactile (as well as visual) differentiation between distinct areas. Loose materials, cobbles, or split or cracked paving are uneven and may not be suitable for all conditions. If there is compelling conservation or historical reason to use uneven materials, an alternative walking route using flat materials should be provided

d.

(Interpave, 2008). Sustainability – In general, materials should have minimal impact on the environment. Materials durability is important to minimize replacements and resource consumption. As much as possible, locally sourced materials should be used. Other sustainability considerations for materials include recycled content, SRI 2 value, and porosity 3 (to reduce stormwater run-off). This kind of information can be requested from the materials supplier.

B. Minimum Requirements

Where required, all hardscape materials used in landscaping works shall conform to the Standard Specifications of the Philippine Standard Council. As a minimum requirement, hardscape specifications shall be based on the

2 The Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) is a measure of a surface’s ability to reject solar heat. It is defined so that a standard black is 0 and a standard white is 100 (Heat Island Group, 2021).

3 Porosity is the quality of being porous, or full of tiny holes, to allow passage through the material, such as water

b.

Department of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) specification for site development. Hardscape design should also consider requirements mandated by the National Building Code (Presidential Decree No. 1096, S.1977) and the Philippine Green Building Code, including any local government ordinance relating to Green Building policies. Voluntary compliance to green building rating systems such as LEED4, BERDE5, WELL6, and GREEEN7 is recommended.

c.

As per Rule No. 8 of the National Building Code, the maximum Percentage Site Occupancy (PSO) including Total Open Space with Lot (TOSL) with respect to the Total Lot Area (TLA) shall fall within the two types:

• Paved or Tiled Hardscape Areas (Impervious Surface Area or ISA)

• Unpaved Areas within the lot (Unpaved Surface Area or USA)

GREEN BUILDING POLICIES BY LGUS

Quezon City

4 Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, or LEED for short, is a global green building certification program established by the US Green Building Council (USGBC).

5 Building for Ecologically Responsive Design Excellence, or BERDE for short, is a local green building certification program established by the Philippine Green Building Council (PHILGBC).

6 An international, performance-based, health and wellness certification program for the built environment established by the International WELL Building Institute (IWBI).

7 Geared for Resiliency and Energy Efficiency for the Environment, or GREEEN for short, is a local green building certification program established by the Philippine Green Building Initiative (PGBI).

Mandaluyong

New projects from 1000 sqm. may apply for certain green building tax credits

With regard to the open space utilization of hardscape or softscape areas, all building occupancies shall require a minimum of 50 percent of the required Unpaved Surface Area (USA) to be vegetated with indigenous and adaptable species (Presidential Decree No. 1096, 1977). a.

City

Pasig City

New projects from 5, 000 sqm Requirement for existing buildings at least 1,000 sqm Incentives on BHL, FAR, RPTD on machinery and equipment

Buildings above 10, 000 sqm floor area in PUDs heritage or cultural buildings and post-disaster shelters and structures are exempted from the ordinance. Adopted BERDE as the tool for verification.

Cebu Province Adopted BERDE as the tool for verification

Mandaue City

Public buildings and PUDs, heritage or cultural and postdisaster shelters and structures are exempted from the ordinance

Adopted BERDE as the tool for verification.

Table 1. Green building policies by local government units (LGUs)

6.3.3. Paving Applications

A. Pedestrian and Vehicular

a.Typical Paving Materials

• Precast Unit Paving

• Asphalt or Bituminous Surfacing

• In Situ Concrete

• Natural Stone Paving

• Ceramic or Porcelain Tiles

• Modular Tiles

• Tactile Tiles

• Permeable Paving (Porous Concrete, Grass Pavers, Gravel, and the like)

• Architectural Wood or Composite Timber

B. Sports and Safety Surfacing

a.Synthetic Surfacing (EPDM, Artificial Turf) b.Asphalt Surfacing

C. Permeable or Recycled Material Surfacing

a.Porous Concrete b.Recycled Plastic in Asphalt or

Figure 2. Samples of paving finishes and applications

6.3.4. Wall Applications

A. Cladding and Finishing

a.Typical Wall Materials

• Decorative Cement Plaster

• Natural Stone Cladding

• Masonry Units

• ArchitecturalWoodorComposite Timber

• Architectural Cast Stone or Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete

6.3.5. Special Applications

A. Landscape Structures and Vertical Elements (e.g., Fencing, Gates, Railings, to give a few examples)

a.Landscape Metal Fabrication

• Aluminum

• Galvanized or Stainless Steel

• Weathering Steel

• Hardwood or Composite Timber

B. Site Furnishing and Artwork

a.Landscape Metal Fabrication

• Aluminum

• Galvanized Steel or Stainless Steel

• Weathering Steel

b. Precast Concrete or Fiberglass or Plastics

• Architectural Cast Stone

• Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete

• UV-Resistant Plastic

• UltraHigh-PerformanceConcrete

Figure 3. Samples of wall finishes & applications

6.4. Site Elements

This section serves as a guide for the various elements typically included in landscape projects. It serves as reference in the proper selection of site elements based on the considerations indicated in this section.

b. Public Realm Elements

d. Swimming

Pools

The guidelines presented have been ensured to align with the relevant international codes and industry standards.

6.4.1. Scope and Application

This chapter is divided into six sections:

This section covers site furniture typically used within public outdoor spaces such as traffic bollards, seating devices, bike racks, rubbish bins, artwork, and the like. This subsection discusses the proper selection of site furniture based on aesthetics, function, durability, safety, and scale, whether bespoke or propriety.

c. Outdoor Furniture Elements

e.

Water Features

f. Landscape Lighting

g.

Signage and Wayfinding

a. Pedestrian Walkways and Facilities

This section covers the widths, grades, distancing standards, and streetscapes of thoroughfares. At the master planning level, these elements are created in collaboration with urban and regional planners, and civil and traffic engineers to create safe, comfortable, and sustainable thoroughfare environments for pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

This section provides details for outdoor furniture elements, which make up the typical elements in the public realm and interface elements between pedestrian and vehicular thoroughfares. This can vary broadly, as these can be bespoke or commercially available in the construction market. Existing applicable standards are provided to ensure the durability, safety, and ease of use regarding anthropometric and ergonomic considerations. Site elements can be further detailed collaboration with product designers and structural engineers.

These last four sections, namely Swimming Pools, Water Features, Landscape Lighting, and Signage and Wayfinding, are specialist elements that require collaboration with allied professions. The Landscape Architect takes the lead in the design, while the engineers and other specialists provide support for the technical aspects such as lighting, structure, mechanical systems, and plumbing design.

a. Surface finish – Walkway must have a firm, stable, and slip-resistant surface (HSE, 2012). Hard constructed surfaces can fall under the slip resistance metric, which is based on DIN 51130 (R-Value Slipperiness) and DIN 51097 (ABC Slipperiness), where acceptable grade for outdoor-grade walkways is R-10 and above (DIN 51130), or Class C (DIN 51097). See the table below for detailed descriptions of the slip resistance measurements (Skheme 2021).

REVIEW NOTES:

Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements for Hardscape

6.4.2. Pedestrian Walkways and Facilities

A. Typical Walkways

For an outdoor walkway to be deemed satisfactory for pedestrian use, it must meet the following minimum criteria:

Paving Applications

Pedestrian and Vehicular

Sports and Safety Surfacing

Permeable or Recycles Materials Surface

Special Applications 1. Landscape Material Fabrication

Site Furnishing and Artwork

External Pavements and Ramps

External ramps including sloping driveways, footpaths, etc. steeper than 1 in 14.

External ramps including sloping driveways, foot paths, etc unders 1:14, external sales areas (e.g. markets), external carpark areas, external colonnades walkways, pedestrian crossings, balconies, veranda, carposts, driveways, courtyards and roof decks

Undercover car parks

Hotels, Office, Public Buildings, Schools and Kindergarten

Entries and access areas including hotels, offices, public buildings, schools, kindergarten, coomon areas of public buildings, internal lift lobbies

Wet area

Transitional area

Dry Area

Toilet facilities in offices, hhotels and shopping centres

Hotel apartment bathrooms, ensuites and toilets

Hotel apartment kitchens and laundries

Supermarkets and Shopping Centres

Fast food outlets, buffet food servery areas, food courts and fast food dining areas in shopping centres

Shop and supermarket fresh fruit and vegetable areas

Shop entry areas with external entrances

Supermarket aisles (except fresh food areas)

Other separate shope inside shpping centres (wet)

Other separate shope inside shpping centres (dry)

Loading Docks, Commercial Kitches, Cold Stores, Serving Areas

Loading docks undercover and commercial kitches

Serving areas behind bars in public hotels and clubs, cold stores and freezers

Swimming Pools and Sporting Facilities

Swimming pool ramps and stairs leading to water

Swimming pool surrounds and communal shower rooms

Communal changing rooms

Undercover concourse areas of sports stadiums

Hospitals and Aged Care Facilities

bathrooms and ensuites in hospitals and aged care facilities

Wards and corridors in hospital and aged care facilities.

P5 P4 P3

R12 R11 R10

P3 P2 P1 ( see note 2) P3 P2 P2

R10 R9 R9 R10 A R9

b. Clearances – New developments must observe the minimum width of 1.20m, clear of any obstructions (seating, bollards, and others) along the path. Walkway widths can be 1.0m for old developments and tight curb ramps, subject to the approval of the local planning official. The minimum vertical clearance required is 2.10m, free and clear of any obstructions such as shade elements and tree/plant branches. In exceptional cases where walkways will be used for emergency vehicle access, adequate clearance must be considered following the local planning regulations.

fall on one side following the intended direction of run-off drainage.

e. Entry points to a sidewalk or walkway – Building entry points (doors, tunnels) and interconnected walkways separated by a gate, bollard rows, and the like must have a minimum clear opening of 850mm to allow passage of one individual in a wheelchair.

f. Surface Openings – Openings must not allow passage of an object more than 25mm in diameter; elongated slots must be ideally oriented perpendicular to the direction of travel.

P3 P3 P3 P1 ( see note 3) P3 P1 ( see note 3 )

R10 R10 R10 R9 R10 R9

P5 P4

R12 R11

P5 P4 P3 P3

C B A R10

c. Running Slope – Walkways should not be steeper than 1:20 (5%). In exceptional cases where this slope is impossible to attain (such as sidewalks beside steep roadways), walkways may be subject to classification as a ramp, and appropriate landings and railings must be provided. This is subject to the study and approval of the local building official.

g. Expansion - joints and grate openings should be no more than 12.50mm maximum (Batas Pambansa Blg. 344, 1983).

h. Thresholds - shall be kept at a minimum; whenever necessary, thresholds and sliding door tracks shall have a maximum height of 25mm and be preferably ramped (Batas Pambansa Blg. 344, 1983).

P3 P2

B R9

d. Cross slope – Walkways must be no steeper than 1:20 (5%) for hard surfaces or 1:10 (10%) on all other material surfaces. Walkways shall

PENDULUM TEST OR OIL-WET

Figure 4.

Grate Opening Detail

Figure

B. Ramps

Where steps cannot be avoided or slopes cannot be made less steep, ramps improve access for people using mobility aids or pushing delivery carts or strollers. The steepness of the ramp, space for turning at landings, and handrail design are important considerations in ensuring a ramp’s safety and functionality (Rule 1060. OSHS; PD 9514 URR). The design criteria for ramps are listed below.

Table 2. Slip Resistance (Health and Safety Executive, 2012)

Figure 5. Paving Expansion Joint

a. Surface Finish – Ramps must have a firm, stable, and slip-resistant surface (HSE, 2012). Hard constructed surfaces can fall under the slip resistance metric, which is based on DIN 51130 (R-Value Slipperiness) and DIN 51097 (ABC Slipperiness), where acceptable grade for outdoor-grade walkways is R-12 and above (DIN 51130), or Class C (DIN 51097).

b.Clear width - Minimum of 900 mm

c.Running slope - Not steeper than 1:15 (6.7%)

d. Landings

• Landings should be located at the top and bottom of the ramp, at abrupt changes in the direction of the ramp, and at horizontal intervals not greater than 9m apart.

• Landings should have a minimum size of 1.67m x 1.67m. Landings on a straight ramp must be a minimum of 1.67m in length and at least the same width as the ramp.

• Maximum cross slope is 1:50 (2%).

e. Surface openings in a ramp or landing must not allow passage of an object more than 20 mm in diameter.

Any elongated slots must be oriented perpendicular to the direction of travel.

Railing across full width of ramp

1. Tread surface – Must be slipresistant

2. Risers and Run – Must be uniform in any one flight

3. Rise dimensions (between successive treads) – Must be between 125 mm to 180 mm

D. Tactile Walking Surface Indicators (TWSIs)

a. TWSIs must be located at the top of all flights of stairs.

More than 200mm rise 1800mmmin

Figure 6. Ramps and Vehicular Traffice

C. Steps

Stairs are not the recommended means of negotiating changes in level because they represent a barrier for many, particularly for people who use wheeled mobility aids. The use of stairs is not recommended as part of an exterior path of travel, but only as an alternate means of negotiating level changes where wheelchair access is already provided.

The requirements for stairs are intended to improve safety and accessibility for all stair users,

including people with disabilities. In some instances, persons with disabilities (PWD) may prefer to climb a short set of stairs instead of using a long and circuitous ramp.

The safety and usability of stairs depends on key technical requirements such as the dimension of each step, tactile walking surface indicators, and the appropriate design of handrails and guards. The design criteria for steps are listed below.

4. Riser configuration – Must have closed risers

5. Run dimensions (between successive steps) – Must be between 280 mm to 355 mm.

6. Nosing projection – Maximum 38 mm, with no abrupt undersides

7. High tonal contrast markings must extend the full tread width of each step

b. TWSIs must be at least 610 mm in depth and extend the entire width of the stair, starting from one tread depth from the leading edge of the top step c. Tactile elements of TWISIs must be raised above the ground surface.

d. High tonal contrast must be used to differentiate the TWSIs from the adjacent ground surface.

rise 125 - 180 mm

nosing 38 mm max. thickness min. 1 “ tread supported by riser

Figure 6. Stairs Dimensions

run 280 - 355 mm

Street Roadway/ Carriageway

E. Handrails/Guards

Handrails are a vital element in the usability and safety of ramps. They provide a secure handhold and are especially important for those with stamina issues or poor balance. They also provide an essential orientation cue. Horizontal extensions at the tops of ramps signal an upcoming change in level and offer stability before using it. Horizontal extensions at the base of ramps notify the user that they have reached the end and may guide users around a landing to the next segment of the ramp. The design criteria for handrails/guards are listed below.

and 965 mm, measured vertically from the surface of the ramp and its landings.

4. Terminate in a way that will not obstruct pedestrian travel or create a hazard.

5. Extend horizontally 300 mm, at minimum, beyond the top and bottom of the ramp.

6. Have clearance of 50 mm, at minimum, from any wall to which they are attached.

a.Handrailsmustbeprovidedonboth sides of ramps, including landings, and should:

7. Withstand the loading values obtained from the non-concurrent application of a concentrated load not less than 0.9 kN applied at any point and in any direction; and a uniform load not less than 0.7 kN/ meter applied in any direction to the handrail.

1. Be continuously graspable along the entire length.

2. Have a cross-section with an outside diameter between 30 mm and 40 mm if they are circular; or if they are non-circular, must have a graspable portion with a perimeter between 100 mm and 155 mm, and a diameter not more than 57 mm.

3. Have a height between 865 mm

8. b. Intermediate handrails must be provided where a ramp is wider than 2.20m.Thesehandrailsmustbelocated continuouslybetweenlandingssothat there is no more than 1.65m between handrails and the required design criteria for handrails as listed above is met.

F. Walls or Guards

both sides of a ramp. If a guard is used, the following design criteria should be followed:

• The top of the guard must not be less than 1.07m above the ramp surface (measured vertically). Both a guard and edge protection may be required if there is a gap of more than 50 mm between the guard and the ramp surface.

• It should be designed so that no element, attachment, or opening located between 140 mm and 900 mm above the ramp surface will facilitate climbing.

G. Edge Protection

Edge protection must be used where a solid enclosure or guard is not provided or not extended within 50 mm of the finished ramp surface. Protection may be in the form of: a. A curb, with a minimum height of 50 mm, or b.Railingsorotherbarriersextending within 50 mm of the finished ramp surface.

6.4.3. Streetscape and Vehicular Thoroughfares

Streets are primarily vehicular thoroughfares, but are also typically equipped with cycling lanes and sidewalks. As such, streets should be designed in such a way that balances the needs of all user types – whether motorists, cyclists, or pedestrians –ensuring accessibility, safety, comfort, and enjoyment for all.

b. Minimum Requirements

• For travel lanes8, shared by cars, motorbikes, and occasional fullsize transit vehicles (such as buses) is 3.0m. Lanes that are 2.7m wide may be used in streets with speed limits of 30kph or lower.

2.7 - 3.0m 3.0 - 3.3 m

A. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

a. Design Criteria

• Adequate sight distance must be provided to allow motorists or cyclists sufficient time to identify and appropriately react to all elements on the road, including other users and hazards. Limited forward visibility can adversely affect safety and increase the risk of a collision by reducing reaction times and stopping distances. This is especially important in areas where pedestrians and cyclists are known to cross the road (Road Safety Toolkit, 2010).

• Through lanes for mixed traffic shared with trucks and buses should be 3.0m to 3.3m wide. Curbside travel lanes may also be 3.3m wide. The remnant width should not be added to the lane.

• Turning speeds should be limited to <10kph. Minimizing turning speeds is important to pedestrian safety.

Travel Lanes

Minimizing

The recommended width for through lanes shared by cars, two-wheeled motorized vehicles, and occasional fullsize transit vehicles is 3m

Through lanes of mixed traffic shared with trucks and buses may be 3- 3.3 m wide. Curbside travel lanes may also be 3.3m wide. Remnant width should not be added to the lane.

8 Travel lanes are designated to carry motorized traffic through and do not include shoulders.] the recom mended width for through lanes[ Through lanes are designat ed for through traffic, such as in intersections where they are indicated by arrows on the pavement pointing straight ahead.

This width serves all of these vehicles while discouraging high speeds. Lanes that are 2.7 m wide may be used in streets with speeds of 30 km/ h or lower.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Large Vehicle Lanes

turning speeds is important to pedestrian safety.

Figure 9. Vehicular Travel Lanes

B. Basic Vehicular Metrics

a. Bicycle/ Compact Sedan/ SUV/ Truck/ Golf Buggy

Vehicle Type Length (m) Width (m) Area (sqm)

Standars Car (CS) 3.72 1.44 5.36 Big Car (CB) 4.58 1.77 8.11

Light Commercial Vehicles (LCV) 4.3 1.56 6.71

High Commercial Vehicles (HCV) 6.7 2.3 15.41 Multi-Axie Vehicles(MAV) 1150 2.42 26.83

Two-Wheeler (TW) 1.97 0.74 1.46 Auto (3W) 3.2 1.3 4.16 Bus (B) 10.6 2.4 25.44

c. Bicycle Lanes on National Roads (DPWH Department Order No. 88, 2020)

The desirable width for a twodirectional separated bike lane is 3.0 m. In constrained conditions, an absolute minimum width of 2.44m may be allowed.

1. Bicycle Lanes at Roads ( See Illustration on the next page)

2. Bicycle Lanes a Viaducts/ Bridges/ Underpass

3. Bicycle Parking Facilities/ Amenities

REVIEW NOTES:

Minimum Design Requirements for Landings:

• Landings should be located at the top and bottom of the ramp, at abrupt changes in the direction of the ramp, and at horizontal intervals not greater than 9m apart.

• Landings should have a minimum size of 1.67m x 1.67m. Landings on a straight ramp must be a minimum of 1.67m in length and at least the same width as the ramp.

• Maximum cross slope is 1:50 (2%).

Minimum Requirements for Street Design

• For travel lanes, shared by cars, motorbikes, and occasional fullsize transit vehicles (such as buses) is 3.0m. Lanes that are 2.7m wide may be used in streets with speed limits of 30kph or lower.

• Through lanes for mixed traffic shared with trucks and buses should be 3.0m to 3.3m wide. Curbside travel lanes may also be 3.3m wide. The remnant width should not be added to the lane.

• Turning speeds should be limited to <10kph. Minimizing turning speeds is important to pedestrian safety.

Figure 15. Design for Pavement Thickness

curb & gutter crown sidewalk 1.5% slope 1.5% slope

Figure 16. Road Grade (Slope)

Figure 17. Roadside Table

Figure 18. Road Grade (Slope) - DPWH

Parking areas must be designed in accordance with efficiency, safety, and demand. Generally, it may be categorized into two types: off-street parking and on-street parking. Offstreet parking includes open and covered lots intended for public use, while on-street parking is located on a highway or street. Design criteria taken for both types of parking are listed below (The Accessibility Standard for the Design of Public Spaces, 2005).

a. Parking spaces should be located as close as possible to the accessible entry points of the facility they serve. Ideally, entry points are visible from the parking spaces directly to each accessible entry point. Pedestrians should not have to cross behind parked cars or move along roadways. If the route to an entry point crosses a roadway, a pedestrian crossing signage should be visible to drivers and pedestrians and, where curbs are used, have appropriate curb ramps or depressed curbs.

b. Parking Spaces for Persons with Disability (PWDs)

• PWD parking spaces should

allow enough spaces for a person to transfer from a vehicle to a wheelchair and should be located as close as possible to buildings or accessible entrances (Batas Pambansa Blg. 344).

• PWD parking slots should have a minimum width of 3.70m, with a walkway of 1.20m clear width to be provided between the front ends of parked cars. Drop curbs or curb cut-outs must be provided where access walkways are raised.

• Wherever possible, PWD parking spaces should be perpendicular or at an angle to the road or circulation aisles and not at ramped or sloping areas.

• Pavement markings, signs, or other means shall be provided to delineate PWD parking spaces. The International Symbol of Access[ The International Symbol of Access, also known as the Wheelchair Symbol, is a blue square with a white icon of a person in a wheelchair to indicate accessibility of the built environment] should be used to designate accessibility facilities.

6 1 7 8 2 3

legend: General Parking (5.0 m - length)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 20. International Symbol for Access (ISA) / (International) Wheelchair Symbol

c. Parking spaces must discourage

inappropriate use. Pavement markings should be at least 1.0m long and in high tonal contrast to the surface of the parking space. They should also be slip-resistant.

D. Curbs and Related Interfaces11

a. Concrete Curb and Gutter

E. Curb Ramps

Curb ramps or curb cuts help persons with disabilities safely and independently negotiate level changes on sidewalks and other pedestrian routes. Where pedestrians are expected to cross or access a roadway, a curb ramp provides a smooth transition for people who use mobility aids. The provision of a curb ramp depends on the site characteristics, the volume of pedestrian traffic, and space availability.

Tactile walking surface indicators (TWSIs) are required to warn people with visual disabilities that they are entering a potentially hazardous area. TWSIs at curb ramps consist of a band of material across the width of the curb ramp in a different texture and with high tonal contrast to the remainder of the curb ramp. TWSIs must be raised above the surface of the curb ramp to be detectable with the use of a cane or by foot.

The design criteria for curb ramps are listed below.

a. Must have a minimum clear width of 1.2m (exclusive of any

sides)

b. Walkway at the top of the curb ramp must have a minimum clear width of 1.20m to serve as a turning space

c. Running slope

• Must be no steeper than 1:8 (12.5%) with elevation changes less than 75mm

• Must be no steeper than 1:10 (10%) with elevation change 75mm to 200mm

F. Sidewalks and Walkways

G. Raised Median

Medians create a two-stage crossing for pedestrians, making it easier and safer to cross multiple lanes of traffic. They should be installed on streets where pedestrians must cross three or more lanes, or where vehicles tend to speed.

streets. In both scenarios, design and implementation of traffic calming devices are iterative processes that require monitoring and adjustment. Design criteria for traffic calming are listed below.

a.Traffic calming devices should always consider the following:

d. Cross slope must be no steeper than 1:50 (2%)

e. Flared side slope must be no steeper than 1:10 (10%)

f. Curb ramps along an exterior path of travel must align with the direction of travel

Figure 25. Typical Curb Ramp Details

Figure 26. Typical Raised Median

H. Traffic Calming Devices

Traffic calming can be either proactive or reactive. It can be integrated into new street designs or retrofitted into existing problematic areas, such as heavy traffic or accident-prone

• Vehicle speed – Controlled vehicle speed reduces the severity of potential vehicle-related crashes.

• Exposure risk – Providing pedestrian and cyclists with shorter crossing distances and

priority at crossing signals reduces their risk of being in vehicle-related accidents.

• Legibility and predictability – These allow street users to respond to their surroundings accurately and promptly.

• Traffic volume – Fewer vehicles lessens the chance of vehiclerelated accidents.

long term (NACTO, 2011). Examples of physical traffic calming measures include:

• Speed Tables – Midblock traffic calming devices that raise the entire wheelbase of a vehicle to reduce its traffic speed

b. Traffic calming devices must function at all times of the day, especially at night when there is less traffic and vehicles tend to speed.

c. Traffic calming measures may be applied on a street-by-street basis or in an area-wide plan. Providing traffic calming measures on an area-wide scale is more comprehensive as it allows for better management of vehicle speed and volume throughout the entire area, rather than redirecting traffic to adjacent streets.

• Speed Cushions – Speed humps or speed tables that include wheel cut-outs to allow large vehicles to pass unaffected while reducing passenger car speeds

• Raised Crossings/Intersections

– Create a safe, slow-speed crossing and public space at minor intersections

• Chicanes – Slows drivers down by narrowing the street with alternating parking or curb extensions.

d. Physical traffic calming measures are effective in reducing speed, cut-through volumes, or collisions. Education and enforcement measures may supplement physical traffic calming measures, but are ineffective on their own over the

• Choker – Curb extensions that may be applied at midblock to slow traffic speeds and increase public space

342 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 27. Speed Tables

Figure 28. Speed Cushions

Figure 29. Raised Crossing / Intersections

vehicles and may be combined with a midblock crosswalk

• Audio Tactile Paving / Rumble Strips – A soft treatment meant to give tactile cues to drivers when they encroach upon the transit lane

• Hostile Vehicle Mitigation (HVM) HVMs are safety barriers placed in the landscape meant to counter vehicle-related threats. They are designed to prevent vehicular access and must pass a recognized vehicle impact test standard, such as American ASTM F 2656, British PAS 68, or IWA 14-1. Typical HVM barriers include:

a.Fixed Bollards/ Retractable Bollards/ Removable Bollards

b.Road Blockers and Barriers

Speed Humps – Vertically deflect

Figure 30. Chicanes

Figure 31. Choker

Figure 32. Speed humps

6.5.Public Realm Elements

6.5.1.

Pedestrian Seating

Fall Direction to allow water run off

Structural Seat Supports to fall between the dotted lines 450mm min.

Figure 33. Pedestrian Seating with Backrest and armrest

6.5.2. Light Canopy or Shade

Figure 34. Sample Light Canopy Shade Structures

6.5.3. Boardwalks and Timber Decks

Figure 35. Accessibility via raised boardwalks

6.5.4.

Fences and Walls

Figure 34. Rendition based on BBIR 1996 ( mangroves can be made accessible via elevated boardwalks connected to other resort facilities)

Figure 35. Typical Boardwalk Detail

mesh wire concrete hollow blocks precast concrete

Figure 36. T ypical Fence Types

6.5.5. Playgrounds and Outdoor Fitness Areas

Playground and outdoor fitness areas, although meant for different age groups, typically have the same design criteria to ensure physical safety due to the high-level activity expected to be conducted for these kinds of uses.

A. Surfacing

• To reduce the risk of injury due to falls, playground and outdoor fitness equipment should have a shock-absorbing or safety surface with a high Critical Height12 factor. Poured-in-place rubber and rubber mats are popular safety surfaces.

Critical Height test data may be requested from the manufacturer.

While playgrounds are meant for children (typically, play equipment may be designed in ranges for 2-5 years old, 6-12 years old, or a combination for the use of 2-12 years old), outdoor fitness areas are meant for adult or elderly use. The design criteria for playgrounds and outdoor fitness areas are listed below.

To reduce the risk of injury due to falls, playground and outdoor fitness equipment should have a shock-absorbing or

• Particularly for playgrounds, the height of play equipment should be limited. For playgrounds with loose-fill surfaces such as sand, equipment should be limited to a height of 2.75m. For unitary surfaces such as rubber tile or poured-in-place, equipment should not go beyond 1.80m. (National Program for Playground Safety, n.d.). Playground surfacing should ideally comply with ASTM standards for playgrounds.

12 The Critical Height of a material is approximately the height below which a life-threatening head injury incurred from a fall would not be expected. The thicker the material, the greater its shock-absorbency and its Critical Height fac tor. The proper material and depth of a safety surface area are determined by installing a material at a depth at which the Fall Height (or the maximum height from which a child may fall from play equipment) of the playground equipment is less than the Critical Height of the safety surfacing.

346 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

B. Fencing (for playgrounds)

Playground fencing may help contain children within the confines of the play area, prevent them from running out into a dangerous place, and keep potential threats such as animals and undesired traffic out. Fencing should follow guidelines and design requirements for playground safety based on local government codes and ASTM standards. Further design criteria for playground fencing include:

• Fence height between 1.20m to 1.80m

• Made of materials that are less likely to be climbed by children

• Have self-closing hinges at the gate with at least a 12 mm gap to avoid finger crushing hazards (Kidsafe WA, 2018).

C. Play Equipment (for playgrounds)

Play equipment should comply with ASTM F1487-21 Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use. Equipment should be anchored to the ground.

Figure 38. Samples of safety zones for swings and rockers/ springers

Figure 39. Sample slide details

Figure 39. Sample swing details

Figure 40. Samples of playsets with different activity and safety zones

Figure 41. Sample of a playset detail

Figure 43. Inclusive Play Carousel

Figure 42. Accessibility for play structures

348 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Bowling Lane - Ball Return Width: 3.56 m (Overall)

Length: 18.29 m (To Headpin)

Area: 88.6 m² (Overall)

Overall Length: 26.36 m (With service)

Lane Length (Overall): 19.16 m

Lane Width: 106.36 cm

Bowling Lane Width: 1.52 m (Overall)

Length: 18.29 m (To Headpin)

Area: 40.9 m² (Overall)

Overall Length: 26.36 m (With service)

Lane Length (Overall): 19.16 m

Baseball Length: 121.9 m (Center Fence) Area: 10,287 m²

Centerfield Fence: 121.9 m (min.)

Left & Right Field Fence: 97.5-106.7 m (min.)

Base Distance: 27.4 m

Cricket Width: 137-152 m (Diameter) Length: 137-152 m (Diameter)

Area: 14,775-18,242 m²

Infield Radius: 27.4 m

Cricket Pitch: 20.12 x 3.05 m

Surface Materials: Natural or artificial turf

Field Hockey Width: 54.86 m Length: 91.44 m Area: 5017 m²

Striking Circle: 14.63 m (radius from goal corner)

5-Yard Mark: 4.57 m (from Striking Circle)

Touchball Football

User area required: 39 X 39 m (130 X 130 ft)

Playing Area: 5, 791 .2 to 6, 400 .8 mm X 36, 576 mm

Orientation: (19 to 21 ft X 120 ft) alleys

Drainage: Dead level- Use underdrainage

Comment: Alleys grouped in bank of six

Football Pitch Width:45-90 m Length: 90-120 m

Center Circle (Radius): 9.15 m

Goal Area: 5.5 m from goal edge, 18’ | 5.5 m from front

Penalty Area: 16.5 m from goal edge, 16.5 m from front

Penalty Mark: 11 m centered from goal

300mm Running Track

Length (Overall): 129.16 m Width (Overall): 89.12 m Area (Overall): 10,305 m2

Lane Width: 1.22 m

Tennis Court

Width: 11 m

Length: 23.77 m

Area: 260.9 sqm

Width (Singles): 8.2 m

Clearance (Side): 3.66 m

Rugby Pitch - League

Overall Length: 367.5’-400.25’ (112-122 m)

Width: 68m Area Between Try Areas: 100 m

In goal Areas: 6-11 m

Softball Field

Length : 76.2 m (fence)

Area : 4572 sqm.

Base Distance: 18.3 m

Infield Hypotenuse: 25.9 m

Pitching Rubber Distance: 16.2 m

Volleyball

Width: 9 m Length: 18 m Area: 161 sqm.

Area with Clearances: 360 sqm.

50m

Ten Lane Olympic Swimming Pool

Width: 25 m Length: 50 m

Lane Width: 2.5 m

Backstroke Line: 5 m

False Start Line: 15 m

6.5.6. Outdoor Trails

The design criteria for outdoor trails are listed below.

a.Trails should ideally have a clear width 1.80m to allow two persons to walk side by side, but may have a minimum clear width of 1.20m.

b.Outdoor trails that accommodate PWD access should have a minimum width of 2.10m with a maximum slope of 1:12. Low edge protection with a minimum height of 150 mm is recommended to protect trail users from adjacent steep slopes or other hazards. For bridges and boardwalks, standard handrail heights are required13

c.Adjacent vegetation that overhangs a path shall have a clearance height of at least 2.25m.

d.Material for trail surfacing should be site-specific and consider existing conditions. Trail surfaces can be made of asphalt, concrete, crushed gravel, or be left unpaved altogether.

13 See Section E (Handrails/Guards) under 6.4. Site Elements of this Chapter

1 4

1.8 m clear trail width

clearing width

surface width 1.2 -1.5 m max

Figure 46. Hiking Trail widths

overall width - 1.8 m vertical clearance 2.4 m

2 (authority prescribed)

5

3

1 2 3 4 5

high edge protection for hazardous conditions railing as necessary curb as necessary native soil slope trail managed forest land

The design criteria for dog parks are listed below. Surfaces are ideally left unpaved, either with turf, loose gravel, or other infills.

Flagpole at Rizal Park, Manila (45.72m).

Double-gated access points must be provided for the safety of both dogs and owners.

Fencing should have a minimum height of 1.50m. Perimeter fence panels shall be buried at a depth of 150 mm.

A water tap point shall be provided inside the park for maintenance purposes.

7.5.9. Site Furniture

Trash Bins

a. A. B.

Trash receptacles must be provided with protection against pests and vermin entry.

Flagpoles (Republic Act No. 8491, 1998)

b. c. d. a.

Flagpoles must not equal height or be higher than the Independence

Flagpoles that are planted in the ground must be straight and slightly tapered at the top. The minimum length of the National Flag is onefourth the height of the flagpole, while the maximum length is one-third the height of the flagpole.

The acceptable height for flagpoles ranges between 6.0m to 30.0m.

b. c. d.

Figure 49. Typical Flagpole Detail

354 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

6.6. Swimming Pools

This section covers the requirements for in-ground and above-ground public swimming pools. Inspection and compliance of swimming pools shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Philippines Sanitation Code (Presidential Decree No. 856, 1975), including standards and systems that ensure water quality for swimming pools. International guidelines, best practices, and regulations have also been cited in this section. In case of conflict between international and local references, local regulations shall prevail.

6.6.1. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

A.

Pool Depth Criteria

a.Standard swimming pools have a minimum depth of 0.90m and a maximum depth of 1.20m. A uniform slope of not more than 1:12 must be used where there is a change in depth. b.Wading pools or lounge pools are typically shallow with manageable and safe depths for non-swimmers. c.Pool water depth markings shall be visible and included at the shallow

and deep ends of the pool and at any transition levels. Changes in depth may also be emphasized by using contrasting color materials for identification within the pool finishes and reinforced by safety signage.

B.

Swimming Pool Design and Construction

Structural design and finishes shall be in accordance with the Philippine Building Code (1977), while the mechanical and electrical systems shall be in accordance with the Philippine Sanitation Code (1975).

C.

Swimming Pool Capacity

a.The total number of users shall not exceed one person per 2 cubic meters of water.

c.The maximum capacity of the swimming pool shall be indicated on a clear and visible signage.

D.

Safety for Public Swimming Pools

b.Depending on the type of swimming pool, the maximum pool capacity shall allow a surface water area of 0.90 sqm per person for non-swimmers, and 2.20 sqm per person for active swimmers. Allowances shall be adjusted based on the extent of the pool deck or lounge areas.

a.Swimming pools that have a water surface area of more than 200 sqm shall be provided with an elevated lifeguard platform. For pools with a water surface area of more than 370 sqm, additional elevated lifeguard platforms must be provided. These elevated stations should have a clear, unobstructed view of the pool bottom.

b.Fencing, while not necessary, is recommended for swimming pools that may be left unsupervised to prevent unauthorized access and potential accidents. The fence shall be at least 1.20m in height with child-proof gates that open from the poolside.

Figure 51. Typical Flagpole Detail

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

F. Swimming Pool Components

a. Pool deck – Must be at least 1.5 m wide and have a 1:50 slope away from the pool. All walking areas shall be finished with non-slip materials with no sharp edges or projections. Tripping hazards should be avoided.

b. Shower areas – A minimum of 2 pre-swim showers is recommended for one swimming pool, with one an additional shower for every additional swimming pool.

c. Pool steps, handrails, or ladders –These accessibility components shall be provided if the depth of the pool bottom from the deck is more than 600 mm. Recessed steps or ladders shall be provided at the deep end of the pool. Steps or ladders shall be installed on opposite sides of the pool if the width of the pool more than 9.0m. Abrupt drop-offs or submerged projections in the pool must be avoided. Other design criteria for steps, handrails, and ladders include the following:

Figure 52. Typical Swimming Pool Safety Signages

• Steps shall be finished with nonslip material designed with a maximum tread of 300 mm and maximum rise of 245 mm.

• Rigidly installed metal handrails or pool ladders shall be made of corrosion-resistant material and equipped with non-slip treads.

• Railings shall be at least 130 mm clear from the pool wall.

• Step holes shall have a minimum width of 360 mm and a minimum tread of 130 mm, with handrails at both sides that extend over the edge of the pool.

Adjacent swimming pool components, including pool edges, pool steps and treads, shall have contrasting surface colors to signal a change in area.

How to Prevent a Child from Getting OVER a Pool Barrier 1200mm equal to or more than 1m

100mm

Figure 53. Swimming Pool Safety Barriers (Prevention of a child going OVER pool barrier)

. Swimming Pool Safety Barriers (Prevention of a child

Figure 55. Swimming Pool Safety Barriers (Prevention of a child going THROUGH pool barrier)

360 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

For a Chain Link Fence

The mesh size should not exceed 1.25 inches square unless slats, fastended at the top or bottom of the fence, are used to reduce mesh openings to no more than 1.25 inches.

For a Fence Made up of Diagonal Members or Latticework

The maximum opening in the lattice should bot exceed 1.25 inches.

Figure 57. Typical Swimming Pool Grab Rail , Ladder & Grab Bar Details

6.7. Water Features

6.7.1. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

A. B.

Design Criteria

a. Depth – Water feature basins should have a minimum depth of 300 mm and a maximum depth of 457 mm. Basins less than 300 mm deep typically require a special inlet and outlet fittings, while basins deeper than 457 mm will be subject to swimming pool requirements.

b. Splash radius and wind speed –Must be considered when designing water features with nozzle sprays or cascades.

c. Freeboard height – The minimum freeboard height of any water feature basin containing a nozzle or receiving a waterfall should be 150 mm. Reflecting pools with no nozzle or wave-producing elements should have a minimum freeboard height of 75 mm.

d. Materials – Corrosive materials such as steel or aluminum should be avoided. Stainless steel, bronze, brass, copper, or fiberglass within the fountain basins and plumbing systems are recommended for use. e. Systems – Pumps, piping,

and filtration systems should be selected based on water volume, maintenance requirements, and any water restrictions applicable to the installation.

6.7.2.

Water Feature Typologies

Minimum Requirements

As a minimum requirement, the water feature design shall be based on the updated Electrical Code (2017) and Plumbing Code of the Philippines (2000).

Figure 01 Insert image here Illustration 1.1.1 Sample water feature schematic

Figure 58. Simplified Water Feature Diagram

Reflecting Pools – Have a relatively still surface, usually in dark finishes, to purposely create reflections of their surroundings

Water Channels – Linear feature pools usually considered to highlight and define a landscape’s axes and convey water throughout the landscape

A. B. C.

Cascading Water Features – Terraced, dynamic water features that also provide sounds with the splashing of water

Fountains – Water sculptures or structures that may vary in scale, volume, and design, to be used as highlighting features in the landscape

D. E.

Biological Ponds – Natural aquatic landscape features, usually integrated with bio-filtration systems, such as fishponds or aquatic gardens

6.7.3. Underwater Lighting

Underwater lighting may be adjustable free-standing or niche mounted. All underwater lighting for water features must comply with the Philippine Electrical Code (2017).

Figure 59. Water Feature Lighting (Free Standing)

Figure 60. Water Feature Lighting (Recesssed or Mounted)

6.8.Landscape Lighting

Landscape lighting is the use of outdoor landscape illumination for various purposes. Landscape lighting can create aesthetic, visual interest and an appealing atmosphere at night. It can also increase visibility and nighttime functionality of spaces. It can be used as a wayfinding tool by marking entrances and landmarks, and lighting driveways and footpaths. Furthermore, outdoor lighting increases the safety and security of space by discouraging undesirable activities and enhancing an area’s surveillance.

b. Landscape Lighting Design Strategies

• Downlighting is used to throw light on a featured area below. This can also be used to make exciting shadow patterns on the floor surface.

• Uplighting is generally used to accentuate contrasting shadows by pointing the light upwards into a tree or a featured structure.

• Cross lighting is used to eliminate shadows by lighting a feature from opposite sides.

B.

6.8.1. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

A.

Design Criteria

a. Light Pollution and Glare

• Excessive outdoor lighting may produce glare, energy wastage, and light pollution. This can be eliminated by the careful selection and placement of landscape light fixtures. A constant level of lighting should be provided for all outdoor lights (International DarkSky Association, 2000).

Minimum Requirements

a.The IP rating or Ingress Protection rating categorizes light fixtures according to their sealing effectiveness against the entrance of foreign bodies, such as dust, wind, and water exposure. This shall be considered when specifying outdoor lighting. b.Illumination levels should comply with the National Building Code (1977) and Fire Code of the Philippines (2008).

6.8.2. Outdoor Landscape Lighting Typologies

Controlled Lights

a.Uplights illuminate a landscape feature upwards (typically trees or shrubs); are usually wall-mounted, on spikes, or plinths.

b.Downlights illuminate a landscape feature downwards; are usually wallmounted, on poles, or mounted on trees.

c.Floodlights illuminate vast areas for safety and security; are usually mounted from a significant height using a wall, pole, or trees.

A. B.

d.Spotlights are focused lights used to highlight or illuminate signs and other landscape features; can be focused upward or downward. Path, Directional, and Area Lights

a.Pole lights are tall, pole-mounted lights usually more than 3.0 meters in height; are used as general lighting for walkways, driveways, play areas, courtyards, and other activity spaces

b.Bollard lights are low, pole-mounted lights usually less than 1.0 meter in height; are used to illuminate walkways, driveways, play areas,

Solid objects greater than 12mm (e.g. fingers)

Solid objects greater than 2.5 mm (e.g. tools)

Solid objects greater than 1 mm (e.g. wires, screws )

paths, walkways, and driveways

C.

Step and ramp lights are mounted on surface or flush on steps and walls and are used to illuminate steps or ramps

D.

Underwater lights are waterproof (IP 68 rated) and used to illuminate ponds, pools, and water features; are usually mounted flush on steps and walls. REFLECTED DOWN

BOLLARD (ADJUSTABLE 180 DEG) UP FLOOD

ADJUSTABLE FLOOD MULTIPLE DOWN & HORIZONTAL

CANISTER UP & DOWN BOLLARD (HORIZONTAL)

GROUND RECESSED W/ FLOOD BOLLARD (360 DEGREES)

DIRECTED DOWN

SUBMERGED POOL SCONCE LANTERN (STEEL)

LANTERN CANISTER LANTERN (WOODEN)

6.9. Signage and Wayfinding for Parks and Open Spaces

Signage provision is an essential tool to create identity, placemaking, and wayfinding. A signage system is designed to provide several functions depending on the information it communicates.

b.Signs should be located at points conveniently seen even by a person on a mobility device.

6.9.1. Design Criteria and Minimum Requirements

Design Criteria

a.Signage design depends on its function. Signage function can be classified into the following types:

• Directional signs – Used to guide users of a place to a specific destination

• Informational signs – May include maps, notices, regulatory or advisory content that provide user awareness of the space. Other informational signs may be educational or interpretative with regard to certain features of the space.

• Identification signs – Used to mark entrances to facilities or a development

c.Signs should have appropriate and sufficient outdoor lighting for clear visibility at night Minimum Requirements

B.

6.9.2. Signage Graphics (Batas Pambansa Blg. 344, 1983) Reading Distance A.

a.The text on signboards shall be of a dimension that people with less than normal visual acuity can read at a certain distance (Batas Pambansa Blg. 344, 1983).

b.Tactile signage should have a minimum height of 1.40m and a maximum height of 1.60m (Batas Pambansa Blg. 344, 1983).

150

100

50

0

cm distance

A. height of text max. reading m 100 50

Figure 62. Text size in relation to reading distance

366 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Typeface

a.Clean, crisp, and easy-to-read typestyles should be used for maximum legibility.

b.Using two different fonts in a single design should be avoided.

B. C.

Color and Contrast

a.Signs should be kept simple and easy to understand. They should be made of contrasting colors and gray values to make detection and reading easy Symbols

D. Figure 62. Text size in relation to reading distance

a.The International Symbol of Access shall be placed where accessibility and facilities for PWDs are provided.

b.The following internationally specified shapes should be observed for the corresponding signage types: rectangular for information signs, triangular for warning signs, and circular for interdiction/ stop signs.

Sign Size (cm) Usage

A 10 x 10 Comfort room, stall doors

A,B,C,D 15 x 15 With of without directional arrows to identify doors, rooms

A,B,C 22 x 22 With or without arrows

A,B,C,D,E 30 x 30 For exterior use

A,B,C,D,E 60 x 60 For exterior use F 20 x 60 For exterior use

Table 6. Sizes of typical symbols used for signages

Figure 63. Sample directional sign for pedestrian suitable for PWD

Tactile or Sensory Signs

a.Letters and symbols shall either be raised at least 1mm from the background or engraved so that persons with visual impairments can read the information with their fingertips.

b.Tactile blocks are a form of warning signage to those with visual impairments. They should be provided in the immediate vicinity of street crossings, raised high enough to be felt by the sole of the shoe, but low enough to avoid being a tripping hazard or impediment for wheelchair users.

E. 1 3

Sign 1 2 3 4

Figure 64. Samples of information and wayfinding signs 2 4

6.10. Softscape Structure Details

Softscape is considered as one of the main components in any landscape development. It is unique in the sense that it involves working with living species to design outdoor spaces. This section provides general guidelines when handling softscape materials in relation to building or structural applications.

To be effectively implemented, these details must be planned and executed in collaboration with allied professionals. Factors such as weight, water requirements, and shade are essential considerations that must be discussed with the architects, engineers, irrigation specialists, and sustainability consultants, among others.

6.10.1. Scope and Application

A. Ground Plane Application

Horizontal developments built “on grade” can generally have extensive softscape provisions with no complex structural considerations. The application on the ground plane shall be guided by the open space regulations as stated in the Philippine

Figure 65. Examples of exterior signage and wayfinding elements (Urbanite, 2014)

National Building Code (1977).

B. Rooftop and Vertical Greenery System Application

Greenery provisions on these types of systems may vary significantly in scope and complexity, but generally require more extensive design collaboration with allied professionals especially for structural considerations. The softscape structure requirements for these systems are discussed further in the next section.

6.10.2. Rooftop Greenery Systems

These specifications prescribe the basic requirements and considerations for rooftop greenery systems or “on-slab softscape” installations.

and comprises a drainage mat with an integrated water reservoir sandwiched between the roof’s waterproofing membrane and the soilless or mineral substrate media

• Generally low in installation cost and lightweight (90–150 kg/m2)

• Can be placed on a pitched roof up to an inclination of 30 degrees

• Requires inspections at least once or twice a year

• Typical selection of groundcover plants are low-maintenance and self-generative, such as growing creepers and turfgrass

• Used for its aesthetic and environmental benefits

b. Intensive Green Roof

• Can also be referred to as “roof garden” or “podium landscape” as it is designed for active uses such as recreational and social activities

• Heavier in load as compared to extensive green roofs and requires more intensive planting, making it more expensive to develop and maintain

• Plant selection typically ranges from ornamental lawns and shrubs to trees and palms, all of which require regular maintenance such as mowing, fertilizing, irrigating, and weeding

Rooftop Greenery Typologies

Rooftop greenery systems can be categorized into two main types:

a.Extensive Green Roof

• Refers to the extensive growth of groundcover plants on rooftops

• Uses a shallow modular roof system, typically 10 cm in-depth,

B.

B. Design Criteria and Considerations a.Structural Load Implications

• Live and static loads – Structural load implications include the live load14 of softscape materials as well as the static loads15 of waterproofing and drainage systems typically used for onslab landscapes. As standard practice, plant species, especially trees and palms, are assumed to be mature in height and condition for structural load calculations (National Structure Code of the Philippines, 2015).

• Saturated Soil Weight – Saturated soil, which occurs after irrigation or rain, is a load bearing factor and is thus included in structural load calculations as part of standard practice. When used as a growth medium, soil may be comprised of sand, gravel, clay, minerals, organic matters, microbes, stone aggregates, and soil mixes of varying compositions and densities. Usually, saturated soil weight is estimated at 1920 kg/ cum.

14 Live loads may vary over time and includes plants which grow over time and may become heavier.

15 Static loads do not change in position or magni tude over time.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

Figure 65. Sample of extensive green roof installation at NTU, Singapore

A.

b. Wind Speeds

• Wind speed is expected to increase with building height. Softscape materials, especially trees and palms, may experience dynamic loads such as lateral or multi-directional wind loads in high elevations.

• Rooftop trees or palms may be periodically subject to unexpected wind gusts. Ideally, trees or palms should always be located at a safe distance (equal to or more than the expected mature height of the tree or palm) from the roof edge to create a buffer zone to avoid being uprooted by unforeseen winds. This also ensures maintenance safety as trees or palms planted too close to the roof edge cannot be reached and pruned properly.

• Parapet walls may be used to break wind speed. Parapet height can range between 0.90m to 1.50m, depending on the elevation of the rooftop landscape and applicable building codes.

Installation Cost Loading Capacity

Extensive Green Roof

Intensive Green Roof

(90-150 kg / sqm) (300-800 kg / sqm)

Maintenance Human Traffic Built-up Height (mm) 100-200 300-1500 Plant Type (Grasses and/or groundcover) (Groundcover, shrubs and trees)

Table 7. Diagram comparison and representation of a green roof

solid parapet designs

porous parapet designs

concrete glass concrete & glass concrete & rail rail

c. Planting over Structural Elements

– Strategic placement of heavy plants (such as tall shrubs, trees, or palms) over structural elements (such as columns, beams, and structural cores) optimizes load transfer.

All loads must be safely transferred from the roof down through the building structures, building foundation, and to the ground.

The red arrow denotes the effective height of the parapet, that is solid and impervious to wind forces, that contributes to improving green roof’s resistance against wind uplift.

Figure 66. Examples of parapet designs

d. Stabilization Measures – Trees or palms and tall vegetation (such as large shrubs exceeding 2m in height) should be stabilized on rooftops through any staking, guying, supportframes, or rootball anchors.1

1 [Refer to Chapter 6 Planting for further details on tree stabilization measures.

Figure 67. Strategic placement of heavy plants over structural elements

Tree Live Weight Calculation ( in kilograms ) solid parapet designs

4 7

1 2 3 5 6

1

2 3 5

tree fabrics with grommets

locate anchor stakes (3) 18” away from tree trunk. t-rail iron stake or acceptable wooden substitute, anchor firmly

tree wrap - 30% overlap to second branches, remove in spring. (omit tree wrap on aspen)

mulch 3” thk

ropes @ top of ball shall be cut. remove top 1/3 of burlap. remove top 1/3 of basket & all twine.

firmly formed saucer (use topsoil). angle of repose varies with steepness of slope and soil type (where directed only).

undisturbed soil - dig pit to proper depth.

remove from container and loosen roots slightly by scratching sides of rootball before planting & freeing girdling roots.

4 1 5 2

undisturbed soil - dig pit to proper depth. roughen sides of pit when planting in undisturbed soil

(planting area should not be less than 2x the ball diamater) 3 4

create saucer on downhill side - (3” max.) planting soil mulch - 3” thk.

remove from container and loosen roots slightly by scratching sides of rootball before planting & freeing girdling roots.

create saucer on downhill side - (3” max.)

planting soil (planting area should not be less than 2x the ball diamater) mulch - 3” thk.

undisturbed soil - dig pit to proper depth. roughen sides of pit when planting in undisturbed soil stakes (3 per) see specs. for size and material tree fabrics w/ grommets

tree fabrics with grommets

locate anchor stakes (3) 18” away from tree trunk. t-rail iron stake or acceptable wooden substitute, anchor firmly tree wrap - 30% overlap to second branches, remove in spring. (omit tree wrap on aspen) mulch 3” thk

ropes @ top of ball shall be cut. remove top 1/3 of burlap. remove top 1/3 of basket & all twine.

firmly formed saucer (use topsoil). angle of repose varies with steepness of slope and soil type (where directed only).

undisturbed soil - dig pit to proper depth.

7.10.3. Vertical Greenery Systems

Vertical Greenery Typologies There are different methods in installing vertical greenery systems. In general, there are four types: the support type, carrier type, fabric type, and planter type. Each system has its own unique set of advantages, limitations, and maintenance requirements.

B.

Design Criteria and Considerations

a. Plant Selection – Vertical greenery systems have high visual impact because they are easily seen. Typical plant selection for green walls ranges from ornamental groundcovers and shrubs to climbing vines and cascading plants, depending on the aesthetic preference of the Landscape Architect or client.

c. Maintenance and Accessibility – The safety in maintaining and accessing the vertical greenery system must always be considered, especially if they reach heights of very high elevations.

b. Height – Tall exterior green walls are constantly exposed to wind and may result in dryness, especially as elevation increases. Because of the intense conditions green walls may be at risk of being exposed to, they require thoughtful design and maintenance.

Figure 73. Soil-less modular green wall system

Figure 74. Greenwall system with planter Figure 75. Types of modular vertical greenery systems

6.11. Landscape Engineering

This section provides guidelines on basic landscape engineering solutions for drainage and slope retention systems. The methods discussed here employ aesthetic and nature-based ways to arrive at the safest and most ecologically sound solutions possible. These practices should always be done in collaboration with engineers and specialty contractors.

6.11.1. Landscape Drainage

The primary function of an effective landscape drainage system is to collect and dispose of surface water and subsurface water run-off from a development. Proper drainage is crucial to avoid erosion problems, surface water ponding, hardscape damage, and waterlogged plants. This can be achieved by a combination of different types of drainage system typologies.

standards.

b. Landscape drainage should be verified by a sanitary or plumbing engineer for sitewide and public sewer connections, and required flow rates and pipe sizes.

B. Drainage System Typologies

a. Constructed Drains

• Perforated Pipe/ Planter Drain

– This type of drain consists of a subsurface perforated pipe with a geotextile filter fabric lining.

• Trench Drains/ Slot Drains – This type of drain is usually a shallow linear drain that primarily conveys surface water run-off and utility lines. These can be precast or prefabricated off-site or cast-in SITU on site.

Loading Group Installation Area BS EN 124 Class BS EN 124 Test Load BS 497 Equivalent

Group 1 For use in pedestrian areas where vehicles have no access

A15a 15 kN (1.5 tons) Grade C

Group 2 For use incar parks and pedestrian areas where infre quent vehicle access is likely (inc. driveways) B125 125 kN (12.5 tons) Grade B

Group 3 For access covers and gully grading in areas of slow moving heavy traffic; also for gully grading in certain carriageway areas C250 250 kN (25 tons) Grade A

Group 4 For use in carriageway of roads hard shoulders and parking areas D400 400 kN (40 tons) Grade A

Group 5 For use in areas where high wheel loads are present E600 600 kN (60 tons)

Group 6 For use in areas where extremely high wheel loads are present E900 900 kN (90 tons)

Table 8. Reference guide for installation areas and BS 497 A.

Minimum Requirements

a. Performance specifications should meet minimum Engineering

c. The Water Code of the Philippines (Presidential Decree No. 1067 S. of 1976), and its Amended IRR

d. Sustainable Sanitation and Water Management Toolbox (SSWM) Minimum Standards

Water from the surrounding soil enters the pipe and flows toward the discharge point.

e. All relevant engineering standards

• Area Drain/ Catch Basins – This type of surface drain removes large volumes of surface water run-off from a specific area. These are typically used in hardscape areas and are usually linked to an underground drainpipe system.

Permeable materials such as gravel/ pebbles, decorative concrete, or metal gratings can be used to keep debris from entering the drainpipe or channel.

• Draincells/ Weepholes –Draincells and weep holes reduce the hydrostatic load on walls and slabs due to excess water weight.

• Natural Swales – Natural drain

swales are the least expensive method of removing undesired surface water run-off.

b. Nature-based Drainage

• Vegetated Swales/ Bioretention Swales Vegetated swales are natural drainage channels with mild slopes. They are used to convey stormwater run-off at a slower speed to allow sediments to settle. By slowing down the stormwater flow, these swales protect downstream treatment elements or waterways from erosion. They can be used in combination with bioretention systems.

Bioretention Swales Bioretention swales are vegetated swales with bioretention systems at the base. They provide efficient stormwater run-off treatment and are designed with a gentle slope. They convey stormwater run-off at a slow speed, allowing for temporary ponding (extended detention) to facilitate infiltration. The water is filtered and cleansed as it percolates into the bioretention system. The filtered water is then collected by perforated

subsoil pipes and can be reused or discharged. Sedimentation Basins Sedimentation basins are ponds that provide temporary detention of stormwater run-off, providing time for sediments to settle at the bottom of the basin. They are typically designed to capture 70 to 90% coarse to medium-sized sediments (typically above 125µm). The settled sediments can then be removed periodically. Sedimentation basins can be used as pre-treatment features for constructed wetlands and bioretention basins. Larger sedimentation ponds can be used as water storage ponds or as landscape-integrated water features. The collected water from the sedimentation basins can be further reused for landscape irrigation or other purposes (e.g., toilet flushing).

system is maintained.

C. E. D.

Bioretention Basins or Rain Gardens Bioretention basins or rain gardens are vegetated land depressions designed to detain and treat stormwater run-off. Their treatment process is the same as bioretention swales: the run-off is filtered through densely planted surface vegetation and then percolated through a prescribed filter media (soil layers). Unlike bioretention swales, they do not convey stormwater run-off. B.

Constructed Wetlands/ Cleansing

Biotopes Constructed wetlands are designed primarily to remove suspended particles and dissolved contaminants. The wetland needs to be configured to optimize hydraulic system efficiency, healthy vegetation is sustained, and a balanced eco-

7.1.2. Slope Retention and Erosion Control Systems

A. Minimum Requirements

a. DPWH Department Order No. 63 (2014) -- Standard Specification for Item 522A – Protection Systems for Unstable Slope

the lateral pressure of soil, where there is a desired change of elevation that exceeds the soil’s angle of repose.

d. Gabion Walls – A welded wire cage or box filled with materials such as stones or boulders. This creates a partially flexible block construction for revetments and embankments.

e. Geogrid/ Cocologs/ Coco Nets –

These are erosion control blankets and are meant to slow down the speed at which water moves across a surface. This reduces the erosion of soil from surface run-off. Table 01 19 Kapit-Bisig Laban sa KahirapanComprehensive and Integrated Delivery of Social Services

b. Environmental Protection Manual, Kalahi-CIDSS,19 Department of Social Welfare and Development

c. All relevant engineering standards

B. Slope Retention and Erosion Control System Typologies

a. Application-Cut & Fill – A site modification process that involves both removal and addition of land to a site. This method alters the natural topography to the desired result.

b. Hydroseeding/ Live Staking – A process that uses a slurry of seed and mulch to plant grass is used as an erosion control technique on large areas and slopes.

c. Retaining Walls – A structure designed and constructed to resist

COMMON STABLE SLOPE RATIOS FOR VARYING SOIL/ ROCK CONDITIONS

Soil / Rock Condition

Moist Rock

Slope Ratio (Hor/ Ver)

0.25: 1 - 0.5 : 1

Very well cemented soils 0.25: 1 - 0.5 : 1

Most in-place soils .75: 1 - 1: 1

Very fractured soils 1:1 - 1.5 : 1

Loose coars granular soils 1.5 : 1

Heavy clay soils 2:1 - 3: 1

Soft clay rich zone or wet seepage areas 2:1 - 3: 1

Fills of most soils 1.5 : 1 - 2: 1

Fills of hard, angular rock 1: 1 - 3: 1

Low cut and fills ( < 2-3 m high) 2: 1 or flatter (for revegetation)

Table 9. Common stable slope ratios for varying soil or rock conditions

3

Mortarless method for wall no higher than 1 m

Figure 83. Typical Rockwall construction

Flattest, heaviest stones Course and capstones Deadmen for stability Trench 12” deep, width 1/2 of wall height 1 2 4

1 2 3 4

384 PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS

C H A P T E R 6.0

DETAILS

SUMMARY OF REFERENCES

ACT Government. (2019). Signage for Urban Parks & Open Spaces. Retrieved from https://www.cityservices.act.gov.au/__data/ assets/pdf_file/0006/1378536/MIS22-Signage-for-Urban-Parks-and-Open-Space.pdf

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. (2004). Guide for the Planning, Design, and Operation of Pedestrian Facilities.

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. (1999). Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities. ASTM F 1908-08. (n.d.) Standard Guide for Fences for Residential Outdoor Swimming Pools, Hot Tubs, and Spas. Retrieved from https://www.astm.org/Standards/F1908.htm.

Austroads. (1999). Guide to Traffic Engineering Practice: Bicycles. Retrieved from https://austroads.com.au/

Blessing, C., Chowdhury, A.G., Huang, P Lin, J. (2009). Full-scale validation of vortex suppression techniques for mitigation of roof uplift. Engineering Structures, Volume 31, Issue 12: 2936-2946.

British Standards Institute. (1989). BS 4043:1989 Recommendations for transplanting root-balled trees.

British Standards Institute. (1989). BS 4428: 1989 Code of practice for general landscape operations (excluding hard surfaces)

British Standards Institute. (1993). BS7370-4:1993Groundsmaintenance.Recommendationsformaintenanceofsoftlandscape (other than amenity turf).

British Standards Institute. (2005). BS 5837:2005 Trees in relation to construction recommendations.

British Standards Institute. (2015). BSEN124UnderBSEN124:2015,manholecovers,accesscovers,andgullygratesaregraded by different loading applications, ranging from class A15 up to F900.

Bureau of Fire Protection. (2009). RevisedImplementingRulesandRegulationsofPD9514. Retrieved from https://bfp.gov.ph/ revised-irr-of-ra-9514-the-fire-code-of-the-philippines/.

Centre for the Protection of National Infrastructure. (2021). CPNI. Retrieved from https://www.cpni.gov.uk/.

Centre for the Protection of National Infrastructure. (n.d.). Hostile Vehicle Mitigation. Retrieved from https://www.cpni.gov. uk/hostile-vehicle-mitigation-0.

Christensen, A. J. (2005). Dictionary of Landscape Architecture and Construction. McGraw-Hill. Retrieved from https://doi. org/10.1036/0071441425.

Congress of the Philippines. (1977). Presidential Decree No. 1096 – National Building Code of the Philippines. Retrieved from www.officialgazette.gov.ph.

Congress of the Philippines. (1983). BatasPambansaBlg.344:AnActtoEnhancetheMobilityofDisabledPersonsbyRequiring Certain Buildings, Institutions, Establishments, and Public Utilities to Install Facilities and Other Devices. Retrieved from www.officialgazette.gov.ph.

Congress of the Philippines. (1991). Republic Act No. 7160 – Local Government Code of 1991. Retrieved from https://www. officialgazette.gov.ph/1991/10/10/republic-act-no-7160/.

Congress of the Philippines. (1992). Republic Act No. 7277 – An Act Providing for the Rehabilitation, Self-Development, and Self-Reliance of Disabled Person and their Integration Into the Mainstream of Society and for Other Purpose. Retrieved from https://www.ncda.gov.ph/disability-laws/republic-acts/republic-act-7277/.

Congress of the Philippines. (2001). RepublicAct9154–FireCodeofthePhilippines. Retrieved from https://www.officialgazette. gov.ph/2001/08/11/republic-act-no-9154/.

Congress of the Philippines (2019). Republic Act No. 11361 - Anti-Obstruction of Power Lines Act. Retrieved from www. officialgazette.gov.ph.

Center for Urban Greenery and Ecology. (2009). Research Technical Note: Platform Levels in the Landscape. Retrieved from https://www.nparks.gov.sg/cuge/resources/publications/research-technical-notes/platform-levels-in-the-

landscape

Center for Urban Greenery and Ecology. (2009). Research Technical Note: Steps in the Landscape. Retrieved from https://www.nparks.gov.sg/-/media/cuge/pdf/rtn-02-2009---steps-in-the-landscape. pdf?la=en&hash=49B2F89C46B9B8A5B5BF5AA22109BE88A98E5C41.

Department of Labor and Employment. (1989) Occupational Safety and Health Standards. Retrieved from https://www. dole.gov.ph/php_assets/uploads/2019/04/OSH-Standards-2017-2.pdf.

Department of Energy. (2020). Implementing Rules and Regulations of PD 11361. Retrieved from https://www.doe.gov.ph/ sites/default/files/pdf/issuances/dc2020-02-0002.pdf

Department of Health. (1998). Implementing Rules and Regulations of Code on Sanitation of the Philippines Chapter 8: Public Swimming or Bathing Places PD 856. Retrieved from https://doh.gov.ph/node/5731.

Department of Health. (n.d.). Persons with Disabilities. Retrieved from https://doh.gov.ph/persons-with-disabilities.

Department of Public Works and Highways. (2005). Implementing Rules and Regulations of PD 1096. Retrieved from https://www.dpwh.gov.ph/dpwh/references/laws_codes_orders/PD1096.

Department of Public Works and Highways. (2008). NBCDO Circular No. 01 Series 2008. Retrieved from https://www.dpwh. gov.ph/DPWH/files/NBCDO%20MC/08-NBCDO%20MC/NBCDO%20MC_01_s2008.pdf

Department of Public Works and Highways. (2017). DepartmentOrderNo.06Series2017:DPWHStandardSpecificationfor Item 807- Site Development. Retrieved from https://www.dpwh.gov.ph/dpwh/issuances/department-order/4815.

Department of Public Works and Highways. (2015). PhilippineGreenBuildingCode–AReferralCodeoftheNationalBuilding Code (P.D. 1096). Retrieved from https://www.dpwh.gov.ph/dpwh/references/laws_codes_orders/pgbc.

Department of Public Works and Highways. (2018). Department Order No. 28 Series of 2018. DPWH Standard Specification

on Item 1722 - Fence and Railings. Retrieved from https://www.dpwh.gov.ph/dpwh/sites/default/files/issuances/DO_028_ s2018.pdf.

Department of Public Works and Highways. (2020). Department Order No. 88 Series 2020: Prescribing Guidelines on the Design of Bicycle Facilities along National Roads. Retrieved from https://www.dpwh.gov.ph/dpwh/sites/default/files/issuances/ DO_88_s2020.pdf.

Department of Public Works and Highways. (2020). Department Order No. 100 Series 2020: DPWH New and Updated Standard Plans for Various Flood Control, Urban Drainage, and Coastal Structures. Retrieved from https://www.dpwh.gov.ph/ dpwh/issuances/department-order/20659.

DiLaura, D., Houser, K. Mistrick, R., Steffy, G. (2011). The Lighting Handbook 10th Edition. Illuminating Engineering Society.

Fong, M. (2012). The Weather and Climate of Singapore. Meteorological Service Singapore.

Fountain People, Inc. (1999). FountainDesignGuide. Retrieved from https://www.scribd.com/document/379542906/FountainDesign-Guide-pdf.

Fox & Associates, Inc. (2003). Bikeway and Trail Design Standards and Planning Guidelines. Federick County Department of Parks and Recreation.

Germany FLL. (2018). GreenRoofingGuidelines–GuidelinesforthePlanning,Construction,andMaintenanceofGreenRoofing. Retrieved from https://commons.bcit.ca/greenroof/files/2019/01/FLL_greenroofguidelines_2018.pdf.

Gilma, E. F. (1997). Trees for Urban or Suburban Landscapes. Cengage Learning, Inc.

Global Alliance on Accessible Technologies and Environments. (2014). TheIllustratedTechnicalGuidetoAccessibilityStandard for the Design of Public Spaces. Retrieved from https://gaates.org/DOPS/default.php.

Harris, C. W., Dines, N.T. (2017). Time-Saver Standards for Landscape Architecture (2nd ed.). McGraw Hill Education.

Health and Safety Executive. (2012). Assessing the slip resistance of flooring: A technical information sheet. Retrieved fromhttps://www.hse.gov.uk/pubns/geis2.pdf.

Heat Island Group. (2020). Definitions and Terms – Solar Reflectance Index. Retrieved from https://heatisland.lbl.gov/ resources/definitions-and-terms.

Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board. (2009). Revised Implementing Rules and Regulations of PD 957. Retrieved from https://hlurb.gov.ph/wp-content/uploads/laws-and issuances/IRRPD957.pdf.

Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board. (2008). RevisedImplementingRulesandRegulationsforBatasPambansaBilang 220.

Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board. (2014). AGuidetoComprehensiveLandUsePlanPreparation.Volume2.Sectoral Analysis and Tools for Situational Analysis. Retrieved from https://hlurb.gov.ph/services/local-government-unit/ clup-guidebook/.

Institute of Integrated Electrical Engineers of the Philippines. (2017). Philippine Electrical Code.

International Code Council. (2012). International Fire Code. Retrieved from https://cms5.revize.com/revize/ cityofwillmar/14%20-%20International%20Fire%20Code%20(2012).pdf.

International Road Assessment Programme. (2010). Road Safety Toolkit. Retrieved from http://toolkit.irap.org/.

Interpave. (2008). Planning with Paving: Precast Concrete Sustainable Paving in Urban Design. Retrieved from https://www.paving.org.uk.

Kellar, G., Sherar, J. (2003). Low-Volume Road Engineering: Best Management Practices Field Guide. USAID.

Kidsafe WA. (2018). Play Safety. Retrieved from https://www.kidsafewa.com.au/play-safety/.

Loh, B., Hunt, W. (2013). ResearchTechnicalNote:MaintenanceRequirementsforBioretentionSystemsintheTropics.Retrieved from https://www.nparks.gov.sg/-/media/cuge/pdf/rtn-04-2013---maintenance-requirements-for-bioretentionsystems-in-the-tropics.pdf?la=en&hash=923CF7C3FD5D8D756D3306E9192BBE508543631C.

Merriam-Webster. (n.d.). Merriam-Webster.com dictionary. Retrieved from https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/.

Moyer, J. L. (2013). The Landscape Lighting Book (3rd ed.) (E-book). Wiley. Retrieved from https://archive.org/details/ landscapelightin00moye.

National Association of City Transportation Officials. (2011). Urban Bikeway Design Guide. Retrieved from www.nacto.org.

National Association of City Transportation Officials. (2016). Global Streets Design Guide. Island Press.

National Council on Disability Affairs. (2008). Implementing Rules and Regulations of BP 344. Retrieved from https://www. dpwh.gov.ph/DPWH/references/laws_codes_orders/bpb344.

National Historic Institute. (2002). ImplementingRulesandRegulationsofBP8491. Retrieved from www.officialgazette.gov.ph.

National Master Plumbers Association of the Philippines. (2000). RevisedNationalPlumbingCodeofthePhilippines. Retrieved from https://philconprices.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/10/188541488-Revised-National-Plumbing-Code-of-thePhilippines.pdf.

National Parks Board. (2012). CUGEStandards:GuidelinesonPlantingofTrees,Palms,andTallShrubsforRooftop CS E09.2012.

National Parks Board. (2017). A Handbook on Developing Sustainable Highrise Gardens – Bringing Greenery Skywards.

National Park Service. (n.d.). What is a Green Roof—Technical Preservation Services. Retrieved from https://www.nps.gov/ tps/sustainability/new-technology/green-roofs/define.htm.

National Parks Board. (2019). Guidelines on Greenery Provisions & Tree Conservation for Developments. Retrieved from https://www.nparks.gov.sg/-/media/nparks-real-content/partner-us/developers-architects-and-engineers/gdphandbook-2018-apr-3.pdf.

Philippine Green Building Council. (n.d.). BERDE Building for Ecologically Responsive Design Excellence. Retrieved from http://berdeonline.org/#about-berde.

Philpotts, M. (2015.). Designing for Walking. Chartered Institute of Highways and Transportation. Retrieved from https:// www.ciht.org.uk.

Poh, C.H. (2014). Research Technical Note: Parapets to mitigate wind loads on green roofs. Retrieved from https://www.nparks.gov.sg/-/media/cuge/pdf/rtn-04-2014---parapets-to-mitigate-wind-loads-on-green-roofs. pdf?la=en&hash=B2B0A8B4CB1B4603476CD33E8F3041BF00D20ADA

Quezon City Council. (2015). Quezon City Ordinance No. 2399 Series 2015. Retrieved from http://quezoncitycouncil.ph/ ordinance/SP/sp-2399,%20s-2015-1.pdf.

Project for Public Spaces. (2008). Creating Park Signage. Retrieved from https://www.pps.org/article/signage.

Project GUHeat. (2020). Geospatial Assessment and Modelling of Urban heat Islands in Philippine Cities. Retrieved from http://www.guheat.tcagp.upd.edu.ph/abtproj.html.

Rossiter, W.J., Wallace, T.J. (2007). RoofingResearchandStandardsDevelopment,6thVolume. American Society for Testing and Materials International.

Singapore Standards Council. (1996). CP33:1996 - Code of Practice for Lightning Protection. Retrieved from https://www.

singaporestandardseshop.sg/Product/SSPdtDetail/77860650-7ecc-4f64-a420-97c7d7a491b2.

Singapore Standards Council. (1999). CP79:1999-CodeofPracticeforSafetyManagementSystemforConstructionWorksite. Retrieved from https://www.singaporestandardseshop.sg/Product/SSPdtDetail/39dfaf6c-ae5e-43b7-8861-aba7df8c6aab.

Singapore Standards Council. (2010). Singapore Standard 556:2010. Code of Practice for the Design and Management of Aquatic Facilities. Retrieved from https://www.singaporestandardseshop.sg/Product/SSPdtDetail/8b2da00b-1dbe4074-8568-9ca891018cd9.

Singapore Standards Council. (2017). SingaporeStandard457.SpecificationforPlaygroundEquipmentforPublicUse. Retrieved from https://www.singaporestandardseshop.sg/Product/SSPdtDetail/e550ae3f-1ebd-4607-acab-00a44f48e026.

Social Determinants of Health. (n.d.). World report on road traffic injury prevention. Retrieved from https://www.who.int/ publications/i/item/world-report-on-road-traf fic-injury-prevention.

SPRI. (2016). ANSI/SPRI RP-14 Wind Design Standard for Vegetative Roofing Systems. Retrieved from https://www.spri.org/ download/ansi-spri_standards_2020_restructure/rp-14/ANSI_SPRI-RP-14-2016-Wind-Design-Standard-for-VegetativeRoofing-Systems.pdf.

Stathopoulos, T., Baskaran, A. (1988). Turbulent wind loading of roofs with parapet configurations. Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering.

Sustainable Drainage. (n.d.). Sustainable Drainage. Retrieved from https://www.susdrain.org/delivering-suds/using-suds/ background/sustainable-drainage.html.

The Alliance for Safe, Sustainable, & Resilient Environments (ASSURE) Inc. (2019). Public Parks & Open Spaces: A Planning & Development Guide. Retrieved from https://assure.ph/projects_details.html.

UK Department for Transportation. (2007). Manual for Streets. Retrieved from https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/

manual-for-streets.

UK Department for Transportation. (2017). Vehiclesecuritybarrierswithinthestreetscape(TAL01/11).Retrieved from https://www.gov.uk/government/ publications/vehicle-security-barriers-within-the-streetscape.

U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission. (1981). Public Playground Safety Handbook. Retrieved from https://www.cpsc.gov/.

U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission. (2012). Safety Barrier Guidelines for Residential Pools. Retrieved from https://www.cpsc.gov/s3fspublic/362%20Safety%20Barrier%20Guidelines%20for%20Pools.pdf.

World Health Organization (2006). Guidelines for Safe Recreational Water Environments: Swimming pools and similar environments. Retrieved from https://apps.who.int/iris/handle/10665/43336.

US Department of Energy. (2010). Exterior Lighting Guide for Federal Agencies. Retrieved fromhttps://cltc.ucdavis.edu/sites/default/files/files/ publication/2010_DOE_FEMP_Exterior_Lighting_Guide.pdf.

USSC Foundation. (2002). Real World On-premise Sign Visibility. Retrieved from https://usscfoundation.org/research-library/.

USSC Foundation. (2006). On-premise Signs. Retrieved from https://usscfoundation.org/research-library/.

Zeeger, C.V. et. al. (2002). Pedestrian Facilities User’s Guide: Providing Safety and Mobility. US Department of Transportation.

PHILIPPINE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN STANDARDS